COMPACT COMPONENT SYSTEM
CA-DXT9
CA-DXT7
INSTRUCTIONS
GVT0147-001A
[US, UN]
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Caution: Proper Ventilation
To avoid risk of electric shock and fire, and to prevent damage, locate the apparatus as follows:
1. Front:
No obstructions and open spacing.
2. Sides/Top/Back: No obstructions should be placed in the areas shown by the dimensions below.
3. Bottom:
Place on the level surface. Maintain an adequate air path for ventilation by placing
on a stand with a height of 10 cm or more.
Front view
Side view
Wall or obstructions
Wall or obstructions
15 cm
15 cm
1 cm
1 cm
15 cm
CA-DXT9
CA-DXT7
CA-DXT9
CA-DXT7
10 cm
G-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts
inside the unit; leave all servicing to qualified service personnel.
3. CAUTION: Visible and invisible laser radiation when open and interlock
failed or defeated. Avoid direct exposure to beam.
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED INSIDE UNIT.
G-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Precautions
Contents
Connections........................................................................ 3
Installation
Display Indication ............................................................. 8
Daily Operations—Playback............................................ 9
Canceling the Demonstration.......................................... 9
Listening to the Radio ................................................... 10
Playing Back a Disc ...................................................... 11
Playing Back a Tape...................................................... 13
Daily Operations—Sound&Other Adjustments............. 14
Adjusting the Volume ................................................... 14
Adjusting the Speaker Output Level ............................. 14
Reinforcing the Bass Sound.......................................... 15
Selecting the Sound Modes........................................... 15
Creating Your Own Sound Modes—User Mode .......... 15
Selecting the Surround Modes ...................................... 16
Presetting Automatic DVD Video
• Install the System in a location with adequate ventilation to
prevent internal heat buildup in the System.
DO NOT install the System in a location near
heat sources, or in a place subject to direct
sunlight, excessive dust or vibration.
• Install in a place which is level, dry and neither too hot nor
too cold—between 5°C and 35°C.
• Leave sufficient distance between the System and the TV.
• Keep the speakers away from the TV to avoid interference
with TV.
Power sources
• When unplugging the System from the wall outlet, always
pull on the plug, not the AC power cord.
Sound Increase Level ................................................ 16
Changing the Color System and Scanning Mode.......... 17
Changing the Picture Tone............................................ 17
Changing the Display Brightness.................................. 18
Setting the Clock........................................................... 18
Turning Off the Power Automatically .......................... 18
Unique DVD/VCD Operations....................................... 19
Selecting the Sound Track............................................. 19
Selecting the Subtitle Language.................................... 20
Selecting the View Angle.............................................. 20
Reviewing the Playback Quickly .................................. 20
Selecting Browsable Still Pictures ................................ 20
Playing Back Bonus Group........................................... 21
Special Picture Playback ............................................... 21
Advanced Disc Operations ............................................. 22
Programming the Playing Order—Program Play.......... 22
Playing at Random—Random Play............................... 23
Playing Repeatedly—Repeat Play ................................ 24
Prohibiting Disc Ejection—Child Lock........................ 24
On-Screen Disc Operations............................................ 25
On-screen Bar Information............................................ 25
Operations Using the On-screen Bar............................. 26
Operations on the Control Screen ................................. 29
Recording Operations..................................................... 32
Enjoying Karaoke ........................................................... 34
Singing Along (Karaoke) .............................................. 34
Reducing the Lead Vocal—Vocal Masking.................. 35
Scoring Your Karaoke Skill .......................................... 35
Reserving Karaoke Songs—Karaoke Program Play..... 36
Timer Operations............................................................ 37
Setup Menu Operations.................................................. 39
Operating the TV ............................................................ 41
Additional Information................................................... 42
Troubleshooting ............................................................ 45
Specifications ................................................................ 47
Parts Index ...................................................................... 50
DO NOT handle the AC power cord with wet
hands.
Moisture condensation
Moisture may condense on the lenses inside the System in
the following cases:
• After starting to heat the room
• In a damp room
• If the System is brought directly from a cold to a warm
place.
Should this occur, the System may malfunction. In this case,
leave the System turned on for a few hours until the moisture
evaporates, unplug the AC power cord, then plug it in again.
Internal heat
• Make sure there is good ventilation around the unit. Poor
ventilation could overheat and damage the unit.
–A cooling fan is inside the unit to prevent heat buildup.
DO NOT block the ventilation openings or
holes. If they are blocked by a newspaper or
cloth, etc., the heat may not be able to get out.
Others
• Should any metallic object or liquid fall into the System,
unplug the AC power cord and consult your dealer before
operating any further.
DO NOT disassemble the System since there
are no user serviceable parts inside.
• If you are not going to operate the System for an extended
period of time, unplug the AC power cord from the wall
outlet.
If anything goes wrong, unplug the AC power cord and
consult your dealer.
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playable Disc Types
INFO
IMPORTANT: Before playing a disc, make sure of
the following...
• Turn on the TV and select an appropriate input mode on
the TV to view the pictures or on-screen displays.
• For disc playback, you can change the initial setting to
your preference. See “Setup Menu Operations” on
page 39.
DIGITAL VIDEO
If “
” appears on the TV screen when you press a
DVD Logo is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing
Corporation.
button, the disc cannot accept the operation you have
tried to do.
• CD-R/-RW: Recorded in the Audio CD/Video CD/
SVCD formats and MP3/WMA/JPEG files.
• DVD-R: Recorded in the DVD Video format.
How to Read This Manual
• Button and control operations are explained as listed in the
table below.
• DVD-RW: Recorded in the DVD Video format or the
Video Recording (DVD-VR) format.
• DVD-RAM: Recorded in the Video Recording (DVD-
VR) format.
•
Some related tips and notes are explained later in the
sections “Learning More about This System” and
“Troubleshooting,” but not in the same section
In addition to the above discs, this system can play back
audio data recorded on CD Text, CD-G (CD Graphics), and
CD-Extra.
• The following discs cannot be played back:
DVD+R, DVD+RW, CD-I (CD-I Ready), Photo CD, etc.
Playing back these discs will generate noise and damage
the speakers.
explaining the operations (
indicates that the
INFO
content has some information).
Indicates that you press the button briefly.
Indicates that you press the button briefly and
repeatedly until an option you want is
selected.
• In this manual, “file” and “track” are interchangeably used
for MP3/WMA/JPEG operations.
Caution for DualDisc playback:
Indicates that you press one of the buttons.
The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply
with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.
Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on
this product may not be recommended.
Indicates that you press and hold the button
for a specified period.
2sec.
The number inside the arrow indicates the
period of press (in the example, 2 seconds).
About color system
Indicates that you turn the control toward the
specified direction(s).
This System accommodates both NTSC and PAL system
and can play back discs recorded with either system.
To change the color system, see page 17.
Indicates that this operation is only
possible using the remote control.
Remote
ONLY
Note on Region Code
This System can play back only DVD Videos whose Region
Code numbers include “3.”
Indicates that this operation is only
possible using the main unit.
Main Unit
ONLY
EX.:
Audio formats
The System can play back the following digital audio
formats.
•
LPCM (Linear PCM),
DIGITAL (Dolby Digital),
DTS (Digital Theater Systems), MLP (Meridian Lossless
Packing)
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
Do not connect the AC power cord until all other
connections have been made.
Supplied accessories
• FM antenna (x1)
• AM loop antenna (x1)
• Composite video cord (x1)
• Remote control (x1)
• Batteries (x2)
• AC plug adapter (x1)
If any item is missing, consult your dealer immediately.
• Connect VIDEO OUT directly to the video input of your
TV. Connecting VIDEO OUT to a TV via a VCR may
interfere with your viewing when playing back a copy-
protected disc. Your viewing may be interfered when
connecting VIDEO OUT to an integrated TV/VCR system.
CA-DXT9
~ From the video input of TV/monitor
See page 5.
Ÿ From the digital input of digital audio
component such as CD recorder
See page 5.
! From the analog audio output of auxiliary
equipment (VCR, etc.)
See page 5.
⁄ From AM/FM antenna
See page 5.
@ From the speakers
See page 6.
¤ Voltage selector
Before plugging in, confirm the position the
voltage selector points at. See page 7.
# To a wall outlet
Plug the AC power cord only after all
connections are complete.
• If the wall outlet does not match the AC plug,
use the supplied AC plug adapter.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CA-DXT7
~ From the video input of TV/monitor
See page 5.
Ÿ From the digital input of digital audio
component such as CD recorder
See page 5.
! From the analog audio output of auxiliary
equipment (VCR, etc.)
See page 5.
⁄ From AM/FM antenna
See page 5.
@ From the speakers
See page 6.
¤ Voltage selector
Before plugging in, confirm the position the
voltage selector points at. See page 7.
# To a wall outlet
Plug the AC power cord only after all
connections are complete.
• If the wall outlet does not match the AC plug,
use the supplied AC plug adapter.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
~ TV/monitor
⁄ AM/FM antenna
To assemble the AM loop antenna
Composite video
cord (supplied)
S video cord
(not supplied)
Green
Component video cord (not supplied)
Red
Blue
To connect AM/FM antenna
AM loop antenna (supplied)
Turn it until the best reception is
obtained.
• To select progressive scanning mode (see page 17), use
COMPONENT jacks.
• Connect the VIDEO jack, S-VIDEO jack, or
COMPONENT jacks whichever you want to use.
Ÿ Digital audio component
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
FM antenna (supplied)
Protective cap
Extend it so that you can obtain the best
reception.
For better AM/FM reception
AM loop antenna (supplied)
Keep it connected.
• Set “DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT” in the “AUDIO” menu
correctly according to the connected digital audio
equipment (see page 40). If setting is incorrect, loud noise
may be generated causing damage to the speakers.
Vinyl-covered wire (not supplied)
Extend it horizontally.
! Auxiliary equipment
Red
FM outdoor antenna
(not supplied)
Stereo audio cord
(not supplied)
White
• Disconnect the supplied FM antenna, and connect to an
outdoor FM antenna using a 75 Ω wire with coaxial type
connector (IEC or DIN45325).
• Make sure the antenna conductors do not touch any other
terminals, connecting cords and power cord. Also, keep the
antennas away from metallic parts of the System,
connecting cords, and the AC power cord. This could cause
poor reception.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Use only speakers with the same speaker impedance as
indicated by the speaker terminals on the rear of the System.
• The front and center speakers are magnetically shielded to
avoid color distortions on TVs. However, if not installed
properly, it may cause color distortions. So, pay attention to
the following when installing the speakers.
@ Speakers
To connect the speaker cords
– When placing the speakers near a TV set, turn off the
TV’s main power switch or unplug it before installing the
speakers.
Then wait at least 30 minutes before turning on the TV’s
main power switch again.
Some TVs may still be affected even though you have
followed the above instruction. If this happens, move the
speakers away from the TV.
• When connecting the speaker cords, match their polarity
with that of the speaker terminals: blue/red/green/white/
gray to (+) and black to (–).
For CA-DXT9
From right front speaker (blue/black)
• DO NOT connect more than one speaker to
each terminal.
• DO NOT push or pull the speakers as this
will damage the foot spacers at the bottom
of the speakers.
Fromleftfrontspeaker
(blue/black)
Speaker layout
To enjoy multi-channel sound, locate the speakers as
follows. If you cannot locate like this, adjust the speaker
setting by using the Setup menu (see page 40).
For CA-DXT9
From right
subwoofer
(red/black)
From left subwoofer
(red/black)
From center
speaker
(green/black)
From right surround
speaker (white/black)
From left surround
speaker (white/black)
For CA-DXT7
From right front speaker (blue/black)
From left front speaker
(blue/black)
For CA-DXT7
Fromsubwoofer
(red/black)
From center speaker
(green/black)
From left surround
speaker (gray/black)
From right surround
speaker (gray/black)
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To remove the speaker grilles of the front speakers
Preparing the remote control
Holes
When using the remote
Projection
control, point the top of the
remote control toward the
remote sensor as directly as
possible. If you operate it
from a diagonal position,
theoperatingrange(approx.
5 m) may be shorter.
R6(SUM-3)/AA(15F)
Speaker grille
• Dispose of batteries in the proper manner, according to
federal, state, and local regulations.
¤ To adjust the voltage selector
DO NOT recharge, short, disassemble or
heat the battery or dispose of it in a fire.
Use a screwdriver to rotate the
voltage selector so that the voltage
mark is pointing at the same voltage
as where you are plugging in the unit.
(See also the back cover page.)
Voltage mark
DO NOT plug in before setting the voltage
selector and all connection procedures are
complete.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Display Indication
The indications on the display teach you a lot of things while
9 Tape operation indicators
you are operating the System.
• TAPE: lights when a tape is loaded in either deck A or B.
Before operating the System, be familiar with when and how
the indicator illuminates on the display.
•
(Reverse Mode): lights to indicate the current
Reverse Mode (see page 13).
• A: lights when a tape is in the deck A.
• B: lights when a tape is in the deck B.
1
2
3456 7
8
9
•
2 3 (tape direction):
– Lights to indicate the current tape running direction.
– Flashes slowly during playback and recording.
– Flashes quickly while rewinding a tape.
• REC: lights while recording.
p Disc operation indicators
• PROGRAM: lights when Program Play is activated.
• RANDOM: lights when Random Play is activated.
• REPEAT: lights when Repeat Play is activated.
• ALL DISC: lights when All Disc Repeat is activated.
• 1 DISC: lights when One Disc Repeat is activated.
• 1: lights when One Track/Chapter/Step Repeat is
activated.
p
q w e
r
t
y
u
i
o
;
1 PROGRESSIVE indicator
• Lights when the progressive scanning mode is selected.
2 Karaoke operation indicators (see pages 34 to 36)
•
: lights when the Mic Mixing Mode is activated;
flashes when scoring function is in use.
/
q Main display
w TITLE indicator
• Lights to indicate the title number for DVD Video.
e Audio signal indicators
• L/R/C/LS/RS/LFE: Lights to indicate the incoming audio
channel signals.
• MIC: lights when the Mic Mixing Mode is activated;
flashes when scoring function is in use.
• ECHO: lights when the echo effect is activated.
• V.MASKING: lights when the Vocal Masking Mode is
activated.
3 Source signal indicators
•
: Lights to indicate the speakers from which
sound is emitted.
• DTS: lights when a source signal is DTS.
•
DIGITAL: lights when a source signal is Dolby
Digital.
r GROUP indicator
• Lights to indicate the group number.
t CHAP. indicator
• Lights to indicate the chapter number.
y TRACK indicator
• DVD: lights when DVD Video is detected.
• DVD AUDIO: lights when DVD Audio is detected.
• PCM: lights when a source signal is linear PCM.
4 BONUS indicator
• Lights to indicate the track number.
u FILE indicator
• Lights when DVD Audio with bonus group is detected
(see page 21).
• Lights to indicate the file number.
i Disc indicators
• 1 – 5: lights to indicate the current disc tray.
5 B.S.P. indicator
• Lights when browsable still pictures on DVD Audio are
available (see page 20).
•
: lights when a disc is detected on the disc tray; rotates
during playback or paused.
6 RESUME indicator
• Lights when Resume is activated (see page 40).
7 Timer indicators
o Sound Mode/Surround Mode indicators (see page 15)
• DOLBY PL II MOVIE/MUSIC: lights when Dolby Pro
Logic Modes (Movie or Music) is activated.
• S.MODE: lights when one of the Sound Modes/Surround
Modes is activated.
• DSP MODE: lights when one of the DSP Modes is
activated.
; FM reception indicators
•
: lights when Daily Timer or Recording Timer stands
by or is working or being set.
• SLEEP: lights when the Sleep Timer is activated.
• DAILY: lights when the Daily Timer stands by; flashes
while working or being set.
• REC: lights when the Recording Timer stands by; flashes
while working or being set.
• ST (stereo): lights while an FM stereo station with
sufficient signal strength is tuned in.
• MONO: lights while receiving an FM stereo station in
monaural.
8 DVD LEVEL 1/2/3 indicators
• Lights to indicate the DVD Video increase level.
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Daily Operations—Playback
¥ Turn on the power.
In this manual, the operation using the remote control
The STANDBY lamp on the main unit goes off.
is mainly explained; however, you can use the buttons
and controls on the main unit if they have the same (or
similar) name and marks.
• Without pressing
AUDIO, the System also turns
on by pressing one of the source select buttons in the
next step.
ø Select the source.
Playback automatically starts if the selected source is
ready to start playback.
• If you press AUX, start playback source on the external
component.
1
AUDIO
DISC 1 –
DISC 5
TV
π Adjust the volume.
2
3
[ Operate the target source as explained
FM MODE /
later.
MENU
TOP MENU
/ / / /
ENTER
To turn off (stand by) the system
The STANDBY lamp on the main unit
lights in red.
• A small amount of power is always
consumed even while on standby.
AUDIO
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
GROUP/TITLE
10 keys
7
9
10
+10
RETURN
REVERSE
MODE
For private listening
Connect a pair of headphones to the PHONES jack on the
main unit. The sound will no longer come out of the
speakers. Be sure to turn down the volume before
connecting or putting the headphones.
• Disconnecting the headphones will activate the
speakers again.
SET
AUDIO
1
2
DO NOT turn off (stand by) the System with
the volume set to an extremely high level;
Otherwise, the sudden blast of sound can
damage your hearing, speakers and/or
headphones when you turn on the System or
start playback.
AUX
DVD/CD
TAPE-A
TAPE-B
FM/AM
Canceling the Demonstration
Main Unit
ONLY
2
sec.
DEMO OFF
AUDIO VOL
3
DEMO START
To start the demonstration, select DEMO START.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
Listening to the Radio
INFO
If the received FM station is hard to listen
To select the AM tuner interval spacing
The MONO indicator lights on the
display. Reception will improve though
stereo effect is lost—monaural reception
mode.
Main Unit
ONLY
FM MODE
Some countries space AM stations 9 kHz apart, and other
countries use 10 kHz spacing.
To restore the stereo effect, press the
button again (the MONO indicator goes
off).
1 Select “AM,” then turn off (stand by) the System.
FM
AM
Remote
ONLY
To preset stations
You can preset 30 FM and 15 AM stations.
• To cancel the operation during procedure, press CANCEL.
2 Select the AM tuner interval spacing.
To select 9 kHz:
1 Tune in to a station you want to preset.
• You can also store the monaural reception mode for FM
preset stations if selected.
2 Start presetting.
SET
(holding then...)
To select 10 kHz:
3 Select a preset number.
Examples:
1
2
5
8
0
3
To select preset number 5, press 5.
To select preset number 15, press +10,
then 5.
To select preset number 30, press +10,
+10, then 10.
4
6
7
9
(holding then...)
10
+10
• You can also use +/– buttons.
To select the band (FM/AM)
FM/AM
FM
AM
4 Store the station.
To tune in to a station
While FM or AM is selected...
SET
1
sec.
Increases the frequencies.
Decreases the frequencies.
To tune in to a preset station
1 Select the band (FM or AM).
FM/AM
Frequency starts changing on the display.
When a station (frequency) with sufficient signal strength is
tuned in, the frequency search stops.
FM
AM
• When you repeatedly press the button, the frequency
changes step by step.
To stop searching manually, press either button.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Select a preset number.
On-screen guide icons
• During disc playback, the following icons may appear for
a while on the TV screen:
Examples:
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
To select preset number 5, press 5.
To select preset number 15, press
+10, then 5.
To select preset number 30, press
+10, +10, then 10.
Appears at the beginning of a scene containing
multi-angle views.
7
9
10
+10
Appears at the beginning of a scene containing
multi-audio languages.
• You can also use 4/¢
buttons on the remote control or
PRESET +/– buttons on the main
unit.
Appears at the beginning of a scene containing
multi-subtitle languages.
• The following icons will be also shown on the TV screen
to indicate your current operation.
,
,
,
,
,
Playing Back a Disc
Before operating a disc, be familiar how a disc is recorded.
INFO
• To deactivate the on-screen guide icons, see “ON
SCREEN GUIDE” on page 40.
• DVD Video comprises of “Titles” which includes
“
“
“
Chapters,” DVD Audio/MP3/WMA comprise of
Groups” which includes “Tracks,” JPEG comprises of
Groups” which includes “Files,” and CD/SVCD/VCD
To select a disc
DISC 1
DISC 2
DISC 3
comprise of only “Tracks.”
• For JPEG playback, see page 30.
DISC 4
DISC 5
To insert discs
Main Unit
ONLY
Playback starts.
Remote
ONLY
To select a title/group
While playing a disc...
1
2
3
6
GROUP/TITLE
4
5
8
0
• When using an 8 cm disc, place it on the inner circle of the
disc tray.
7
9
To close the disc tray, press the same 0 again.
• If you press 3 for the same tray, the disc tray closes
automatically and playback starts.
10
+10
To start:
To pause:
To stop:
To select a chapter/track
While playing a disc...
DVD/CD
FM MODE
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
or
Playback of the
current disc starts. DVD/CD 3.
To release it, press
7
9
• First time you press
4, you can go back
to the beginning of the
current chapter/track.
10
+10
While playing DVD/SVCD/VCD/MP3: This System can
store the stop point, and when you start playback again by
pressing DVD/CD 3, it starts from the position where you
have stopped—Resume Play. (RESUME indicator lights up
when you stop playback.)
To stop completely while Resume is activated, press 7
twice. (To cancel Resume, see “RESUME” on page 40.)
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7 For SVCD/VCD with PBC
While playing a disc with PBC, “PBC” appears on the
display instead of the playing time.
To locate a particular portion
While playing a disc except MP3/WMA...
When disc menu appears on the TV screen, select an item on
the menu. Playback of the selected item starts.
Examples:
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
To select number 5, press 5.
To select number 15, press +10,
then 5.
To select number 30, press +10,
+10, then 10.
• No sound comes out while searching on DVD Video/
SVCD/VCD.
To return to normal playback, press DVD/CD 3.
7
9
10
+10
Remote
ONLY
T
o select an item directly
You can select a title/chapter/track directly and start
playback.
• For DVD Video, you can select a title before starting
playback, while you can select a chapter after starting
To move to the next or
previous page of the
current menu:
To return to the previous
menu:
playback
.
RETURN
Examples:
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
To select number 5, press 5.
To select number 15, press +10,
then 5.
To select number 30, press +10,
+10, then 10.
7
9
To cancel PBC
10
+10
Remote
ONLY
To play back by using the disc menu
You can operate the disc play using the disc menu.
You can also cancel PBC by pressing the 10 keys to start
playback when disc menu is not shown on the TV screen.
To reactivate PBC, press 7, then press 4.
7 For DVD Video/DVD Audio
1 Show the disc menu.
TOP MENU/PG
MENU/PL
or
2 Select an item on the disc menu.
ENTER
• On some discs, you can also select items by entering the
number using the 10 keys.
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change the tape running direction
Playing Back a Tape
TAPE-A
TAPE-B
3 (forward
2 (reverse
)
)
To insert a tape
You can play back type I tapes.
• The use of C-120 or longer tape is not recommended.
Push
To reverse the tape automatically
REVERSE
MODE
Tape is reversed, and playback repeats until
you stop it.
Insert
Tape is not reversed. When the current side of
the tape reaches its end, playback stops.
Tape is reversed once.
To playback the both decks A and B continuously
—Relay Play
When the cassettes are set in the both decks...
Close
REVERSE
MODE
TAPE-A
TAPE-B
To start:
To stop:
TAPE-A
TAPE-B
You can start playback of either deck A or B.
To rewind tape:
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Daily Operations—Sound&Other Adjustments
Adjusting the Volume
Remote Control
The volume level can be adjusted in 32 steps (VOLUME
MIN, VOLUME 1 – VOLUME 30, and VOLUME MAX).
Remote control:
Main unit:
AUDIO
AUDIO VOL
TV
AUDIO VOL +/–
/ / / /
ENTER
Adjusting the Speaker Output
Remote
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
ONLY
Level
7
9
You can adjust the speaker output level from –6 (dB) to +6
(dB).
• You can also use the setup menu to adjust the speaker
output level (see page 40).
10
+10
VFP /
SCAN MODE
DVD LEVEL
EFFECT
SUB WFR LEVEL
CHANNEL LEVEL
SOUND MODE
SURROUND MODE
+/–
1 Select the speaker you want to adjust.
RHYTHM AX
SET
(Front left
speaker)
(Front right
speaker)
(Center
speaker)
CLOCK/TIMER
SLEEP
DIMMER
FRONT L FRONT R
CENTER
CHANNEL
LEVEL
SURROUND R
(Surround right
speaker)
SURROUND L
(Surround left
speaker)
Main unit
SET
2 Adjust the output level.
SUB WOOFER
LEVEL
VOLUME
SURROUND
MODE
RHYTHM AX
DVD LEVEL
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to adjust other speakers.
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
Reinforcing the Bass Sound
Creating Your Own Sound
Modes—User Mode
INFO
To adjust the bass level gradually
You can select the subwoofer level from level 0
(minimum) to level 4 (maximum).
INFO
You can adjust the preset Sound Modes to create your own
Sound Modes which suit your taste. The changed settings can
be stored as the USER1, USER2 and USER3 Modes.
Remote control:
Main unit:
While the Sound Mode name is shown on the display...
SUB WFR
LEVEL
1 Enter the SEA Control Mode.
SET
2
SET
To emphasize rhythmical feeling—RHYTHM AX
This function emphasizes bass attack feeling.
3 Adjust the SEA pattern.
1 Adjust BASS.
RHYTHM AX
ON
2 Adjust TREBLE.
OFF
SET
Remote
ONLY
Selecting the Sound Modes
You can select one of the preset Sound Modes.
• You can adjust the bass and treble level from –5 to
+5.
SEA Modes
SOUND
MODE
4 Select one of the User Modes.
ROCK
POP CLASSIC
USER1–3
FLAT
USER1
USER2
USER3
SEA (Sound Effect Amplifier) Modes
ROCK
Boosts low and high frequency. Good for
acoustic music (initial setting).
5 Store the setting.
POP
Good for vocal music.
SET
CLASSIC
User Modes
USER1/2/3
Good for classical music.
Your individual mode stored in memory.
See the next column “Creating Your Own
Sound Modes—User Mode.”
• The Sound Mode changes to the one you have stored.
To cancel the Sound Mode, select “FLAT.”
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
To adjust the DSP effect level
Selecting the Surround Modes
INFO
When one of the DSP Modes (except for “ALL CH. ST”) is
selected...
• For DVD/CD, TAPE-A, TAPE-B, AUX:
SURROUND
MODE
EFFECT
EFFECT 1
EFFECT 2
ALL CH. ST
MUSIC
DANCE
MOVIE
HALL STADIUM
AUTO
STEREO
EFFECT 3
• The initial setting is “EFFECT3.”
• For FM/AM:
SURROUND
MODE
ALL CH. ST
STEREO
DANCE
HALL
Presetting Automatic DVD Video
Sound Increase Level
STADIUM
The DVD Video sound is sometimes recorded at a lower
level than for other discs and sources. You can set the
increase level for the currently loaded DVD Video, so you
do not have to adjust the volume when you change the
source.
DSP Modes
ALL CH. ST All Channel Stereo; Creates larger stereo
sound field using all the connected
speakers (initial setting).
DVD LEVEL
DVD LEVEL1
DVD LEVEL2
DANCE
HALL
Increases resonance and bass.
Adds depth and brilliance to the sound.
DVD LEVEL3
STADIUM
Adds clarity and spreads the sound, as in
an outdoor stadium.
As the number increases, sound level also increases.
• The initial setting is “DVD LEVEL3.”
Stereo Mode
STEREO
Canceles the Surround Mode.
Auto Surround Mode
AUTO • When multi-channel surround signal
comes in, multi-channel surround mode
is activated.
• When Dolby Surround signal comes in,
MOVIE (Dolby Pro Logic II Movie)
mode is selected.
• When 2-channel signal comes in,
STEREO mode is selected.
Dolby Pro Logic II Modes
MOVIE
Creates 5.1-channel surround field from
2-ch source (suitable for movie source).
MUSIC
Creates 5.1-channel surround field from
2-ch source (suitable for music source).
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Select a preset picture tone.
NORMAL
Changing the Color System and
CINEMA
USER1
Remote
ONLY
Scanning Mode
INFO
USER2
You can select the video output to match it to the color
system of your TV (NTSC or PAL).
• If you connect a progressive TV through the
COMPONENT jacks, you can enjoy a high quality picture
from the built-in DVD player by selecting progressive
scanning mode.
• You can change the setting only while the disc playback is
stopped.
NORMAL
CINEMA
Normally select this.
Suitable for a movie source.
USER1/USER2 You can adjust parameters and can
store the settings (see below).
1 Enter the color system setting mode.
To adjust the picture tone
4
sec.
1 Select “USER1” or “USER2.”
• Follow steps 1 and 2 above.
2 Select a parameter you want to adjust.
SCAN MODE
VFP
2 Select the color system and scanning mode.
ENTER
NTSC
PAL
PAL PROG
NTSC PROG
GAMMA
Adjust if the neutral color is bright
or dark. The brightness of dark and
bright portions is maintained
(–3 to +3).
NTSC / PAL NTSC or PAL Interlaced scanning.
For a conventional PAL or NTSC TV.
NTSC / PAL NTSC or PAL Progressive scanning.
BRIGHTNESS Adjust if the picture is bright or dark
PROG
For a progressive NTSC or PAL TV.
as a whole (–8 to +8).
3 Store the setting.
CONTRAST
Adjust if the far and near position is
unnatural (–7 to +7).
SET
SATURATION Adjust if the picture is whitish or
blackish (–7 to +7).
TINT
Adjust if the human skin color is
unnatural (–7 to +7).
SHARPNESS
Adjust if the picture is indistinct
(–8 to +8).
Remote
ONLY
Changing the Picture Tone
While viewing a playback pictures on the TV, you can select
the preset picture tone, or adjust it and store your own
preference.
3 Adjust the parameter.
ENTER
To select a preset picture tone
1 While playing, display VFP setting screen.
NORMAL
SCAN MODE
4 Repeat steps 2 to 3 to adjust other parameters.
To erase the VFP screen, press VFP again.
GAMMA
0
0
0
0
0
0
VFP
BRIGHTNESS
CONTRAST
SATURATION
TINT
SHARPNESS
On the TV screen
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
Remote
ONLY
Changing the Display Brightness
Turning Off the Power Automatically
With Sleep Timer, you can fall asleep while listening to
music.
DIMMER
DIMMER 1 DIMMER 2
DIMMER OFF
1 Specify the time (in minutes).
(Canceled)
SLEEP
10
20
30
60
150
90
DIMMER 1
DIMMER 2
Dims the display and the illumination
on the main unit*.
Canceled
120
Dims the display (same as DIMMER 1)
and turns off the illumination on the
main unit*.
2 Wait until the set time goes off.
To check the time remaining until the shut-off time
*Except for the RHYTHM AX and KARAOKE SCORING
lamps.
SLEEP
• If you press the button repeatedly, you can
change the shut-off time.
Remote
ONLY
Setting the Clock
INFO
Without setting the build-in clock, you cannot use any
timers.
• To exit from the clock setting, press CLOCK/TIMER as
required.
• To correct a misentry during the process, press CANCEL.
You can return to the previous step.
1 Activate clock setting mode.
CLOCK/
TIMER
• If you have already adjusted the clock before, press the
button repeatedly until the clock time starts flashing.
2 Adjust the hour, then minute.
SET
Now the built-in clock starts working.
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unique DVD/VCD Operations
Remote
ONLY
Selecting the Sound Track
INFO
Remote Control
For DVD Video: While playing back a chapter containing
audio languages, you can select the language to listen to.
For DVD Audio: While playing back a track containing
audio channels, you can select the audio channel to listen to.
For DVD-VR/Karaoke SVCD/VCD: When playing back a
track, you can select the audio channel to play.
• You can also select the audio track using the on-screen bar
(see page 26).
AUDIO
TV
DVD/CD 3
While playing DVD Video...
AUDIO
GLANCE
BACK
/ / / /
ENTER
Ex.:
1/3
2/3
3/3
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
10 keys
ENGLISH
FRENCH
JAPANESE
AUDIO
SUB TITLE
ANGLE
7
9
10
+10
1/3
2/3
FRENCH
3/3
JAPANESE
ENGLISH
ZOOM
PAGE
While playing a DVD-VR, SVCD, or VCD...
SVCD
ST1
ST2
L2
L1
AUDIO
R2
R1
DVD-VR/VCD
ST
L
R
ST1/ST2/ST To listen to normal stereo (2 channel)
playback.
L1/L2/L
R1/R2/R
To listen to the left audio channel.
To listen to the right audio channel.
• SVCD can have 4 audio channels. Karaoke SVCD usually
uses these 4 channels to record two 2-channel recordings
(ST1/ST2).
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
Remote
ONLY
Selecting the Subtitle Language
Selecting the View Angle
For DVD Video: While playing back a chapter containing
subtitles in different languages, you can select the subtitle
language to display on the TV screen.
For DVD Video only: While playing back a chapter
containing multi-view angles, you can view the same scene
from different angles.
For DVD-VR: While playing, you can turn on or off the
subtitle.
• You can also select the view angle using the on-screen bar
(see page 26).
For SVCD: While playing, you can select the subtitles even
if no subtitles are recorded on the disc.
While playing back...
• You can also select the subtitle language using the on-
screen bar (see page 26).
ANGLE
While playing a DVD Video...
Ex.:
1 Display the subtitle selection window.
1/3
2/3
3/3
SUB TITLE
1
2
3
1/3
2/3
3/3
1
2
3
2 Select the subtitle language.
Ex.:
Remote
ONLY
Reviewing the Playback Quickly
1/3
2/3
3/3
For DVD Video/DVD-VR only: You can move the
playback position to 10 seconds before the current position
(only within the same title)—Glance Back.
ENGLISH
FRENCH
JAPANESE
1/3
ENGLISH
2/3
FRENCH
3/3
JAPANESE
While playing back...
GLANCE BACK
While playing a DVD-VR...
SUB TITLE
Remote
ONLY
Selecting Browsable Still Pictures
For DVD Audio only: While playing back a track linked to
browsable still pictures (B.S.P.), you can select the still
picture (turn the page) to be shown on the TV screen.
• If a track is linked to browsable still pictures (B.S.P.), they
are usually shown in turn automatically during playback.
• You can also select the page using the on-screen bar (see
page 26).
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
While playing an SVCD...
SUB TITLE
Each time you press the button, the still
picture changes one after another (if
available).
PAGE
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
Slow-motion playback
Playing Back Bonus Group
INFO
For DVD Audio only: Some DVD Audios have a special
group called “bonus group” whose contents are not open to
the public.
1 While playing...
FM MODE
• To play back a bonus group, you have to enter the specific
“key number” (a kind of password) for the bonus group.
The way of getting the key number depends on the disc.
Still picture playback starts.
2 Select slow motion speed.
1 Select the bonus group.
• The bonus group is usually recorded as the last group
(for example, if a disc contains 4 groups including a
bonus group, “group 4” is the bonus group).
• For how to select the group, see “To select a title/group”
on page 11.
1/32
1/32
1/16
1/16
1/8
1/8
1/4
1/4
1/2
1/2
2 Enter the key number.
1
2
5
8
0
3
4
6
* Not available for DVD-VR/SVCD/VCD.
ENTER
7
9
To resume normal playback, press DVD/CD 3.
10
+10
Remote
ONLY
Zoom
3 Follow the interactive instruction shown on the TV
1 While playing...
screen.
ZOOM 1
ZOOM 2
ZOOM 3
ZOOM 4
ZOOM 5
ZOOM
To cancel the key number entry, press 7.
ZOOM OFF
ZOOM 6
Special Picture Playback
INFO
As the number increases, magnification also increases.
• For JPEG, see page 31.
Still picture playback
While playing...
2 Move the zoomed-in position.
FM MODE
Still picture playback starts.
To resume normal playback, press DVD/CD 3.
Frame-by-frame playback
1 While playing...
FM MODE
To resume normal playback, press ZOOM repeatedly until
“ZOOM OFF” appears on the TV screen.
Still picture playback starts.
2 Advance the still picture frame by frame.
FM MODE
To resume normal playback, press DVD/CD 3.
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Disc Operations
Remote
ONLY
Programming the Playing Order
—Program Play
Remote Control
INFO
You can arrange the playing order of the tracks (up to 99)
before you start playback.
AUDIO
TV
1 Before starting playback, activate Program Play.
PLAY MODE
DVD/CD 3
PROGRAM RANDOM
Canceled
/
/
/
On the display
/
PROGRAM
No Disc
1
Group/Title
Track/Chapter
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
10 keys
7
9
10
+10
USE NUMERIC KEYS TO PROGRAM TRACKS.
USE CANCEL TO DELETE THE PROGRAM.
PLAY MODE
REPEAT
CANCEL
On the TV screen
2 Select chapters or tracks you want for Program Play.
1 Select a disc number.
2 Select a title or group number.
3 Select a chapter or track number.
Main unit
To enter the numbers:
Examples:
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
To enter number 5, press 5.
To enter number 15, press +10,
then 5.
To enter number 30, press +10,
+10, then 10.
7
9
10
+10
DVD/CD
DISC 1 0
3 Repeat the above step 2 until you finish what you want
to program.
4 Start playback.
Playback starts in the order you
have programmed.
DVD/CD
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
To skip a track:
To pause:
To stop*:
Playing at Random—Random Play
FM MODE
You can play the contents of all the loaded discs at random.
• Random Play cannot be used for some DVDs.
1 Before starting playback, activate Random Play.
Torelease, press
DVD/CD 3.
PLAY MODE
PROGRAM RANDOM
Canceled
*Resume does not work for Program Play.
Remote
ONLY
To check the programmed contents
Before or after playback...
2 Start playback.
in the reverse order
Playback of the current disc
DVD/CD
starts in a random order. When
all chapters/tracks on the current
disc are played, playback of the
next disc starts. Random Play
ends when all loaded discs are
played.
in the programmed order
To modify the program
Before or after playback...
To erase the last step:
To erase the entire
program:
To skip:
To pause:
To stop:
FM MODE
CANCEL
To go to the
beginning of the
current track,
press 4.
To release, press
DVD/CD 3.
To add steps in the program:
Repeat step 2 on page 22.
To exit from Program Play
Before or after playback...
To exit from Random Play
Before or after playback...
PLAY MODE
PROGRAM RANDOM
Canceled
PLAY MODE
PROGRAM RANDOM
Canceled
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
Playing Repeatedly—Repeat Play
REPEAT 1 Repeats the current chapter/track.
REPEAT Repeats the current title/group.
You can repeat playback.
• You can also select the repeat mode using the on-screen bar
(see page 26).
• The indicator(s) lights on the display as follows to indicate
the current repeat mode.
REPEAT 1 Repeats the current disc.
DISC*
REPEAT
Repeats all discs.
•
For DVD Video:
ALL DISC*
While playing...
REPEAT
ALL
Repeats all programmed tracks.
REPEAT
REPEAT 1
REPEAT
Canceled
REPEAT ALL DISC
*These modes may not work correctly for DVD Video.
•
For DVD Audio:
Prohibiting Disc Ejection
Main Unit
ONLY
While playing or before playback...
—Child Lock
You can lock the disc trays so that no one can eject the
REPEAT
REPEAT 1
REPEAT
Canceled
REPEAT ALL DISC
loaded discs.
• This operation is possible only when the source is the disc
player.
•
For MP3/WMA:
While in standby mode...
While playing or before playback...
REPEAT
REPEAT 1
REPEAT
REPEAT 1 DISC
Canceled
REPEAT ALL DISC
(holding then...)
•
For CD/SVCD/VCD:
While playing or before playback (without PBC for SVCD/
VCD)...
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same procedure.
“UNLOCKED” appears on the display.
REPEAT
REPEAT 1
REPEAT 1 DISC
Canceled
REPEAT ALL DISC
•
For Random Play:
While playing or before playback...
REPEAT
REPEAT 1
REPEAT 1 DISC
Canceled
REPEAT ALL DISC
•
For Program Play:
While playing or before playback...
REPEAT
REPEAT 1
REPEAT ALL
Canceled
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
On-Screen Disc Operations
On-screen Bar Information
Remote control
You can check the information on disc (except for MP3/
WMA/JPEG disc) and use some functions through the on-
screen bar.
AUDIO
TV
On-screen bars
DVD Video
DVD/CD 3
1
2
3
Dolby D
3/2.1ch
DISC 1 TITLE
CHAP.
2
CHAP
3
TOTAL 1:01:58
1/1
DVD-VIDEO
TIME
OFF
1/3
1/3
PG
PL
4
/ / / /
ENTER
DVD Audio
ON SCREEN
1
2
3
PPCM
DISC
2
GROUP 14 TRACK 23 TIME 0:15:58
PAGE
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
DVD-AUDIO
3/2.1ch
10 keys
OFF
TRACK
1/3
1/3
TIME
7
9
10
+10
4
ZOOM
DVD-VR
REPEAT
1
2
3
Dolby D
2/0.0ch
DISC
1
PG
2
CHAP
3
TOTAL 0:01:58
DVD-VR
TIME
OFF
CHAP.
ST
ON
4
SVCD
1
2
3
3
3
TRACK
3
TIME
0:04:58
DISC
3
SVCD
TIME
OFF
ST1
-/
4
4
VCD
1
2
DISC
4
TRACK
3
TIME
0:04:58
VCD
TIME
OFF
ST
4
CD
1
2
TRACK
3
TIME 0:04:58
DISC 5
CD
TIME
OFF
4
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
1 Disc type
O
perations Using the
2 Playback information
Indication Meanings
On-screen Bar
INFO
Basic operation procedure through the on-screen bar is as
follows:
Ex.: Selecting a subtitle (French) for DVD Video:
Dolby D/
PPCM
Audio format
3/2.1 ch/
2.0/0 ch
Channel number
While a disc is selected as the source...
DISC
TITLE
CHAP
1
Current disc
1 Display the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.
2
Current title
ON
Current chapter
Current group
Current track
Current title
3
SCREEN
Dolby D
DISC
1
1
TITLE
TITLE
2
CHAP
CHAP
3
TOTAL 1:01:58
DVD-VIDEO
3/2.1ch
GROUP
1
TRACK 14
Dolby D
3/2.1ch
DISC
2
3
TOTAL 1:01:58
1/1
DVD-VIDEO
TIME
OFF
CHAP.
1/3
1/3
PG
PL
2
2
Current play list
Time indications
Goes off
TOTAL1:25:58
3 Playback conditions
Indication Meanings
Playback
2 Select (highlight) the item you want.
/
/
Forward/Reverse search
Forward/Reverse slow-motion
Pause
Stop
Dolby D
DISC 1 TITLE
CHAP.
2
CHAP
3
TOTAL 1:01:58
1/1
DVD-VIDEO
3/2.1ch
TIME
OFF
1/3
1/3
4 Operation icons (on the pull-down menu)
3 Display the pop-up window.
Indication Meanings
TIME
Select to change the time indication
(see also page 27).
1
TITLE
2
CHAP
3
TOTAL 1:01:58
ENTER
1/3
1/3 1/1
Select to repeat playback (see also
pages 24, 27 and 28).
ENGLISH
Select for time search (see also
page 28).
4 Select the desired option in the pop-up window.
CHAP.
Select for chapter search (see also
page 29).
1
TITLE
2
CHAP
3
TOTAL 1:01:58
1/1
1/3
2/3
TRACK
Select for track search (see also
page 29).
FRENCH
Select to change the audio language or
channel (see also page 19).
1/3
5 Finish the setting.
Pop-up window goes off.
Select to change subtitle language (see
also page 20).
1/3
1/3
ENTER
Select to change view angle (see also
page 20).
Select to change the page (see also
page 20).
PAGE 1/15
To erase the on-screen bar
ON
SCREEN
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change the time information
You can change the time information in the on-screen bar
and the display window on the main unit.
Repeat Play
• See also page 24.
1 While playing a disc (without PBC for SVCD/VCD),
display the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.
• Except for DVD Video: Repeat Play can be selected
before starting playback.
1 Display the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.
Dolby D
3/2.1ch
DISC 1
T
I
TL
E
2
CHAP
TOTAL 1:01:58
3
DVD-VIDEO
TIME
O
F
F
CHAP.
1
/3/1
1
/
3
1
2 Select
.
3 Display the pop-up window.
2 Make sure TIME is selected (highlighted).
3 Change the time indication.
Dolby D
T
I
TL
E
2
CHAP
TOTAL 1:01:58
3
DISC 1
DVD-VIDEO
3/2.1ch
TIME
O
F
F
CHAP.
1
/3/1
1
/
3
1
ENTER
OFF
4 Select the repeat mode you want.
ALL
Repeats all discs or all programmed
tracks.
TOTAL
T.REM
TIME*
Elapsed disc time.
Remaining disc time.
A-B
Repeats a desired portion (see the next
page).
Elapsed playing time of the current
chapter/track.
TITLE
Repeats the current title.
REM*
Remaining time of the current chapter/
track.
GROUP
DISC
Repeats the current group.
Repeats the disc (except for DVD).
Repeats the current chapter.
Repeats the current track.
*Not available for DVD-VR.
CHAPTER
TRACK*
PG
To erase the on-screen bar
Repeats the current title (for DVD-VR
only). See also page 31.
ON
SCREEN
PL
Repeats the current play list (for DVD-
VR only). See also page 31.
OFF
Cancels Repeat Play.
*During Program Play or Random Play, “STEP”
appears.
5 Finish the setting.
Pop-up window goes off.
ENTER
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A-B Repeat
Time Search
You can move to a particular point by specifying the elapsed
playing time from the beginning.
1 While playing, display the on-screen bar with the pull-
down menu.
1 While playing (without PBC for SVCD/VCD), display
the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.
• Except for DVD: Time Search can be used before
starting playback.
2 Select
3 Display the pop-up window.
.
Dolby D
3/2.1ch
DISC 1
T
I
TL
E
2
CHAP
TOTAL 1:01:58
3
DVD-VIDEO
TIME
O
F
F
CHAP.
1
/3/1
1
/
3
1
2 Select
.
OFF
3 Display the pop-up window.
Dolby D
CHAP
TOTAL 1:01:58
3
DISC 1
T
I
TL
E
2
DVD-VIDEO
4 Select “A-B”.
3/2.1ch
TIME
O
F
F
CHAP.
TIME _ : _ _ : _ _
1
/3/1
1
/
3
1
Dolby D
DISC 1
T
I
TL
E
2
CHAP
TOTAL 1:01:58
3
DVD-VIDEO
3/2.1ch
TIME
O
F
F
CHAP.
1
/3/1
1
/
3
1
4 Enter the time.
A–B
You can specify the time in hours/minutes/seconds.
Examples:
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
5 Select the start point (A).
To move to a point of 1 (hours):
02 (minutes): 00 (seconds), press
1, 0, 2, 0, then 0.
Dolby D
3/2.1ch
T
I
TL
E
2
H
C
DISC 1
DVD-VIDEO
ENTER
7
9
TIME
A
-
CHAP.
1
/3
To move to a point of 54
(minutes): 00 (seconds), press 0,
5, 4, 0, then 0.
10
+10
• After selecting the starting point (A), you can search for
the end point using ¡.
6 Select the end point (B).
• It is always required to enter the hour digit (even “0”
hour), but it is not required to enter trailing zeros (the
last two digits in the examples above).
• To correct a misentry, press cursor 2 to erase the last
entry.
A-B Repeat starts. The selected
ENTER
portion plays repeatedly.
5 Finish the setting.
The System starts playing from the
specified time.
To cancel A-B Repeat, repeat steps 1 to 3, and select “OFF”
in step 4.
ENTER
To erase the on-screen bar
ON
To erase the on-screen bar
SCREEN
ON
SCREEN
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter/Track Search
You can search for the number of the item to play.
For DVD Video/DVD-VR: Chapter
For DVD Audio: Track
Remote
ONLY
Operations on the Control
Screen
INFO
For DVD-VR/MP3/WMA/JPEG: You can search for and
play the desired items through the control screen.
1 While playing, display the on-screen bar with the pull-
down menu.
CHAP.
TRACK
2 Select
or
.
Control screen for DVD-RW/RAM in DVD-VR
format
The control screen is superimposed on the TV screen when
you call up Original Program (PG) or Play List (PL).
To select playback type
3 Display the pop-up window.
Dolby D
3/2.1ch
T
I
TL
E
2
CHAP
TOTAL 1:01:58
3
DISC 1
DVD-VIDEO
TIME
OFF
CHAP.
CHAPTER
1/3/1
1
/
3
1
_
To select the Original
Program:
To select the Play List:
4 Enter the desired chapter/track number.
Examples:
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
MENU/PL
TOP MENU/PG
To select chapter/track 5, press 5.
To select chapter/track 15, press
1, then 5.
7
9
To select chapter/track 30, press
3, then 0.
10
+10
When Original Program is selected.
ORIGINAL PROGRAM
No Date
Ch
Time
Title
1 25/04/04 4ch 19:00
2 17/05/04 8ch 10:30
3 22/05/04 8ch 17:00
4 26/05/04 L-1 13:19
5 20/06/04 4ch 22:00
JVC DVD World 2004
• To correct a misentry, press the 10 keys until the
desired number is shown in the pop-up window.
Music Festival
children 001
5 Finish the setting.
6 25/06/04 L-1
8:23
children 002
The System starts playing the
searched chapter or track.
ENTER
1 2
3
4
5
6
When Play List is selected.
PLAY LIST
To erase the on-screen bar
No Date
Chap Length
Title
My JVC World
1 25/05/04 001 1:03:16
2 17/06/04 005 1:35:25
3 20/06/04 003 0:10:23
4 25/06/04 001 0:07:19
ON
Favorite music
children001-002
SCREEN
1 7
8
9
5
6
1 Title/Play list number
2 Recording date
3 Recording source (TV station, the input terminal of the
recording equipment, etc.)
4 Start time of recording
5 Title of the program/play list*
6 Highlight bar (current selection)
7 Creating date of play lists
8 Number of chapters
9 Playback time
*The title of the original program or play list may not be
displayed depending on the recording equipment.
To erase the control screen for DVD-VR, press ENTER.
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To move the highlight (green) bar between group list and
track list (for MP3/WMA/JPEG):
Control screen for MP3/WMA/JPEG disc
The control screen automatically appears on the TV screen
when you load an MP3, WMA, or JPEG disc.
Moves the bar to the track list.
Moves the bar to the group list.
Ex.: When the MP3 disc is loaded.
6
7
8
REPEAT TRACK Time : 00:00:14
1
Group : 2 / 3
Track : 5 / 14 (Total 41)
9
Blue
Red
Green
Cloudy.mp3
Fair.mp3
Fog.mp3
To select an item in the list:
2
Hail.mp3
Indian summer.mp3
Rain.mp3
Shower.mp3
Snow.mp3
Thunder.mp3
Typhoon.mp3
Wind.mp3
3
4
Move the highlight bar to a
desired item.
• If you move the highlight bar
while playing back DVD-VR/
MP3/WMA, the selected item
starts playback automatically.
Track Information
0
-
Title
Rain
Artist
5
Album
Winter sky.mp3
1 Current group number/total group number
2 Current group
3 Group list
4 Current track
5 Track information (ID3 Tag Version 1.0: only for
MP3/WMA)
To start playback
For DVD-VR/MP3/WMA:
Playback starts with the selected
chapter/track.
• Pressing DVD/CD 3 also starts
playback.
ENTER
6 Repeat Play setting
7 Elapsed playing time of the current track
(only for MP3/WMA)
8 Operation mode icon
9 Current track number/total number of tracks in the
current group (total number of tracks on the loaded
disc)
For JPEG:
The selected track (still picture) is
displayed until you change it.
ENTER
0 Highlight bar
- Track list
• If both types of files (MP3/WMA files and JPEG files)
are recorded on a disc, select the file type to play (see
page 39).
Slide-show playback starts.
DVD/CD
Each track (still picture) is shown on
the screen for a few seconds, then
changes one after another.
• Once you start playing back a JPEG track, the control
screen goes off.
• To cancel slide-show, and display the current still picture,
press 8.
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To stop playback
To zoom in the still picture (for JPEG)
1 During being paused...
ZOOM
ZOOM 1
ZOOM 2
ZOOM OFF
To repeat title/play list for DVD-VR
While playing or before starting playback...
As the number increases, magnification also increases.
For Original Program
2 Move the zoomed-in position.
REPEAT 1
CHAP)
REPEAT
PG)
REPEAT 1 DISC
DISC)
REPEAT
(
(
(
Canceled
REPEAT ALL DISC
(
OFF)
(
ALL)
For Play List
REPEAT 1
CHAP)
REPEAT
PL)
REPEAT
(
(
To cancel Zoom, press ZOOM repeatedly until “ZOOM
OFF” appears on the TV screen.
Canceled
REPEAT ALL DISC
(
OFF)
(
ALL)
REPEAT 1* Repeats the current chapter.
REPEAT* Repeats the current title/play list.
REPEAT 1 Repeats all titles on the current disc.
DISC*
REPEAT
Repeats all loaded discs.
ALL DISC
*Not available before starting playback.
To repeat slide-show for JPEG
While playing or before starting playback...
REPEAT
GROUP)
REPEAT 1 DISC
DISC)
REPEAT
(
(
(Canceled)
OFF)
REPEAT ALL DISC
ALL)
(
(
REPEAT
Repeats the current group.
REPEAT 1
DISC
Repeats all files on the current disc.
REPEAT ALL Repeats all loaded discs.
DISC
• For Repeat Play of MP3/WMA, see pages 24 and 27.
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording Operations
Before recording, select the Stereo Mode (“STEREO”—
see page 16) for DVD Video to downmix its
Main unit
multichannel sound into 2 channel; otherwise, you can
only record the front left/right sound onto a tape.
Recording on a Tape
INFO
Main Unit
ONLY
FM/AM
DVD/CD
You can use type I tapes for recording.
• To play a tape, see page 13.
TAPE-A /
TAPE-B
DISC 1–5 3
1 Insert a recordable cassette in deck B.
DISC REC
START
REVERSE
MODE
Push
Insert
Close
REC
START/STOP
DUBBING
Deck A
Deck B
2 Check the tape running direction and Reverse Mode
settings on the display.
Tape direction
indicator
Reverse Mode indicator
IMPORTANT
It may be unlawful to record or play back
copyrighted material without the consent of the
copyright owner.
Current source
To change the direction
3 (forward
2 (reverse
)
)
Change the Reverse Mode if necessary
To record on both sides.
• When using Reverse Mode, start
(
)
recording in the forward (3) direction.
To record on only one side.
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Start playing the source—“FM,” “AM,” “DVD/CD,”
“TAPE-A” or “AUX.”
Synchronized Disc Recording
INFO
Main Unit
ONLY
• When recording a disc, you can also use “Synchronized
Disc Recording” (see the right column).
• When recording from deck A, you can also use
“Dubbing” (see below).
You can start and stop both disc play and tape recording at
the same time.
1 Load a disc and insert a recordable cassette.
4 Start recording.
2 Check the tape running direction and Reverse Mode
settings on the display.
• See step 2 of “Recording on a Tape” on page 32.
3 Select the disc number you want to start recording
from.
To stop recording
or
For recording desired tracks on discs:
You can program tracks to record in your preferred order.
• Select Program Play (and make a program; see page 22)
without starting playback.
Dubbing Tapes
Main Unit
ONLY
4 Start recording.
1 Change the source to TAPE.
The disc playback and recording start
from the first track.
• The System automatically creates 4-
second blanks between the tunes
recorded on the tapes.
• When either disc play or recording ends, both disc player
and the cassette deck stop at the same time.
2 Insert the source cassette in deck A, and a recordable
cassette in deck B.
3 Check the tape running direction and Reverse Mode
settings on the display.
To record only your favorite track—One Track
Recording
You can specify tracks to be recorded on the tape while
listening to a disc (except for DVD Video).
While the track you want to record on the tape is
playing...
See step 2 of “Recording on a Tape” on page 32.
4 Start dubbing.
• When either tape playback or recording ends, both cassette
deck stop at the same time.
The disc player returns to the
beginning of that track and the track is
recorded on the tape. After recording,
the disc player and cassette deck
automatically stop.
To stop dubbing
To cancel while recording
or
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enjoying Karaoke
• For DVD Audio/DVD-VR: The functions described in
this section are not available.
Remote control
• When you activate the Mic Mixing Mode or Voice
Masking Mode, multi-channel sounds are downmixed into
2 channel. The multi-channel surround mode (“ALL CH.
ST,” “MOVIE,” “MUSIC,” or “AUTO” for multi-channel
surround signals—see page 16) is changed to “STEREO”
temporarily* (and restored when the Mic Mixing Mode or
Voice Masking Mode is deactivated).
KARAOKE
SCORING
AUDIO
TV
Source
buttons
*The indicator remains on the display.
AUDIO VOL +/–
IMPORTANT
• Always set MIC LEVEL to MIN when connecting or
disconnecting the microphone.
• MIC LEVEL adjustment is valid for both microphones
connected to the MIC 1 and MIC 2 jacks.
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
Singing Along (Karaoke)
You can enjoy singing along (Karaoke) by using two
microphones.
INFO
10 keys
7
9
10
+10
• By pressing REC START/STOP, you can record your
singing-along.
V.MASKING
ECHO
/
KEY
RESERVE
1 Turn MIC LEVEL to MIN.
MIC MIX
+ / –
SET
SETTING
CANCEL
Main unit
2 Connect the microphone(s) (not supplied) to the
MIC 1 and/or MIC 2 jack.
3 Activate the Mic Mixing Mode.
MIC MIX
MIC MIX
MIC OFF
Source
buttons
VOLUME +/–
4 Start playing a source—“FM,” “AM,” DVD/CD,”
“TAPE,” or “AUX.”
KARAOKE
SCORING
• For Karaoke SVCD/VCD: Select a desired audio
channel. See “Selecting the Sound Track” on page 19.
5 Sing into the microphone.
6 Adjust the MIC LEVEL and VOLUME.
MIC 1
MIC 2
MIC LEVEL
To cancel from the Mic Mixing Mode, select “MIC OFF”
in step 3.
To use microphone only, select “DVD/CD” in step 4, but
do not start playback.
DO NOT keep the microphones
connected while they are not in use.
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
To apply an echo to your voice
While the Mic Mix Mode is activated...
Scoring Your Karaoke Skill
INFO
This System can score your Karaoke skill by comparing your
singing along with the vocal on the playback disc.
• This function is for disc playback only.
• It is recommended to select the sound track as follows (see
page 19):
ECHO
ECHO 1
ECHO 0
(Canceled)
ECHO 2
ECHO 3
ECHO 4
For DVD Video: Select the sound track with vocal.
For SVCD/VCD: Select “ST,” “ST1,” or “ST2.”
• It is recommended to sing for more than one and a half
minutes to make the scoring function work properly.
• As the number increases, echo level also increases.
Remote
ONLY
To adjust the Key (disc playback only)
While playing back...
KEY
KEY
#
1 Select “DVD/CD” as the source.
To raise the key (up to +6).
DVD/CD
To lower the key (up to –6).
To cancel the Key Control
2 Activate the scoring function.
KEY
KEY
#
KARAOKE
SCORING
KARAOKE SCORE BOARD
–6
0
+6
SINGING
On the TV screen
KEYCON
Playback of the first track starts and the Mic Mixing
Mode is automatically activated (with the last adjustment
for echo).
0
On the display
On the TV screen
3 Sing into the microphone.
See steps 1, 2, and 6 on page 34.
• Adjust echo level and key if you want (see the left
column).
• Key Control is also canceled when you deactivate the Mic
Mixing Mode, or select another track or disc.
Remote
ONLY
Reducing the Lead Vocal
INFO
After the song ends, playback stops and the score board
appears on the TV screen with fanfare.
—Vocal Masking
Ex.:
Your score
If you want to reduce the lead vocal (of any source except
DVD Audio/DVD-VR), you can use the Vocal Masking
Mode.
KARAOKE SCORE BOARD
85
POINTS
Very good!!
V. MASKING
V.MASK1
OFF
V.MASK2
1
2
3
ST
93
85
73
POINTS
POINTS
POINTS
ND
RD
V.MASK1
V.MASK2
Cancels vocal on stereo sources.
Cancels the right audio channel.
The latest top 3
To stop the playback in the middle of the song, press 7.
The scoring function is not canceled and your singing along
is scored if the playback time is more than one minute.
To sing into microphone(s), activate the Mic Mixing Mode
(follow steps 1 to 3 and 6 on page 34).
To cancel from the Vocal Masking Mode, select “OFF.”
To cancel the scoring function, press KARAOKE
SCORING. The screen on the TV disappears. (The Mic
Mixing Mode remains activated.)
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
4 Activate the Mic Mixing Mode.
To turn on/off the fanfare
MIC MIX
1 Enter the fanfare setting mode
.
MIC MIX
MIC OFF
SET
SETTING
5 Start playback.
To start Karaoke
Program Play:
To start Karaoke
Program Play with the
scoring function:
2 Select the fanfare setting.
ON
DVD/CD
KARAOKE
SCORING
OFF
Playback starts in the order you have programmed.
• For the Karaoke Program Play with the scoring
function: Each time the song ends, playback stops and
the score board appears. Press KARAOKE SCORING
twice to start playback of the next track.
Remote
ONLY
Reserving Karaoke Songs
—Karaoke Program Play
INFO
You can determine the playback order of the titles or tracks
on the disc player. You can program up to 12 steps.
1 Change the source to “DVD/CD.”
To check the programmed contents
RESERVE
DVD/CD
The Karaoke reserve screen appears.
• You cannot display the Karaoke reserve screen while the
scoring function is in use.
2 Activate Karaoke Program Play.
RESERVE
No Disc Gr/Tt Tr/Chap
1
2
3
4
5
To modify the program
While the Karaoke reserve screen is shown on the TV...
To erase the unwanted step:
On the TV screen
• PROGRAM indicator flashes during this mode.
CANCEL
3 Select songs you want for Karaoke Program Play.
Press the number buttons to select a song in the following
order.
1 Select a disc.
2 Select a title/group.
3 Select a chapter/track.
To erase the entire program, repeat the procedure.
To add steps in the program:
Repeat step 3.
Examples:
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
To select number 5, press 5.
To select number 15, press
+10, then 5.
To select number 30, press
+10, +10, then 10.
7
9
10
+10
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Timer Operations
Remote
ONLY
Setting the Timer
INFO
Remote control
Using Daily Timer, you can wake up with your favorite
song. On the other hand, with Recording Timer, you can
make a tape of a radio broadcast automatically.
• You cannot activate Daily Timer and Recording Timer at a
time. (Activating either timer deactivates the other timer.)
• To correct a misentry during the process, press CANCEL.
You can return to the previous step.
AUDIO
AUDIO
TV
1 Select one of the timer setting modes—ON for Daily
Timer or Recording Timer.
Recording Timer
Daily Timer
CLOCK/
TIMER
ON
REC TIMER
DAILYTIMER
Canceled
Clock setting
ON
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
7
9
10
+10
2 Make the timer setting as you want.
SET
CANCEL
SET
CLOCK/
TIMER
Repeat the procedure until you finish setting in the
following order:
1
2
3
Set the hour then minute for on-time.
Set the hour then minute for off-time.
For Recording Timer: Select the playback
source—“TUNER-FM” or “TUNER-AM.”
For Daily Timer: Select the playback source—
“TUNER-FM,” “TUNER-AM,” “DISC,”
“TAPE-A,” “TAPE-B” or “AUX IN.”
EX.: When “TUNER-FM” is selected.
4
5
Select a preset station for “TUNER-FM” and
“TUNER-AM,” or select a disc, group, and then
track number for “DISC.”
Select the volume level.
• You can select the volume level (“VOLUME 0” –
“VOLUME 30” and “VOLUME --”). If you select
“VOLUME --,” the volume is set to the last level
when the System has been turned off.
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To turn off the Timer after the setting is done
You can turn off the timer after it has been set.
3 Turn off the System (on standby) if you have set the
timer with the System turned on.
• Since Daily Timer is activated at the same time everyday,
you may need to cancel it on some particular days.
AUDIO
1 Select the timer you want to cancel (REC TIMER or
DAILYTIMER) you want to cancel.
Recording Timer
Daily Timer
CLOCK/
TIMER
How Daily Timer actually works
ON
REC TIMER
DAILYTIMER
Once the Daily Timer has been set, the timer (
)
Canceled
ON
Clock setting
indicator and DAILY indicator are lit on the display.
Daily Timer is activated at the same time everyday until
the timer is turned off manually (see the next column).
• Daily Timer starts working only when the System is
turned off (on standby).
2 Turn off the selected timer.
CANCEL
When the on-time comes
The System turns on, tunes in to the specified station or
starts playing the specified source, and sets the volume
level to the preset level.
• The timer (
) indicator goes off.
When the off-time comes
To turn on the timer again, repeat the step 1 and press SET
in step 2.
The System stops playback, and turns off (standby).
• The timer setting remains in memory until you change
it.
Timer Priority
If the settings for Sleep Timer and Recording Timer/Daily
Timer overlap, the timers work as described below.
• Sleep Timer (see page 18) has priority over the Recording
Timer and Daily Timer.
How Recording Timer actually works
When Recording Timer has been set, Timer (
)
indicator and the REC indicator are lit on the display.
Recording Timer works only once.
• Recording Timer starts working only when the System
is turned off (on standby).
Canceled
6:00
6:30
7:00
7:30
When the on-time comes
The System turns on, tunes in to the specified station, sets
the volume level to the preset level, and starts recording.
Recording Timer/
Daily Timer
When the off-time comes
Sleep Timer
The System stops recording, and turns off (standby).
• The timer setting remains in memory until you change
it.
The System turns off.
• In this case, Recording Timer/Daily Timer does not work.
Recording/Playback
Canceled
6:00
6:30
7:00
7:30
Recording Timer/
Daily Timer
Sleep Timer
The System turns off.
• In this case, Recording Timer/Daily Timer is canceled. (If
Sleep Timer shuts off the System earlier than the off time
you have set for Recording Timer, recording stops when
Sleep Timer shuts off the System.)
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup Menu Operations
Initial settings
INFO
Remote Control
Some items in the menus cannot be changed during
playback.
1 Press SET UP.
AUDIO
TV
LANGUAGE
MENU LANGUAGE
AUDIO LANGUAGE
SUBTITLE
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE
2 Press 2 (or 3) to select the menu.
3 Press 5 (or ∞) to move to select the item.
4 Press ENTER.
/ / / /
ENTER
SET UP
5 Press 5 (or ∞) to select the options, then press
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
ENTER.
7
9
To erase a preference display
10
+10
Press SET UP.
LANGUAGE menu
Item
Contents
MENU LANGUAGE
You can select the initial menu language of DVD Video (see page 46).
You can select the initial audio language of DVD Video (see page 46).
You can select the initial subtitle language of DVD Video (see page 46).
You can select “ENGLISH,” “CHINESE,” or “SPANISH” as the on-screen language.
AUDIO LANGUAGE
SUBTITLE
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE
PICTURE menu
Item
Contents
MONITOR TYPE
You can select the monitor type to match your TV when you play back DVD Video discs recorded for
wide-screen televisions.
16:9/16:9 MULTI (Wide television screen): For a wide-screen (16:9) TV.
4:3 LB/4:3 MULTI LB (Letter box conversion): For a conventional (4:3) TV. Displays a wide-
screen picture to fit the width of the TV screen keeping the aspect ratio.
16:9
4:3 LB
4:3 PS/4:3 MULTI PS (Pan Scan conversion): For a conventional (4:3) TV. The picture is zoomed
up for filling the screen vertically and the left and right sides of the picture are cut off.
• By selecting “MULTI” mode, the color system of the System changes automatically to match the
color system of the loaded disc. For the color system setting, see page 17.
4:3 PS
PICTURE SOURCE
You can obtain optimal picture quality by selecting the source type of the disc contents.
AUTO: Normally, select this option. The System recognizes the picture type (film or video source) of
the current disc according to the disc information.
FILM: For a film source disc.
VIDEO: For a video source disc.
SCREEN SAVER
FILE TYPE
You can set the screen saver function to ON or OFF.
ON: The on-screen display becomes dark when no operation is done for about 5 minutes.
OFF: To cancel the screen saver.
You can select a file type to play.
AUDIO: To play MP3/WMA files.
STILL PICTURE: To play JPEG files.
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUDIO menu
Item
Contents
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT
Set this item correctly when using the OPTICAL DIGITAL OUTPUT terminal on the rear.
PCM ONLY: When connecting to audio equipment which can decode only linear PCM signals.
DOLBY DIGITAL/PCM: When connecting to a Dolby Digital decoder or an amplifier with a built-
in Dolby Digital decoder.
STREAM/PCM: When connecting to a DTS decoder or an amplifier with a built-in DTS decoder.
D.RANGE COMPRESSION
Set this item to listen to DVD Video recorded in Dolby Digital format at low or middle volume.
AUTO: You can enjoy powerful playback sound.
ON: Select this if the sound level of DVD Video is lower than the one of TV program to make the
sound at a lower volume clear.
SPK. SETTING menu
Item
Contents
LEVEL
Select this item, then press ENTER to show the LEVEL submenu for adjusting the speaker output
level.
LEVEL
FRONT LEFT SPEAKER
FRONT LEFT/RIGHT SPEAKER, CENTER SPEAKER, SURROUND LEFT/RIGHT
SPEAKER: Select the speaker, then adjust the output level (–6 dB to +6 dB in 1 dB steps).
TEST TONE: Turns on/off the test tone.
0dB
0dB
FRONT RIGHT SPEAKER
CENTER SPEAKER
0dB
0dB
SURROUND RIGHT SPEAKER
SURROUND LEFT SPEAKER
TEST TONE
0dB
OFF
• Select “ALL CH. ST,” “MUSIC,” or “MOVIE” (see page 16) to adjust the output level for all
speakers with the test tone.
DELAY
Select this item, then press ENTER to show the DELAY submenu for adjusting the speaker delay time.
FRONT LEFT/RIGHT SPEAKER, CENTER SPEAKER, SURROUND LEFT/RIGHT
SPEAKER: Select the speaker, then adjust the delay time (0 ms to 15 ms in 1 ms steps).
• Set one speaker to “0 ms,” then set other speakers so that the sound from all speakers can reach you
at the same time.
DELAY
FRONT LEFT SPEAKER
FRONT RIGHT SPEAKER
CENTER SPEAKER
0
0
ms
ms
0
0
ms
ms
SURROUND RIGHT SPEAKER
SURROUND LEFT SPEAKER
0
ms
OTHERS menu
Item
Contents
RESUME
You can select Resume.
ON: The System resumes playback from the position where playback has been stopped if the disc is
still in the disc tray.
OFF: Resume is deactivated.
ON SCREEN GUIDE
Activate or deactivate the on-screen guide.
ON: Activate the on-screen guide.
OFF: Deactivate the on-screen guide.
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating the TV
Operating TV
Remote control
You can operate the JVC’s or other manufacturers’ TV using
this remote control.
1 Slide the AUDIO/TV selector to “TV.”
TV
AUDIO
TV/VIDEO
AUDIO
TV
TV
TV VOL +/–
CHANNEL +/–
2 Press and hold until the following steps are complete.
TV
ENTER
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
3
10 keys
7
9
ENTER
10
+10
4 Enter the 2-digit manufacture’s code number.
1
2
5
8
0
3
4
6
7
9
10
+10
Manufacture’s code
Manufacture Code number
5 Release
TV.
JVC
01
To operate the TV
To turn on or To select the input To adjust TV
Hitachi
Magnavox
Mitsubishi
Panasonic
Philips
RCA
10
02
off the TV:
mode (either TV or volume:
VIDEO):
03
04,11
15
TV VOL
TV/VIDEO
TV
05
Samsung
Sanyo
12
13, 14
06
To select the TV channel:
Sharp
Sony
07
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
CHANNEL
Toshiba
Zenith
08
or
09
7
9
10
+10
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Information
Daily Operations—Sound&Other Adjustments
(see pages 14 to 18)
Learning More about This System
Introduction (see pages 1 to 2)
Reinforcing the Bass Sound:
Playable Disc Types:
• About audio format
• The adjustment for the subwoofer level does not affect the
sound through the headphones.
–
Linear PCM: Uncompressed digital audio, the same
format used for CDs and most studio masters.
Dolby Digital: Compressed digital audio, developed by
Dolby Laboratories, which enables multi-channel
encode to create the realistic surround sound.
DTS (Digital Theater Systems): Compressed digital
audio, developed by Digital Theater Systems, Inc., which
enables multi-channel like Dolby Digital. As the
compression ratio is lower than for Dolby Digital, it
provides wider dynamic range and better separation.
Creating Your Own Sound Modes—User Mode:
• When you unplug the AC power cord or if a power failure
occurs, the User Mode settings will be erased in a few days.
If this happens, set the User Modes again.
Selecting the Surround Modes:
• Dolby Pro Logic II Modes: Dolby Pro Logic II Mode is
multichannel playback format to decode 2-channel sources
into 5.1-channel. Dolby Pro Logic II enables to reproduce
spacious sound from original sound without adding any
new sounds and tonal colorations.
• While you use the headphones, the Surround Mode is
canceled temporarily (“STEREO” appears) and you cannot
use SURROUND MODE and EFFECT.
• Some DVD Audios prohibit downmix. While playing back
such a disc...
– You cannot change the Surround Mode. (“MULTI CH”
appears on the display.)
– The System plays back the left front and right front
signals when you have selected “STEREO” for the
Surround Mode or when you use the headphones. (“LR
ONLY” appears on the display.)
Changing the Color System and Scanning Mode:
• If you play back an NTSC disc with the color system set to
“PAL (PROG),” the disc will be reproduced using “PAL
60” format, however, if the TV does not support this
format, the screen may rolls over upward and downward
rapidly.
• If you play back a PAL disc with the color system set to
“NTSC (PROG),” you can watch the playback pictures, but
the following symptoms may occur:
– The items on the disc menu will be blurred, and be shown
slightly shifted when highlighted.
– The aspect ratio of the picture may differ from the
original aspect ratio.
– The picture movement is not smooth.
• You cannot change the scanning mode to progressive in the
following cases:
– When your TV does not support the progressive video
input.
– When you have not connected your TV to the unit using
a component video cord.
• When you play back an NTSC disc in progressive scanning
mode, the System outputs the NTSC signal regardless of
the color system settings.
–
–
• If you use a DVD-RAM with a cartridge, take the disc out
of the cartridge before inserting.
Daily Operations—Playback (see pages 9 to 13)
Listening to the Radio:
• If you store a new station into an occupied preset number,
the previously stored station in that number will be erased.
• When you unplug the AC power cord or if a power failure
occurs, the preset stations will be erased in a few days. If
this happens, preset the stations again.
Playing Back a Disc:
• On some DVD, SVCD, or VCD discs, the actual operations
may be different from what is explained in this manual, due
to the programming and disc structure; such differences are
not a malfunction of this System.
• When playing back a DVD Audio disc recorded in MLP
(Meridian Lossless Packing; a lossless audio compression
system that can completely recreate the PCM signal), the
signals are recognized as the linear PCM signals, however,
no indicator lights up on the display.
• For MP3/WMA playback...
– MP3/WMA discs require a longer readout time than
regular CDs. (It depends on the complexity of the group/
file configuration.)
– Some MP3/WMA files cannot be played back and will
be skipped. This results from their recording processes
and conditions.
– When making MP3/WMA discs, use ISO 9660 Level 1
or Level 2 for the disc format.
– This System can play back MP3/WMA files with the
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of the
letter case—upper/lower).
– It is recommended that you make each MP3/WMA file at
a sampling rate of 44.1 kHz and at bit rate of 128 kbps.
This System cannot play back files made at bit rate of less
than 64 kbps.
Setting the Clock:
• “0:00” will flash on the display until you set the clock.
• The clock may gain or lose 1 to 2 minutes per month. If this
happens, reset the clock.
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
– This System can play only baseline JPEG files*.
Progressive JPEG files* or lossless JPEG files* cannot
be played.
* Baseline JPEG format: Used for digital cameras,
web, etc.
Unique DVD/VCD Operations (see pages 19 to 21)
Selecting the Sound Track:
• On some DVD Videos, you cannot change audio languages
while playing back.
Playing Back Bonus Group:
• You cannot select a track in the bonus group for Program
Play.
Special Picture Playback:
• During slow-motion playback, no sound will be
reproduced.
• You cannot use frame-by-frame playback for DVD-VR.
• While zoomed in, the picture may look coarse.
Progressive JPEG format:Used for web.
Lossless JPEG format: An old type and rarely used
now.
• This System can play back JPEG files with the extension
code <.jpg> or <.jpeg> (regardless of the letter case—
upper/lower).
• This System may not play back JPEG files properly if they
are recorded on the devices other than digital still camera.
• During slide-show playback, zoom cannot be operated.
Advanced Disc Operations (see pages 22 to 24)
Programming the Playing Order—Program Play:
– While programming steps...
Recording Operations (see pages 32 to 33)
General:
Your entry will be ignored if you have tried to program
an item number that does not exist on the disc (for
example, selecting track 14 on a disc that only has 12
tracks).
– For SVCD/VCD/CD loaded on the other tray than the
current one, the System may prompt for the group
number entry as well, however, these entries will be
ignored during playback.
• You cannot use Program Play and Random Play for DVD-
VR/JPEG discs.
• The programmed contents will remain until you erase it.
• While the PROGRAM indicator is on, you cannot change
the disc to play. (DISC 1 – 5 on the remote control and 3
on the main unit do not work.)
• You cannot change the source during recording.
• There is leader tape which cannot be recorded onto at the
start and the end of cassette tapes. Thus, when recording
discs or radio broadcasts, wind the leader tape first to
ensure that the recording will be made without any music
part lost.
• If no cassette is inserted or a protected tape has been
inserted, “NO REC” appears on the display.
• The recording level is automatically set correctly. Thus,
you can make sound adjustment other than the Surround
Mode without affecting the recording level.
Recording on a Tape:
• When using Reverse Mode for recording, start recording in
the forward (3) direction first; otherwise, recording will
stop when only one side (reverse) of the tape is recorded.
Synchronized Disc Recording:
• Recording starts from the first track even if you have
selected a track by using ¢/4. To specify track(s) to
record, program them (or use One Track Recording).
• While recording, you cannot use disc operation buttons
(except for 7) and sound setting buttons (except for
volume control).
On-Screen Disc Operations (see pages 25 to 31)
Operations Using the On-screen Bar:
• A-B Repeat:
– A-B Repeat cannot be used on some DVDs.
– A-B Repeat is possible only within the same title or
within the same track.
Operations on the Control Screen:
• For DVD-VR playback...
–
Original Program: The System can play back the
original picture in the recorded order.
Play List: The System can play back the play list edited
by the recording equipment. The control screen for the
play list appears only when the disc has the play list.
• Everything on the disc goes onto the tape in the order on
the disc, or according to the order you have made for
Program Play.
• You cannot use Repeat Play while synchronized recording
(Repeat Play will be canceled).
–
– Resume is not available.
• DISC REC START button does not work:
– While playback is paused.
– When Random Play is activated.
– While playing back or being paused with Program Play.
• When the tape reaches its end in the forward direction (3)
during recording, the last song will be re-recorded at the
beginning of the reverse side (2).
• When the tape reaches its end in the reverse side (2)
during recording, recording stops even though the disc is
not entirely recorded.
– For details about DVD-VR format and play list, refer to
the manual of the recording equipment.
• For JPEG files playback...
– It is recommended that you record a file at 640 x 480
resolution. (If a file has been recorded at a resolution of
more than 640 x 480, it will take a long time to be
shown.)
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enjoying Karaoke (see pages 34 to 36)
General:
Timer Operations (see pages 37 to 38)
Setting the Timer:
• When the Mic Mixing or Vocal Masking Mode is
activated:
– Multichannel source will be downmixed into 2 channel
temporarily.
• If you do not specify the preset station or track number
correctly while setting a timer, the currently selected
station or the first track will be played when timer is
activated.
– Dolby Pro Logic II Mode will be canceled temporarily.
Reducing the Lead Vocal—Vocal Masking:
• The Vocal Masking Mode setting is not applied to the
optical digital output signals through the OPTICAL
DIGITAL OUTPUT terminal.
• When playing a Karaoke disc in the Vocal Masking Mode,
the vocal may not be reduced or the volume may be lower.
• On some music, the Vocal Masking Mode does not provide
the correct effect.
• When you unplug the AC power cord or if a power failure
occurs, the timer will be canceled. You need to set the
clock first, then the timer again.
• Without stopping the recording, you cannot change the
source after Recording Timer starts recording.
• If you set DVD Video as the source, Daily Timer will not
work correctly.
Setup Menu Operations (see pages 39 to 40)
General:
Scoring Your Karaoke Skill:
• If the upper and lower parts of the menu are cut off, adjust
the picture size control of the TV.
LANGUAGE menu:
• When the language you have selected for MENU
LANGUAGE, AUDIO LANGUAGE, or SUBTITLE is
not recorded on a disc, the original language is used as the
initial language.
PICTURE menu—MONITOR TYPE:
• Even if “4:3 PS (MULTI)” is selected, the screen size may
become 4:3 letter box with some DVD Videos. This
depends on how the discs are recorded.
• When you select “16:9 (MULTI)” for a picture whose
aspect ratio is 4:3, the picture slightly changes due to the
process for converting the picture width.
SPK. SETTING menu—DELAY:
• See the following diagram as an example for setting the
delay time:
• Before the scoring function is activated, you can select the
track by pressing ¢/4 (except for DVD Video and
SVCD/VCD with PBC).
• If you press ¢/4 while scoring, playback stops and
scoring is canceled (but the track is not skipped).
• If you activate the scoring function while playback is
stopped with Resume function, playback starts from the
position you have stopped.
• You can also activate the scoring function while playing
back. In this case, the scoring starts from that point.
• While the scoring function is in use, you cannot use the
following buttons: V.MASKING, MIC MIX, RESERVE,
and disc operation buttons (except for ¢/4/7).
• Activating the scoring function cancels Repeat Play.
• You cannot use the scoring function during Program Play,
Random Play, or recording.
• The ranking (top 3) is cleared when you turn off the
System. (If the number of songs scored is less than 3, “0
POINT” appears.)
Reserving Karaoke Songs—Karaoke Program Play:
• If you have selected a disc tray on which DVD Audio or
DVD-VR is loaded, that disc number is skipped.
• If DVD Audio or DVD-VR is loaded on the current tray,
you cannot use Karaoke Program Play.
Front speakers:
0 ms
Center speaker:
1 ms
Surround speakers:
2 ms
• When the track starts playback, that track number will be
erased from the Karaoke reserve screen (the programmed
contents will remain until you erase it).
• While the PROGRAM indicator is flashing, you cannot
change the disc to play. (DISC 1 – 5 on the remote control
and 3 on the main unit do not work.)
OTHERS menu—ON SCREEN GUIDE:
• The setup menu and on-screen bar will be displayed (and
recorded) even though this function is set to “OFF.”
Subtitles and the information for zoom-in always appear on
the display regardless of this setting.
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning the System
Maintenance
To get the best performance of the System, keep your discs,
tapes, and mechanism clean.
• Stains should be wiped off with a soft cloth. If the System
is heavily stained, wipe it with a cloth soaked in water-
diluted neutral detergent and wrung well, then wipe clean
with a dry cloth.
• Since the System may deteriorate in quality, become
damaged or get its paint peeled off, be careful about the
following:
– DO NOT wipe it with a hard cloth.
– DO NOT wipe it strong.
– DO NOT wipe it with thinner or benzine.
– DO NOT apply any volatile substance such as
insecticides to it.
– DO NOT allow any rubber or plastic to remain in contact
for a long time.
Handling discs
• Remove the disc from its case by holding it at the edge
while pressing the center hole lightly.
• Do not touch the shiny surface of the disc, or bend the disc.
• Put the disc back in its case after use to prevent warping.
• Be careful not to scratch the surface of the disc when
placing it back in its case.
• Avoid exposure to direct sunlight, temperature extremes,
and moisture.
To clean the disc:
Wipe the disc with a soft cloth in a straight line from center
to edge.
Troubleshooting
Handling cassette tapes
If you are having a problem with your System, check this list
for a possible solution before calling for service.
• If the tape is loose in its cassette, take up the slack by
inserting a pencil in one of the reels and rotate it.
– If the tape is loose, it may get stretched, cut, or caught in
the cassette.
• Be careful not to touch the tape surface.
• Avoid the following places to store the tape—in dusty
places, in direct sunlight or heat, in moist areas, on a TV or
speaker, or near a magnet.
To keep the best recording and playback sound quality
• Use a cotton swab moistened with alcohol to clean the
heads, capstans, and pinch rollers.
• Use a head demagnetizer (available at electronics and
audio shops) to demagnetize the heads (when the System
turned off).
General:
Adjustments or settings are suddenly canceled before
you finish.
] There is a time limit. Repeat procedure again.
Operations are disabled.
] The built-in microprocessor may malfunction due to
external electrical interference. Unplug the AC power
cord and then plug it back in.
Unable to operate the System from the remote control.
] The path between the remote control and the remote
sensor on the System is blocked.
] The batteries are exhausted.
No sound is heard.
To protect your recording
Cassettes have two small tabs on the back
to protect from unexpected erasure or re-
recording.
To protect your recording, remove these
tabs.
] Speaker connections are incorrect or loose.
] Headphones are connected.
No picture appears on the screen.
] The video cord connections are incorrect or loose.
No picture is displayed on the TV screen, the picture is
blurred, or the picture is divided into two parts.
] The System is connected to a TV which does not support
progressive video input.
To re-record on a protected tape, cover
the holes with adhesive tape.
] Incorrect color system is selected (see page 17).
The left and right edges of the picture are missing on the
screen.
] Select “4:3 LB (MULTI)” for “MONITOR TYPE” (see
page 39).
Radio Operations:
Hard to listen to broadcasts because of noise.
] Antennas connections are incorrect or loose.
] The AM loop antenna is too close to the System.
] The FM antenna is not properly extended and positioned.
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The disc tray does not open or close.
] The AC power cord is not plugged in.
] Child Lock is in use. “LOCKED” appears in the display
window (see page 24).
] The Program Play is in use. Cancel the Program Play
(see page 23).
Disc Operations:
The disc does not play.
] You have inserted a disc whose Region Code is not “3.”
(“REGION ERR” appears on the display.)
] The disc is placed upside down. Place the disc with the
label side up.
ID3 Tag on an MP3 disc cannot be shown.
Tape Operations:
The cassette holder cannot be opened.
]
There are two types of ID3 Tag—Version 1 and Version 2.
This System can only show ID3 Tag Version 1.
] Power supply from the AC power cord has been cut off
MP3 groups and tracks are not played back as you
expect.
while the tape was running. Turn on the System.
Recording Operations:
Impossible to record.
] The playing order is determined when the disc was
recorded. It depends on the writing application.
] Small tabs on the back of the cassette are removed.
MP3/WMA or JPEG files are not played back.
] The inserted disc may include both type of tracks (MP3/
WMA files and JPEG files). In this case, you can only
play back the files selected by the “FILE TYPE” setting
(see page 39).
Cover the holes with adhesive tape.
] The Karaoke scoring function is in use. Cancel the
scoring function (see page 35).
Karaoke Operations:
Cannot activate the scoring function.
] DVD Audio or DVD-VR is playing.
] You cannot use the scoring function while recording, or
while the disc menu for DVD Video/SVCD/VCD is
shown on the TV screen.
Scoring result seems wrong (or “– –” appears).
] The playback time with the scoring function is too short.
It is recommended to sing for more than one and a half
minutes. (If playback time is less than one minute, the
scoring is canceled.)
] No input from the microphone or the input level (MIC
LEVEL) is too low.
] You have sung in too low voice.
] You have changed the “FILE TYPE” setting after you
inserted a disc. In this case, reload the disc.
The disc sound is discontinuous.
] The disc is scratched or dirty.
The disc playback sounds strange.
] Cancel Key Control (see page 35).
No subtitle appears on the display though you have
selected the initial subtitle language.
] Some DVDs are programmed to always display no
subtitle initially. If this happens, press SUB TITLE after
starting play (see page 20).
Audio language is different from the one you have
selected as the initial audio language.
] Some DVDs are programmed to always use the original
language initially. If this happens, press AUDIO after
starting play (see page 19).
Timer Operations:
Daily Timer or Recording Timer does not work.
] The System has been turned on when the on-time comes.
Timer starts working only when the System is turned off.
Language Code List
AA
AB
AF
Afar
FA
FI
Persian
Finnish
Fiji
KM
KN
KO
KS
Cambodian
Kannada
Korean (KOR)
Kashmiri
Kurdish
OM (Afan) Oromo
SU Sundanese
SV Swedish
SW Swahili
TA Tamil
TE Telugu
TG Tajik
Abkhazian
Afrikaans
OR
PA
PL
PS
Oriya
FJ
Panjabi
Polish
AM Ameharic
FO
FY
Faroese
Frisian
AR
AS
AY
AZ
BA
BE
BG
BH
BI
BN
BO
BR
CA
Arabic
Assamese
Aymara
Azerbaijani
Bashkir
KU
KY
LA
LN
LO
LT
Pashto, Pushto
Portuguese
Quechua
GA Irish
Kirghiz
PT
QU
GD Scots Gaelic
Latin
Lingala
Laothian
Lithuanian
Latvian, Lettish
Malagasy
Maori
Macedonian
Malayalam
Mongolian
Moldavian
Marathi
Malay (MAY)
Maltese
Burmese
Nauru
Nepali
Dutch
Norwegian
Occitan
TH Thai
GL
Galician
RM Rhaeto-Romance
TI
Tigrinya
GN Guarani
GU Gujarati
HA Hausa
RN
RO
RU
Kirundi
Rumanian
Russian
TK Turkmen
TL Tagalog
TN Setswana
TO Tonga
TR Turkish
TS Tsonga
TT Tatar
Byelorussian
Bulgarian
Bihari
LV
MG
MI
HI
Hindi
RW Kinyarwanda
Bislama
HR Croatian
HU Hungarian
HY Armenian
SA
SD
SG
SH
SI
Sanskrit
Sindhi
Bengali, Bangla
Tibetan
MK
ML
MN
MO
MR
MS
MT
MY
NA
NE
NL
NO
OC
Sangho
Breton
Catalan
IA
IE
IK
IN
IS
IW
JI
Interlingua
Interlingue
Inupiak
Serbo-Croatian
Singhalese
Slovak
TW Twi
UK Ukrainian
UR Urdu
CO Corsican
SK
SL
SM
SN
SO
SQ
SR
SS
CS
CY
DA
DZ
EL
EO
ET
EU
Czech
Indonesian
Icelandic
Hebrew
Slovenian
Samoan
Shona
UZ Uzbek
Welsh
VI
Vietnamese
Danish
Bhutani
Greek
VO Volapuk
WO Wolof
XH Xhosa
YO Yoruba
ZU Zulu
Yiddish
Somali
JW Javanese
KA Georgian
KK Kazakh
Albanian
Serbian
Esperanto
Estonian
Basque
Siswati
Sesotho
KL
Greenlandic
ST
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
CA-DXT9
Amplifier section
Output Power:
FRONT SPEAKERS: 150 W per channel, min. RMS, driven into
4 Ω at 1 kHz with no more than 10% total harmonic
distortion.
Disc player section
Playable disc: DVD Video/DVD Audio/CD/VCD/SVCD
CD-R/CD-RW (recorded in Audio CD/Video CD/
Super Video CD formats and MP3/WMA/JPEG
files)
CENTER SPEAKER: 140 W per channel, min. RMS, driven into
6 Ω at 1 kHz with no more than 10% total harmonic
distortion.
DVD-R (recorded in DVD Video format)
DVD-RW (recorded in DVD Video format or DVD-
VR format)
SURROUND SPEAKERS: 140 W per channel, min. RMS, driven
into 6 Ω at 1 kHz with no more than 10% total
harmonic distortion.
SUBWOOFERS: 150 W per channel, min. RMS, driven into 4 Ω at
1 kHz with no more than 10% total harmonic
distortion.
Digital output:
OPTICAL DIGITAL OUTPUT:
–21 dBm to –15 dBm (660 nm 30 nm)
Audio input sensitivity/Impedance
DVD-RAM (recorded in DVD-VR format)
Dynamic range:
80 dB
Horizontal resolution:
Wow and flutter:
500 lines
Immeasurable
Cassette deck section
Frequency response
Normal (type I):
Wow and flutter:
50 Hz – 14 000 Hz
0.15% (WRMS)
(Measured at 1 kHz, with tape recording signal 300 mV)
AUX:
MIC 1/2:
300 mV/47 kΩ
General
Power requirement:
3.0 mV/50 kΩ
AC 110 V / AC 127 V / AC 220 V / AC
VIDEO OUT:
Color system:
230 V – AC 240 V
, (adjustable with
NTSC/PAL selectable
the voltage selector), 50 Hz / 60 Hz
335 W (at operation)
29 W (on standby)
Dimensions (W/H/D) (approx.): 185 mm x 460 mm x 361 mm
Mass (approx.): 11.4 kg
Power consumption:
VIDEO (composite):
S-VIDEO:
C (chrominance, burst)
COMPONENT (Interlace/Progressive):
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
0.286 V(p-p)/75 Ω
Y (luminance)
(Y)
(PB/PR)
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
0.7 V(p-p)/75 Ω
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.
Speaker Terminals: 4 Ω − 16 Ω (front speakers/subwoofers)
6 Ω − 16 Ω (surround/center speakers)
Tuner section
FM tuning range:
87.50 MHz – 108.00 MHz
AM (MW) tuning range:
531 kHz – 1 602 kHz (at 9 kHz)
530 kHz – 1 600 kHz (at 10 kHz)
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CA-DXT7
Amplifier section
Output Power:
Cassette deck section
Frequency response
FRONT SPEAKERS: 150 W per channel, min. RMS, driven into
4 Ω at 1 kHz with no more than 10% total harmonic
distortion.
Normal (type I):
Wow and flutter:
50 Hz – 14 000 Hz
0.15% (WRMS)
CENTER SPEAKER: 50 W per channel, min. RMS, driven into
6 Ω at 1 kHz with no more than 10% total harmonic
distortion.
SURROUND SPEAKERS: 50 W per channel, min. RMS, driven
into 6 Ω at 1 kHz with no more than 10% total
harmonic distortion.
SUBWOOFER: 150 W per channel, min. RMS, driven into 4 Ω at
1 kHz with no more than 10% total harmonic
distortion.
General
Power requirement:
AC 110 V / AC 127 V / AC 220 V / AC
230 V – AC 240 V
, (adjustable with
the voltage selector), 50 Hz / 60 Hz
270 W (at operation)
Power consumption:
25 W (on standby)
Dimensions (W/H/D) (approx.): 185 mm x 460 mm x 361 mm
Mass (approx.): 11.4 kg
Digital output:
OPTICAL DIGITAL OUTPUT:
–21 dBm to –15 dBm (660 nm 30 nm)
Audio input sensitivity/Impedance
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.
(Measured at 1 kHz, with tape recording signal 300 mV)
AUX:
MIC 1/2:
300 mV/47 kΩ
• Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “MLP Lossless”, and the double-D
symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
3.0 mV/50 kΩ
VIDEO OUT:
Color system:
NTSC/PAL selectable
• “DTS” and “DTS 2.0+DIGITAL OUT” are trademarks of
Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
VIDEO (composite):
S-VIDEO:
C (chrominance, burst)
COMPONENT (Interlace/Progressive):
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
Y (luminance)
• This product incorporates copyright protection technology
that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property
rights. Use of this copyright protection technology must be
authorized by Macrovision, and is intended for home and
other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized
by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is
prohibited.
0.286 V(p-p)/75 Ω
(Y)
(PB/PR)
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
0.7 V(p-p)/75 Ω
Speaker Terminals: 4 Ω − 16 Ω (front speakers/subwoofer)
6 Ω − 16 Ω (surround/center speakers)
• “CONSUMERS SHOULD NOTE THAT NOT ALL HIGH
DEFINITION TELEVISION SETS ARE FULLY
COMPATIBLE WITH THIS PRODUCT AND MAY
CAUSE ARTIFACTS TO BE DISPLAYED IN THE
PICTURE. IN CASE OF 525 OR 625 PROGRESSIVE SCAN
PICTURE PROBLEMS, IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT
THE USER SWITCH THE CONNECTION TO THE
‘STANDARD DEFINITION’ OUTPUT. IF THERE ARE
QUESTIONS REGARDING OUR TV SET
Tuner section
FM tuning range:
87.50 MHz – 108.00 MHz
531 kHz – 1 602 kHz (at 9 kHz)
530 kHz – 1 600 kHz (at 10 kHz)
AM (MW) tuning range:
Disc player section
Playable disc: DVD Video/DVD Audio/CD/VCD/SVCD
CD-R/CD-RW (recorded in Audio CD/Video CD/
Super Video CD formats and MP3/WMA/JPEG
files)
COMPATIBILITY WITH THIS MODEL 525p AND 625p
DVD PLAYER, PLEASE CONTACT OUR CUSTOMER
SERVICE CENTER.”
DVD-R (recorded in DVD Video format)
DVD-RW (recorded in DVD Video format or DVD-
VR format)
DVD-RAM (recorded in DVD-VR format)
Dynamic range:
80 dB
Horizontal resolution:
Wow and flutter:
500 lines
Immeasurable
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPTICAL DIGITAL OUTPUT Signals
DIGITAL AUDIO
OUTPUT
Output Signals
Playback disc
DVD Video
STREAM/PCM
DOLBY DIGITAL/PCM
PCM ONLY
with 48 kHz, 16/20/24 bit Linear
PCM
1
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM*
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
with 96 kHz, Linear PCM
with Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital bitstream
DTS bitstream
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
with DTS
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
2
DVD Audio*
with 48/96/192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit
Linear PCM
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
44.1 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
with 44.1/88.2/176.4 kHz, 16/20/
24 bit Linear PCM
with Dolby Digital
with DTS
Dolby Digital bitstream
DTS bitstream
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
DVD-RW/RAM in DVD-VR format
with 48 kHz, 16/20/24 bit Linear
PCM
1
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM*
Dolby Digital bitstream
with Dolby Digital
SVCD, VCD, CD
CD with DTS
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
1
1
44.1 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM* /48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM*
DTS bitstream
44.1 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
32/44.1/48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
MP3/WMA disc
*1 While playing some DVDs, digital signals may be emitted at 20 bits or 24 bits (at their original bit rate) through the OPTICAL DIGITAL
OUTPUT terminal if the discs are not copy-protected.
*2 There is no output for DVD Audio with content protection set.
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parts Index
Remote control
Button
Page
Button
Page
REVERSE
Page
¢
6
(
13, 32
TAPE-A
4
3
%
~
9, 13, 33
9, 13, 32, 33
10
Button
Page
Button
MODE
TAPE-B
AUDIO
z
x
8
9
KARAOKE
SCORING
1
35
SUBWOOFER
LEVEL +/–
15
16
TUNING
VOLUME +/–
TV
41
9, 14, 34
7
11 – 13, 23
KEY #/
:
d
W
R
i
O
;
g
f
Y
I
35
SURROUND
MODE
¡
¢
8
1
4
/
9 Q 10, 12, 13, 21
7 . 11
MIC MIX
MENU/PL
ON SCREEN
34, 36
/
12, 29
P
E
11, 21
26 – 29
5
∞
3
2
/
/
/
/
12, 17, 20, 21, PAGE
20
Remote control
ENTER
26 – 31, 39, 41
PLAY MODE
22, 23
24, 31
15
z
c
1
+ / –
H
T
14, 15, 17, 18,
36, 37
REPEAT
x
RHYTHM AX
2
3
4
5
6
10 keys
10 – 12, 21, 22, RESERVE
28, 36, 41
36
v
n
RETURN
12
b
m
.
Q
ANGLE
AUDIO
y
r
m
20
REVERSE
MODE
13
19
7
,
P
W
AUDIO/TV
selector
9, 41
SCAN MODE
SET
U
j
17
8
9
p
q
10, 14, 15, 18,
36 – 38
AUDIO VOL
+ / –
,
9, 14
SET UP
w
G
/
F
t
S
39
36
18
15
20
15
E
R
AUX
v
l
5
A
9
SETTING
SLEEP
w
CANCEL
23, 36, 38
e
r
t
y
u
i
CHANNEL + / –
41
14
SOUND MODE
SUB TITLE
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
T
U
CHANNEL
LEVEL
7
9
SUB WFR
LEVEL
Y
I
CLOCK/
TIMER
k
18, 37, 38
10
+10
SURROUND
MODE
D
16
o
;
s
DIMMER
DISC 1–5
J
2
o
4
s
h
P
b
p
18
O
A
:
S
a
2 3
2 3
11
TAPE-A
TAPE-B
3
n
q
9, 13
9, 13
12, 29
d
f
h
k
DVD LEVEL
16
D
F
G
J
g
j
3
DVD/CD
ECHO
9, 11
35
TOP MENU/
PG
l
H
/
EFFECT
16
TV VOL + / –
TV/VIDEO
V.MASKING
VFP
6
c
a
U
u
41
FM MODE
FM/AM
10
41
Main unit
9, 10
20
35
GLANCE
BACK
17
1
ZOOM
21, 31
8
GROUP/
TITLE
e
11
2
3
4
5
9
0
Remote
sensor
Main unit
Button
-
=
Page
Button
Page
9, 11
16
~
6
2
8
!
%
=
-
+
_
1
5
¡
9
8
DVD/CD
0
)
9
@
!
@
Display
DVD LEVEL
7
10 – 13, 23, 24 FM/AM
9, 10
35
#
$
%
¡
¢
8
1
4
/
10, 12, 13, 21
KARAOKE
SCORING
( ) _ +
/
11
11, 21
MIC 1 / MIC 2
MIC LEVEL
PHONES
&
*
7
=
34
34
9
¡ ™ £ ¢
AUX
9
^
DEMO
9
Disc trays
11
PRESET +/–
11
3 0
/
0
DISC1–5
11, 24, 33
33
PUSH-OPEN
# ^ 13, 32
&
*
7
DISC REC
START
REC START/
STOP
™
33
DUBBING
£
33
RHYTHM AX
$
15
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mains (AC) Line Instruction (not applicable for Europe, U.S.A.,
Canada, and U.K.)
CAUTION for mains (AC) line
BEFORE PLUGGING IN, do check that your mains
(AC) line voltage corresponds with the position of
the voltage selector switch provided on the outside
of this equipment and, if different, reset the voltage
selector switch, to prevent from a damage or risk of
fire/electric shock.
EN, CS
0205AIMMDWJEM
© 2005 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
COMPACT COMPONENT SYSTEM
CA-DXT9
CA-DXT7
INSTRUCTIONS
GVT0147-002A
[UG, UX]
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Warnings, Cautions and Others
Caution––
button!
CAUTION
Disconnect the mains plug to shut the power off completely.
The button in any position does not
• Do not block the ventilation openings or holes.
(If the ventilation openings or holes are blocked by a
newspaper or cloth, etc., the heat may not be able to get
out.)
disconnect the mains line. The power can be remote
controlled.
• Do not place any naked flame sources, such as lighted
candles, on the apparatus.
• When discarding batteries, environmental problems must
be considered and local rules or laws governing the
disposal of these batteries must be followed strictly.
• Do not expose this apparatus to rain, moisture, dripping or
splashing and that no objects filled with liquids, such as
vases, shall be placed on the apparatus.
CAUTION
To reduce the risk of electrical shocks, fire, etc.:
1. Do not remove screws, covers or cabinet.
2. Do not expose this appliance to rain or moisture.
G-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Caution: Proper Ventilation
To avoid risk of electric shock and fire, and to prevent damage, locate the apparatus as follows:
1. Front:
No obstructions and open spacing.
2. Sides/Top/Back: No obstructions should be placed in the areas shown by the dimensions below.
3. Bottom:
Place on the level surface. Maintain an adequate air path for ventilation by placing
on a stand with a height of 10 cm or more.
Front view
Side view
15 cm
15 cm
1 cm
1 cm
15 cm
CA-DXT9
CA-DXT7
CA-DXT9
CA-DXT7
10 cm
G-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts
inside the unit; leave all servicing to qualified service personnel.
3. CAUTION: Visible and invisible laser radiation when open and interlock
failed or defeated. Avoid direct exposure to beam.
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED INSIDE UNIT.
G-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Precautions
Contents
Connections........................................................................ 3
Installation
Display Indication ............................................................. 8
Daily Operations—Playback............................................ 9
Canceling the Demonstration.......................................... 9
Listening to the Radio ................................................... 10
Playing Back a Disc ...................................................... 11
Playing Back a Tape...................................................... 13
Daily Operations—Sound&Other Adjustments............. 14
Adjusting the Volume ................................................... 14
Adjusting the Speaker Output Level ............................. 14
Reinforcing the Bass Sound.......................................... 15
Selecting the Sound Modes........................................... 15
Creating Your Own Sound Modes—User Mode .......... 15
Selecting the Surround Modes ...................................... 16
Presetting Automatic DVD Video
• Install the System in a location with adequate ventilation to
prevent internal heat buildup in the System.
DO NOT install the System in a location near
heat sources, or in a place subject to direct
sunlight, excessive dust or vibration.
• Install in a place which is level, dry and neither too hot nor
too cold—between 5°C and 35°C.
• Leave sufficient distance between the System and the TV.
• Keep the speakers away from the TV to avoid interference
with TV.
Power sources
• When unplugging the System from the wall outlet, always
pull on the plug, not the AC power cord.
Sound Increase Level ................................................ 16
Changing the Color System and Scanning Mode.......... 17
Changing the Picture Tone............................................ 17
Changing the Display Brightness.................................. 18
Setting the Clock........................................................... 18
Turning Off the Power Automatically .......................... 18
Unique DVD/VCD Operations....................................... 19
Selecting the Sound Track............................................. 19
Selecting the Subtitle Language.................................... 20
Selecting the View Angle.............................................. 20
Reviewing the Playback Quickly .................................. 20
Selecting Browsable Still Pictures ................................ 20
Playing Back Bonus Group........................................... 21
Special Picture Playback ............................................... 21
Advanced Disc Operations ............................................. 22
Programming the Playing Order—Program Play.......... 22
Playing at Random—Random Play............................... 23
Playing Repeatedly—Repeat Play ................................ 24
Prohibiting Disc Ejection—Child Lock........................ 24
On-Screen Disc Operations............................................ 25
On-screen Bar Information............................................ 25
Operations Using the On-screen Bar............................. 26
Operations on the Control Screen ................................. 29
Recording Operations..................................................... 32
Enjoying Karaoke ........................................................... 34
Singing Along (Karaoke) .............................................. 34
Reducing the Lead Vocal—Vocal Masking.................. 35
Scoring Your Karaoke Skill .......................................... 35
Reserving Karaoke Songs—Karaoke Program Play..... 36
Timer Operations............................................................ 37
Setup Menu Operations.................................................. 39
Operating the TV ............................................................ 41
Additional Information................................................... 42
Troubleshooting ............................................................ 45
Specifications ................................................................ 47
Parts Index ...................................................................... 50
DO NOT handle the AC power cord with wet
hands.
Moisture condensation
Moisture may condense on the lenses inside the System in
the following cases:
• After starting to heat the room
• In a damp room
• If the System is brought directly from a cold to a warm
place.
Should this occur, the System may malfunction. In this case,
leave the System turned on for a few hours until the moisture
evaporates, unplug the AC power cord, then plug it in again.
Internal heat
• Make sure there is good ventilation around the unit. Poor
ventilation could overheat and damage the unit.
–A cooling fan is inside the unit to prevent heat buildup.
DO NOT block the ventilation openings or
holes. If they are blocked by a newspaper or
cloth, etc., the heat may not be able to get out.
Others
• Should any metallic object or liquid fall into the System,
unplug the AC power cord and consult your dealer before
operating any further.
DO NOT disassemble the System since there
are no user serviceable parts inside.
• If you are not going to operate the System for an extended
period of time, unplug the AC power cord from the wall
outlet.
If anything goes wrong, unplug the AC power cord and
consult your dealer.
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playable Disc Types
INFO
IMPORTANT: Before playing a disc, make sure of
the following...
• Turn on the TV and select an appropriate input mode on
the TV to view the pictures or on-screen displays.
• For disc playback, you can change the initial setting to
your preference. See “Setup Menu Operations” on
page 39.
DIGITAL VIDEO
If “
” appears on the TV screen when you press a
DVD Logo is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing
Corporation.
button, the disc cannot accept the operation you have
tried to do.
• CD-R/-RW: Recorded in the Audio CD/Video CD/
SVCD formats and MP3/WMA/JPEG files.
• DVD-R: Recorded in the DVD Video format.
How to Read This Manual
• Button and control operations are explained as listed in the
table below.
• DVD-RW: Recorded in the DVD Video format or the
Video Recording (DVD-VR) format.
• DVD-RAM: Recorded in the Video Recording (DVD-
VR) format.
•
Some related tips and notes are explained later in the
sections “Learning More about This System” and
“Troubleshooting,” but not in the same section
In addition to the above discs, this system can play back
audio data recorded on CD Text, CD-G (CD Graphics), and
CD-Extra.
• The following discs cannot be played back:
DVD+R, DVD+RW, CD-I (CD-I Ready), Photo CD, etc.
Playing back these discs will generate noise and damage
the speakers.
explaining the operations (
indicates that the
INFO
content has some information).
Indicates that you press the button briefly.
Indicates that you press the button briefly and
repeatedly until an option you want is
selected.
• In this manual, “file” and “track” are interchangeably used
for MP3/WMA/JPEG operations.
Caution for DualDisc playback:
Indicates that you press one of the buttons.
The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply
with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.
Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on
this product may not be recommended.
Indicates that you press and hold the button
for a specified period.
2sec.
The number inside the arrow indicates the
period of press (in the example, 2 seconds).
About color system
Indicates that you turn the control toward the
specified direction(s).
This System accommodates both NTSC and PAL system
and can play back discs recorded with either system.
To change the color system, see page 17.
Indicates that this operation is only
possible using the remote control.
Remote
ONLY
Note on Region Code
This System can play back only DVD Videos whose Region
Code numbers include “2.”
Indicates that this operation is only
possible using the main unit.
Main Unit
ONLY
EX.:
Audio formats
The System can play back the following digital audio
formats.
•
LPCM (Linear PCM),
DIGITAL (Dolby Digital),
DTS (Digital Theater Systems), MLP (Meridian Lossless
Packing)
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
Do not connect the AC power cord until all other
connections have been made.
Supplied accessories
• FM antenna (x1)
• AM loop antenna (x1)
• Composite video cord (x1)
• Remote control (x1)
• Batteries (x2)
• Connect VIDEO OUT directly to the video input of your
TV. Connecting VIDEO OUT to a TV via a VCR may
interfere with your viewing when playing back a copy-
protected disc. Your viewing may be interfered when
connecting VIDEO OUT to an integrated TV/VCR system.
If any item is missing, consult your dealer immediately.
CA-DXT9
~ From the video input of TV/monitor
See page 5.
Ÿ From the digital input of digital audio
component such as CD recorder
See page 5.
! From the analog audio output of auxiliary
equipment (VCR, etc.)
See page 5.
⁄ From AM/FM antenna
See page 5.
@ From the speakers
See page 6.
¤ Voltage selector
Before plugging in, confirm the position the
voltage selector points at. See page 7.
# To a wall outlet
Plug the AC power cord only after all
connections are complete.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CA-DXT7
~ From the video input of TV/monitor
See page 5.
Ÿ From the digital input of digital audio
component such as CD recorder
See page 5.
! From the analog audio output of auxiliary
equipment (VCR, etc.)
See page 5.
⁄ From AM/FM antenna
See page 5.
@ From the speakers
See page 6.
¤ Voltage selector
Before plugging in, confirm the position the
voltage selector points at. See page 7.
# To a wall outlet
Plug the AC power cord only after all
connections are complete.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
~ TV/monitor
⁄ AM/FM antenna
To assemble the AM loop antenna
Composite video
cord (supplied)
S video cord
(not supplied)
Green
Component video cord (not supplied)
Red
Blue
To connect AM/FM antenna
AM loop antenna (supplied)
Turn it until the best reception is
obtained.
• To select progressive scanning mode (see page 17), use
COMPONENT jacks.
• Connect the VIDEO jack, S-VIDEO jack, or
COMPONENT jacks whichever you want to use.
Ÿ Digital audio component
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
FM antenna (supplied)
Protective cap
Extend it so that you can obtain the best
reception.
For better AM/FM reception
AM loop antenna (supplied)
Keep it connected.
• Set “DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT” in the “AUDIO” menu
correctly according to the connected digital audio
equipment (see page 40). If setting is incorrect, loud noise
may be generated causing damage to the speakers.
Vinyl-covered wire (not supplied)
Extend it horizontally.
! Auxiliary equipment
Red
FM outdoor antenna
(not supplied)
Stereo audio cord
(not supplied)
White
• Disconnect the supplied FM antenna, and connect to an
outdoor FM antenna using a 75 Ω wire with coaxial type
connector (IEC or DIN45325).
• Make sure the antenna conductors do not touch any other
terminals, connecting cords and power cord. Also, keep the
antennas away from metallic parts of the System,
connecting cords, and the AC power cord. This could cause
poor reception.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Use only speakers with the same speaker impedance as
indicated by the speaker terminals on the rear of the System.
• The front and center speakers are magnetically shielded to
avoid color distortions on TVs. However, if not installed
properly, it may cause color distortions. So, pay attention to
the following when installing the speakers.
@ Speakers
To connect the speaker cords
– When placing the speakers near a TV set, turn off the
TV’s main power switch or unplug it before installing the
speakers.
Then wait at least 30 minutes before turning on the TV’s
main power switch again.
Some TVs may still be affected even though you have
followed the above instruction. If this happens, move the
speakers away from the TV.
• When connecting the speaker cords, match their polarity
with that of the speaker terminals: blue/red/green/white/
gray to (+) and black to (–).
For CA-DXT9
From right front speaker (blue/black)
• DO NOT connect more than one speaker to
each terminal.
• DO NOT push or pull the speakers as this
will damage the foot spacers at the bottom
of the speakers.
Fromleftfrontspeaker
(blue/black)
Speaker layout
To enjoy multi-channel sound, locate the speakers as
follows. If you cannot locate like this, adjust the speaker
setting by using the Setup menu (see page 40).
For CA-DXT9
From right
subwoofer
(red/black)
From left subwoofer
(red/black)
From center
speaker
(green/black)
From right surround
speaker (white/black)
From left surround
speaker (white/black)
For CA-DXT7
From right front speaker (blue/black)
From left front speaker
(blue/black)
For CA-DXT7
Fromsubwoofer
(red/black)
From center speaker
(green/black)
From left surround
speaker (gray/black)
From right surround
speaker (gray/black)
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To remove the speaker grilles of the front speakers
Preparing the remote control
Holes
When using the remote
Projection
control, point the top of the
remote control toward the
remote sensor as directly as
possible. If you operate it
from a diagonal position,
theoperatingrange(approx.
5 m) may be shorter.
R6(SUM-3)/AA(15F)
Speaker grille
• Dispose of batteries in the proper manner, according to
federal, state, and local regulations.
¤ To adjust the voltage selector
DO NOT recharge, short, disassemble or
heat the battery or dispose of it in a fire.
Use a screwdriver to rotate the
voltage selector so that the voltage
mark is pointing at the same voltage
as where you are plugging in the unit.
(See also the back cover page.)
Voltage mark
DO NOT plug in before setting the voltage
selector and all connection procedures are
complete.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Display Indication
The indications on the display teach you a lot of things while
9 Tape operation indicators
you are operating the System.
• TAPE: lights when a tape is loaded in either deck A or B.
Before operating the System, be familiar with when and how
the indicator illuminates on the display.
•
(Reverse Mode): lights to indicate the current
Reverse Mode (see page 13).
• A: lights when a tape is in the deck A.
• B: lights when a tape is in the deck B.
1
2
3456 7
8
9
•
2 3 (tape direction):
– Lights to indicate the current tape running direction.
– Flashes slowly during playback and recording.
– Flashes quickly while rewinding a tape.
• REC: lights while recording.
p Disc operation indicators
• PROGRAM: lights when Program Play is activated.
• RANDOM: lights when Random Play is activated.
• REPEAT: lights when Repeat Play is activated.
• ALL DISC: lights when All Disc Repeat is activated.
• 1 DISC: lights when One Disc Repeat is activated.
• 1: lights when One Track/Chapter/Step Repeat is
activated.
p
q w e
r
t
y
u
i
o
;
1 PROGRESSIVE indicator
• Lights when the progressive scanning mode is selected.
2 Karaoke operation indicators (see pages 34 to 36)
•
: lights when the Mic Mixing Mode is activated;
flashes when scoring function is in use.
/
q Main display
w TITLE indicator
• Lights to indicate the title number for DVD Video.
e Audio signal indicators
• L/R/C/LS/RS/LFE: Lights to indicate the incoming audio
channel signals.
• MIC: lights when the Mic Mixing Mode is activated;
flashes when scoring function is in use.
• ECHO: lights when the echo effect is activated.
• V.MASKING: lights when the Vocal Masking Mode is
activated.
3 Source signal indicators
•
: Lights to indicate the speakers from which
sound is emitted.
• DTS: lights when a source signal is DTS.
•
DIGITAL: lights when a source signal is Dolby
Digital.
r GROUP indicator
• Lights to indicate the group number.
t CHAP. indicator
• Lights to indicate the chapter number.
y TRACK indicator
• DVD: lights when DVD Video is detected.
• DVD AUDIO: lights when DVD Audio is detected.
• PCM: lights when a source signal is linear PCM.
4 BONUS indicator
• Lights to indicate the track number.
u FILE indicator
• Lights when DVD Audio with bonus group is detected
(see page 21).
• Lights to indicate the file number.
i Disc indicators
• 1 – 5: lights to indicate the current disc tray.
5 B.S.P. indicator
• Lights when browsable still pictures on DVD Audio are
available (see page 20).
•
: lights when a disc is detected on the disc tray; rotates
during playback or paused.
6 RESUME indicator
• Lights when Resume is activated (see page 40).
7 Timer indicators
o Sound Mode/Surround Mode indicators (see page 15)
• DOLBY PL II MOVIE/MUSIC: lights when Dolby Pro
Logic Modes (Movie or Music) is activated.
• S.MODE: lights when one of the Sound Modes/Surround
Modes is activated.
• DSP MODE: lights when one of the DSP Modes is
activated.
; FM reception indicators
•
: lights when Daily Timer or Recording Timer stands
by or is working or being set.
• SLEEP: lights when the Sleep Timer is activated.
• DAILY: lights when the Daily Timer stands by; flashes
while working or being set.
• REC: lights when the Recording Timer stands by; flashes
while working or being set.
• ST (stereo): lights while an FM stereo station with
sufficient signal strength is tuned in.
• MONO: lights while receiving an FM stereo station in
monaural.
8 DVD LEVEL 1/2/3 indicators
• Lights to indicate the DVD Video increase level.
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Daily Operations—Playback
¥ Turn on the power.
In this manual, the operation using the remote control
The STANDBY lamp on the main unit goes off.
is mainly explained; however, you can use the buttons
and controls on the main unit if they have the same (or
similar) name and marks.
• Without pressing
AUDIO, the System also turns
on by pressing one of the source select buttons in the
next step.
ø Select the source.
Playback automatically starts if the selected source is
ready to start playback.
• If you press AUX, start playback source on the external
component.
1
AUDIO
DISC 1 –
DISC 5
TV
π Adjust the volume.
2
3
[ Operate the target source as explained
FM MODE /
later.
MENU
TOP MENU
/ / / /
ENTER
To turn off (stand by) the system
The STANDBY lamp on the main unit
lights in red.
• A small amount of power is always
consumed even while on standby.
AUDIO
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
GROUP/TITLE
10 keys
7
9
10
+10
RETURN
REVERSE
MODE
For private listening
Connect a pair of headphones to the PHONES jack on the
main unit. The sound will no longer come out of the
speakers. Be sure to turn down the volume before
connecting or putting the headphones.
• Disconnecting the headphones will activate the
speakers again.
SET
AUDIO
1
2
DO NOT turn off (stand by) the System with
the volume set to an extremely high level;
Otherwise, the sudden blast of sound can
damage your hearing, speakers and/or
headphones when you turn on the System or
start playback.
AUX
DVD/CD
TAPE-A
TAPE-B
FM/AM
Canceling the Demonstration
Main Unit
ONLY
2
sec.
DEMO OFF
AUDIO VOL
3
DEMO START
To start the demonstration, select DEMO START.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
Listening to the Radio
INFO
If the received FM station is hard to listen
To select the AM tuner interval spacing
The MONO indicator lights on the
display. Reception will improve though
stereo effect is lost—monaural reception
mode.
Main Unit
ONLY
FM MODE
Some countries space AM stations 9 kHz apart, and other
countries use 10 kHz spacing.
To restore the stereo effect, press the
button again (the MONO indicator goes
off).
1 Select “AM,” then turn off (stand by) the System.
FM
AM
Remote
ONLY
To preset stations
You can preset 30 FM and 15 AM stations.
• To cancel the operation during procedure, press CANCEL.
2 Select the AM tuner interval spacing.
To select 9 kHz:
1 Tune in to a station you want to preset.
• You can also store the monaural reception mode for FM
preset stations if selected.
2 Start presetting.
SET
(holding then...)
To select 10 kHz:
3 Select a preset number.
Examples:
1
2
5
8
0
3
To select preset number 5, press 5.
To select preset number 15, press +10,
then 5.
To select preset number 30, press +10,
+10, then 10.
4
6
7
9
(holding then...)
10
+10
• You can also use +/– buttons.
To select the band (FM/AM)
FM/AM
FM
AM
4 Store the station.
To tune in to a station
While FM or AM is selected...
SET
1
sec.
Increases the frequencies.
Decreases the frequencies.
To tune in to a preset station
1 Select the band (FM or AM).
FM/AM
Frequency starts changing on the display.
When a station (frequency) with sufficient signal strength is
tuned in, the frequency search stops.
FM
AM
• When you repeatedly press the button, the frequency
changes step by step.
To stop searching manually, press either button.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Select a preset number.
On-screen guide icons
• During disc playback, the following icons may appear for
a while on the TV screen:
Examples:
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
To select preset number 5, press 5.
To select preset number 15, press
+10, then 5.
To select preset number 30, press
+10, +10, then 10.
Appears at the beginning of a scene containing
multi-angle views.
7
9
10
+10
Appears at the beginning of a scene containing
multi-audio languages.
• You can also use 4/¢
buttons on the remote control or
PRESET +/– buttons on the main
unit.
Appears at the beginning of a scene containing
multi-subtitle languages.
• The following icons will be also shown on the TV screen
to indicate your current operation.
,
,
,
,
,
Playing Back a Disc
Before operating a disc, be familiar how a disc is recorded.
INFO
• To deactivate the on-screen guide icons, see “ON
SCREEN GUIDE” on page 40.
• DVD Video comprises of “Titles” which includes
“
“
“
Chapters,” DVD Audio/MP3/WMA comprise of
Groups” which includes “Tracks,” JPEG comprises of
Groups” which includes “Files,” and CD/SVCD/VCD
To select a disc
DISC 1
DISC 2
DISC 3
comprise of only “Tracks.”
• For JPEG playback, see page 30.
DISC 4
DISC 5
To insert discs
Main Unit
ONLY
Playback starts.
Remote
ONLY
To select a title/group
While playing a disc...
1
2
3
6
GROUP/TITLE
4
5
8
0
• When using an 8 cm disc, place it on the inner circle of the
disc tray.
7
9
To close the disc tray, press the same 0 again.
• If you press 3 for the same tray, the disc tray closes
automatically and playback starts.
10
+10
To start:
To pause:
To stop:
To select a chapter/track
While playing a disc...
DVD/CD
FM MODE
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
or
Playback of the
current disc starts. DVD/CD 3.
To release it, press
7
9
• First time you press
4, you can go back
to the beginning of the
current chapter/track.
10
+10
While playing DVD/SVCD/VCD/MP3: This System can
store the stop point, and when you start playback again by
pressing DVD/CD 3, it starts from the position where you
have stopped—Resume Play. (RESUME indicator lights up
when you stop playback.)
To stop completely while Resume is activated, press 7
twice. (To cancel Resume, see “RESUME” on page 40.)
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7 For SVCD/VCD with PBC
While playing a disc with PBC, “PBC” appears on the
display instead of the playing time.
To locate a particular portion
While playing a disc except MP3/WMA...
When disc menu appears on the TV screen, select an item on
the menu. Playback of the selected item starts.
Examples:
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
To select number 5, press 5.
To select number 15, press +10,
then 5.
To select number 30, press +10,
+10, then 10.
• No sound comes out while searching on DVD Video/
SVCD/VCD.
To return to normal playback, press DVD/CD 3.
7
9
10
+10
Remote
ONLY
T
o select an item directly
You can select a title/chapter/track directly and start
playback.
• For DVD Video, you can select a title before starting
playback, while you can select a chapter after starting
To move to the next or
previous page of the
current menu:
To return to the previous
menu:
playback
.
RETURN
Examples:
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
To select number 5, press 5.
To select number 15, press +10,
then 5.
To select number 30, press +10,
+10, then 10.
7
9
To cancel PBC
10
+10
Remote
ONLY
To play back by using the disc menu
You can operate the disc play using the disc menu.
You can also cancel PBC by pressing the 10 keys to start
playback when disc menu is not shown on the TV screen.
To reactivate PBC, press 7, then press 4.
7 For DVD Video/DVD Audio
1 Show the disc menu.
TOP MENU/PG
MENU/PL
or
2 Select an item on the disc menu.
ENTER
• On some discs, you can also select items by entering the
number using the 10 keys.
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change the tape running direction
Playing Back a Tape
TAPE-A
TAPE-B
3 (forward
2 (reverse
)
)
To insert a tape
You can play back type I tapes.
• The use of C-120 or longer tape is not recommended.
Push
To reverse the tape automatically
REVERSE
MODE
Tape is reversed, and playback repeats until
you stop it.
Insert
Tape is not reversed. When the current side of
the tape reaches its end, playback stops.
Tape is reversed once.
To playback the both decks A and B continuously
—Relay Play
When the cassettes are set in the both decks...
Close
REVERSE
MODE
TAPE-A
TAPE-B
To start:
To stop:
TAPE-A
TAPE-B
You can start playback of either deck A or B.
To rewind tape:
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Daily Operations—Sound&Other Adjustments
Adjusting the Volume
Remote Control
The volume level can be adjusted in 32 steps (VOLUME
MIN, VOLUME 1 – VOLUME 30, and VOLUME MAX).
Remote control:
Main unit:
AUDIO
AUDIO VOL
TV
AUDIO VOL +/–
/ / / /
ENTER
Adjusting the Speaker Output
Remote
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
ONLY
Level
7
9
You can adjust the speaker output level from –6 (dB) to +6
(dB).
• You can also use the setup menu to adjust the speaker
output level (see page 40).
10
+10
VFP /
SCAN MODE
DVD LEVEL
EFFECT
SUB WFR LEVEL
CHANNEL LEVEL
SOUND MODE
SURROUND MODE
+/–
1 Select the speaker you want to adjust.
RHYTHM AX
SET
(Front left
speaker)
(Front right
speaker)
(Center
speaker)
CLOCK/TIMER
SLEEP
DIMMER
FRONT L FRONT R
CENTER
CHANNEL
LEVEL
SURROUND R
(Surround right
speaker)
SURROUND L
(Surround left
speaker)
Main unit
SET
2 Adjust the output level.
SUB WOOFER
LEVEL
VOLUME
SURROUND
MODE
RHYTHM AX
DVD LEVEL
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to adjust other speakers.
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
Reinforcing the Bass Sound
Creating Your Own Sound
Modes—User Mode
INFO
To adjust the bass level gradually
You can select the subwoofer level from level 0
(minimum) to level 4 (maximum).
INFO
You can adjust the preset Sound Modes to create your own
Sound Modes which suit your taste. The changed settings can
be stored as the USER1, USER2 and USER3 Modes.
Remote control:
Main unit:
While the Sound Mode name is shown on the display...
SUB WFR
LEVEL
1 Enter the SEA Control Mode.
SET
2
SET
To emphasize rhythmical feeling—RHYTHM AX
This function emphasizes bass attack feeling.
3 Adjust the SEA pattern.
1 Adjust BASS.
RHYTHM AX
ON
2 Adjust TREBLE.
OFF
SET
Remote
ONLY
Selecting the Sound Modes
You can select one of the preset Sound Modes.
• You can adjust the bass and treble level from –5 to
+5.
SEA Modes
SOUND
MODE
4 Select one of the User Modes.
ROCK
POP CLASSIC
USER1–3
FLAT
USER1
USER2
USER3
SEA (Sound Effect Amplifier) Modes
ROCK
Boosts low and high frequency. Good for
acoustic music (initial setting).
5 Store the setting.
POP
Good for vocal music.
SET
CLASSIC
User Modes
USER1/2/3
Good for classical music.
Your individual mode stored in memory.
See the next column “Creating Your Own
Sound Modes—User Mode.”
• The Sound Mode changes to the one you have stored.
To cancel the Sound Mode, select “FLAT.”
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
To adjust the DSP effect level
Selecting the Surround Modes
INFO
When one of the DSP Modes (except for “ALL CH. ST”) is
selected...
• For DVD/CD, TAPE-A, TAPE-B, AUX:
SURROUND
MODE
EFFECT
EFFECT 1
EFFECT 2
ALL CH. ST
MUSIC
DANCE
MOVIE
HALL STADIUM
AUTO
STEREO
EFFECT 3
• The initial setting is “EFFECT3.”
• For FM/AM:
SURROUND
MODE
ALL CH. ST
STEREO
DANCE
HALL
Presetting Automatic DVD Video
Sound Increase Level
STADIUM
The DVD Video sound is sometimes recorded at a lower
level than for other discs and sources. You can set the
increase level for the currently loaded DVD Video, so you
do not have to adjust the volume when you change the
source.
DSP Modes
ALL CH. ST All Channel Stereo; Creates larger stereo
sound field using all the connected
speakers (initial setting).
DVD LEVEL
DVD LEVEL1
DVD LEVEL2
DANCE
HALL
Increases resonance and bass.
Adds depth and brilliance to the sound.
DVD LEVEL3
STADIUM
Adds clarity and spreads the sound, as in
an outdoor stadium.
As the number increases, sound level also increases.
• The initial setting is “DVD LEVEL3.”
Stereo Mode
STEREO
Canceles the Surround Mode.
Auto Surround Mode
AUTO • When multi-channel surround signal
comes in, multi-channel surround mode
is activated.
• When Dolby Surround signal comes in,
MOVIE (Dolby Pro Logic II Movie)
mode is selected.
• When 2-channel signal comes in,
STEREO mode is selected.
Dolby Pro Logic II Modes
MOVIE
Creates 5.1-channel surround field from
2-ch source (suitable for movie source).
MUSIC
Creates 5.1-channel surround field from
2-ch source (suitable for music source).
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Select a preset picture tone.
NORMAL
Changing the Color System and
CINEMA
USER1
Remote
ONLY
Scanning Mode
INFO
USER2
You can select the video output to match it to the color
system of your TV (NTSC or PAL).
• If you connect a progressive TV through the
COMPONENT jacks, you can enjoy a high quality picture
from the built-in DVD player by selecting progressive
scanning mode.
• You can change the setting only while the disc playback is
stopped.
NORMAL
CINEMA
Normally select this.
Suitable for a movie source.
USER1/USER2 You can adjust parameters and can
store the settings (see below).
1 Enter the color system setting mode.
To adjust the picture tone
4
sec.
1 Select “USER1” or “USER2.”
• Follow steps 1 and 2 above.
2 Select a parameter you want to adjust.
SCAN MODE
VFP
2 Select the color system and scanning mode.
ENTER
NTSC
PAL
PAL PROG
NTSC PROG
GAMMA
Adjust if the neutral color is bright
or dark. The brightness of dark and
bright portions is maintained
(–3 to +3).
NTSC / PAL NTSC or PAL Interlaced scanning.
For a conventional PAL or NTSC TV.
NTSC / PAL NTSC or PAL Progressive scanning.
BRIGHTNESS Adjust if the picture is bright or dark
PROG
For a progressive NTSC or PAL TV.
as a whole (–8 to +8).
3 Store the setting.
CONTRAST
Adjust if the far and near position is
unnatural (–7 to +7).
SET
SATURATION Adjust if the picture is whitish or
blackish (–7 to +7).
TINT
Adjust if the human skin color is
unnatural (–7 to +7).
SHARPNESS
Adjust if the picture is indistinct
(–8 to +8).
Remote
ONLY
Changing the Picture Tone
While viewing a playback pictures on the TV, you can select
the preset picture tone, or adjust it and store your own
preference.
3 Adjust the parameter.
ENTER
To select a preset picture tone
1 While playing, display VFP setting screen.
NORMAL
SCAN MODE
4 Repeat steps 2 to 3 to adjust other parameters.
To erase the VFP screen, press VFP again.
GAMMA
0
0
0
0
0
0
VFP
BRIGHTNESS
CONTRAST
SATURATION
TINT
SHARPNESS
On the TV screen
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
Remote
ONLY
Changing the Display Brightness
Turning Off the Power Automatically
With Sleep Timer, you can fall asleep while listening to
music.
DIMMER
DIMMER 1 DIMMER 2
DIMMER OFF
1 Specify the time (in minutes).
(Canceled)
SLEEP
10
20
30
60
150
90
DIMMER 1
DIMMER 2
Dims the display and the illumination
on the main unit*.
Canceled
120
Dims the display (same as DIMMER 1)
and turns off the illumination on the
main unit*.
2 Wait until the set time goes off.
To check the time remaining until the shut-off time
*Except for the RHYTHM AX and KARAOKE SCORING
lamps.
SLEEP
• If you press the button repeatedly, you can
change the shut-off time.
Remote
ONLY
Setting the Clock
INFO
Without setting the build-in clock, you cannot use any
timers.
• To exit from the clock setting, press CLOCK/TIMER as
required.
• To correct a misentry during the process, press CANCEL.
You can return to the previous step.
1 Activate clock setting mode.
CLOCK/
TIMER
• If you have already adjusted the clock before, press the
button repeatedly until the clock time starts flashing.
2 Adjust the hour, then minute.
SET
Now the built-in clock starts working.
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unique DVD/VCD Operations
Remote
ONLY
Selecting the Sound Track
INFO
Remote Control
For DVD Video: While playing back a chapter containing
audio languages, you can select the language to listen to.
For DVD Audio: While playing back a track containing
audio channels, you can select the audio channel to listen to.
For DVD-VR/Karaoke SVCD/VCD: When playing back a
track, you can select the audio channel to play.
• You can also select the audio track using the on-screen bar
(see page 26).
AUDIO
TV
DVD/CD 3
While playing DVD Video...
AUDIO
GLANCE
BACK
/ / / /
ENTER
Ex.:
1/3
2/3
3/3
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
10 keys
ENGLISH
FRENCH
JAPANESE
AUDIO
SUB TITLE
ANGLE
7
9
10
+10
1/3
2/3
FRENCH
3/3
JAPANESE
ENGLISH
ZOOM
PAGE
While playing a DVD-VR, SVCD, or VCD...
SVCD
ST1
ST2
L2
L1
AUDIO
R2
R1
DVD-VR/VCD
ST
L
R
ST1/ST2/ST To listen to normal stereo (2 channel)
playback.
L1/L2/L
R1/R2/R
To listen to the left audio channel.
To listen to the right audio channel.
• SVCD can have 4 audio channels. Karaoke SVCD usually
uses these 4 channels to record two 2-channel recordings
(ST1/ST2).
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
Remote
ONLY
Selecting the Subtitle Language
Selecting the View Angle
For DVD Video: While playing back a chapter containing
subtitles in different languages, you can select the subtitle
language to display on the TV screen.
For DVD Video only: While playing back a chapter
containing multi-view angles, you can view the same scene
from different angles.
For DVD-VR: While playing, you can turn on or off the
subtitle.
• You can also select the view angle using the on-screen bar
(see page 26).
For SVCD: While playing, you can select the subtitles even
if no subtitles are recorded on the disc.
While playing back...
• You can also select the subtitle language using the on-
screen bar (see page 26).
ANGLE
While playing a DVD Video...
Ex.:
1 Display the subtitle selection window.
1/3
2/3
3/3
SUB TITLE
1
2
3
1/3
2/3
3/3
1
2
3
2 Select the subtitle language.
Ex.:
Remote
ONLY
Reviewing the Playback Quickly
1/3
2/3
3/3
For DVD Video/DVD-VR only: You can move the
playback position to 10 seconds before the current position
(only within the same title)—Glance Back.
ENGLISH
FRENCH
JAPANESE
1/3
ENGLISH
2/3
FRENCH
3/3
JAPANESE
While playing back...
GLANCE BACK
While playing a DVD-VR...
SUB TITLE
Remote
ONLY
Selecting Browsable Still Pictures
For DVD Audio only: While playing back a track linked to
browsable still pictures (B.S.P.), you can select the still
picture (turn the page) to be shown on the TV screen.
• If a track is linked to browsable still pictures (B.S.P.), they
are usually shown in turn automatically during playback.
• You can also select the page using the on-screen bar (see
page 26).
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
While playing an SVCD...
SUB TITLE
Each time you press the button, the still
picture changes one after another (if
available).
PAGE
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
Slow-motion playback
Playing Back Bonus Group
INFO
For DVD Audio only: Some DVD Audios have a special
group called “bonus group” whose contents are not open to
the public.
1 While playing...
FM MODE
• To play back a bonus group, you have to enter the specific
“key number” (a kind of password) for the bonus group.
The way of getting the key number depends on the disc.
Still picture playback starts.
2 Select slow motion speed.
1 Select the bonus group.
• The bonus group is usually recorded as the last group
(for example, if a disc contains 4 groups including a
bonus group, “group 4” is the bonus group).
• For how to select the group, see “To select a title/group”
on page 11.
1/32
1/32
1/16
1/16
1/8
1/8
1/4
1/4
1/2
1/2
2 Enter the key number.
1
2
5
8
0
3
4
6
* Not available for DVD-VR/SVCD/VCD.
ENTER
7
9
To resume normal playback, press DVD/CD 3.
10
+10
Remote
ONLY
Zoom
3 Follow the interactive instruction shown on the TV
1 While playing...
screen.
ZOOM 1
ZOOM 2
ZOOM 3
ZOOM 4
ZOOM 5
ZOOM
To cancel the key number entry, press 7.
ZOOM OFF
ZOOM 6
Special Picture Playback
INFO
As the number increases, magnification also increases.
• For JPEG, see page 31.
Still picture playback
While playing...
2 Move the zoomed-in position.
FM MODE
Still picture playback starts.
To resume normal playback, press DVD/CD 3.
Frame-by-frame playback
1 While playing...
FM MODE
To resume normal playback, press ZOOM repeatedly until
“ZOOM OFF” appears on the TV screen.
Still picture playback starts.
2 Advance the still picture frame by frame.
FM MODE
To resume normal playback, press DVD/CD 3.
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Disc Operations
Remote
ONLY
Programming the Playing Order
—Program Play
Remote Control
INFO
You can arrange the playing order of the tracks (up to 99)
before you start playback.
AUDIO
TV
1 Before starting playback, activate Program Play.
PLAY MODE
DVD/CD 3
PROGRAM RANDOM
Canceled
/
/
/
On the display
/
PROGRAM
No Disc
1
Group/Title
Track/Chapter
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
10 keys
7
9
10
+10
USE NUMERIC KEYS TO PROGRAM TRACKS.
USE CANCEL TO DELETE THE PROGRAM.
PLAY MODE
REPEAT
CANCEL
On the TV screen
2 Select chapters or tracks you want for Program Play.
1 Select a disc number.
2 Select a title or group number.
3 Select a chapter or track number.
Main unit
To enter the numbers:
Examples:
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
To enter number 5, press 5.
To enter number 15, press +10,
then 5.
To enter number 30, press +10,
+10, then 10.
7
9
10
+10
DVD/CD
DISC 1 0
3 Repeat the above step 2 until you finish what you want
to program.
4 Start playback.
Playback starts in the order you
have programmed.
DVD/CD
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
To skip a track:
To pause:
To stop*:
Playing at Random—Random Play
FM MODE
You can play the contents of all the loaded discs at random.
• Random Play cannot be used for some DVDs.
1 Before starting playback, activate Random Play.
Torelease, press
DVD/CD 3.
PLAY MODE
PROGRAM RANDOM
Canceled
*Resume does not work for Program Play.
Remote
ONLY
To check the programmed contents
Before or after playback...
2 Start playback.
in the reverse order
Playback of the current disc
DVD/CD
starts in a random order. When
all chapters/tracks on the current
disc are played, playback of the
next disc starts. Random Play
ends when all loaded discs are
played.
in the programmed order
To modify the program
Before or after playback...
To erase the last step:
To erase the entire
program:
To skip:
To pause:
To stop:
FM MODE
CANCEL
To go to the
beginning of the
current track,
press 4.
To release, press
DVD/CD 3.
To add steps in the program:
Repeat step 2 on page 22.
To exit from Program Play
Before or after playback...
To exit from Random Play
Before or after playback...
PLAY MODE
PROGRAM RANDOM
Canceled
PLAY MODE
PROGRAM RANDOM
Canceled
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
Playing Repeatedly—Repeat Play
REPEAT 1 Repeats the current chapter/track.
REPEAT Repeats the current title/group.
You can repeat playback.
• You can also select the repeat mode using the on-screen bar
(see page 26).
• The indicator(s) lights on the display as follows to indicate
the current repeat mode.
REPEAT 1 Repeats the current disc.
DISC*
REPEAT
Repeats all discs.
•
For DVD Video:
ALL DISC*
While playing...
REPEAT
ALL
Repeats all programmed tracks.
REPEAT
REPEAT 1
REPEAT
Canceled
REPEAT ALL DISC
*These modes may not work correctly for DVD Video.
•
For DVD Audio:
Prohibiting Disc Ejection
Main Unit
ONLY
While playing or before playback...
—Child Lock
You can lock the disc trays so that no one can eject the
REPEAT
REPEAT 1
REPEAT
Canceled
REPEAT ALL DISC
loaded discs.
• This operation is possible only when the source is the disc
player.
•
For MP3/WMA:
While in standby mode...
While playing or before playback...
REPEAT
REPEAT 1
REPEAT
REPEAT 1 DISC
Canceled
REPEAT ALL DISC
(holding then...)
•
For CD/SVCD/VCD:
While playing or before playback (without PBC for SVCD/
VCD)...
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same procedure.
“UNLOCKED” appears on the display.
REPEAT
REPEAT 1
REPEAT 1 DISC
Canceled
REPEAT ALL DISC
•
For Random Play:
While playing or before playback...
REPEAT
REPEAT 1
REPEAT 1 DISC
Canceled
REPEAT ALL DISC
•
For Program Play:
While playing or before playback...
REPEAT
REPEAT 1
REPEAT ALL
Canceled
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
On-Screen Disc Operations
On-screen Bar Information
Remote control
You can check the information on disc (except for MP3/
WMA/JPEG disc) and use some functions through the on-
screen bar.
AUDIO
TV
On-screen bars
DVD Video
DVD/CD 3
1
2
3
Dolby D
3/2.1ch
DISC 1 TITLE
CHAP.
2
CHAP
3
TOTAL 1:01:58
1/1
DVD-VIDEO
TIME
OFF
1/3
1/3
PG
PL
4
/ / / /
ENTER
DVD Audio
ON SCREEN
1
2
3
PPCM
DISC
2
GROUP 14 TRACK 23 TIME 0:15:58
PAGE
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
DVD-AUDIO
3/2.1ch
10 keys
OFF
TRACK
1/3
1/3
TIME
7
9
10
+10
4
ZOOM
DVD-VR
REPEAT
1
2
3
Dolby D
2/0.0ch
DISC
1
PG
2
CHAP
3
TOTAL 0:01:58
DVD-VR
TIME
OFF
CHAP.
ST
ON
4
SVCD
1
2
3
3
3
TRACK
3
TIME
0:04:58
DISC
3
SVCD
TIME
OFF
ST1
-/
4
4
VCD
1
2
DISC
4
TRACK
3
TIME
0:04:58
VCD
TIME
OFF
ST
4
CD
1
2
TRACK
3
TIME 0:04:58
DISC 5
CD
TIME
OFF
4
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
1 Disc type
O
perations Using the
2 Playback information
Indication Meanings
On-screen Bar
INFO
Basic operation procedure through the on-screen bar is as
follows:
Ex.: Selecting a subtitle (French) for DVD Video:
Dolby D/
PPCM
Audio format
3/2.1 ch/
2.0/0 ch
Channel number
While a disc is selected as the source...
DISC
TITLE
CHAP
1
Current disc
1 Display the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.
2
Current title
ON
Current chapter
Current group
Current track
Current title
3
SCREEN
Dolby D
DISC
1
1
TITLE
TITLE
2
CHAP
CHAP
3
TOTAL 1:01:58
DVD-VIDEO
3/2.1ch
GROUP
1
TRACK 14
Dolby D
3/2.1ch
DISC
2
3
TOTAL 1:01:58
1/1
DVD-VIDEO
TIME
OFF
CHAP.
1/3
1/3
PG
PL
2
2
Current play list
Time indications
Goes off
TOTAL1:25:58
3 Playback conditions
Indication Meanings
Playback
2 Select (highlight) the item you want.
/
/
Forward/Reverse search
Forward/Reverse slow-motion
Pause
Stop
Dolby D
DISC 1 TITLE
CHAP.
2
CHAP
3
TOTAL 1:01:58
1/1
DVD-VIDEO
3/2.1ch
TIME
OFF
1/3
1/3
4 Operation icons (on the pull-down menu)
3 Display the pop-up window.
Indication Meanings
TIME
Select to change the time indication
(see also page 27).
1
TITLE
2
CHAP
3
TOTAL 1:01:58
ENTER
1/3
1/3 1/1
Select to repeat playback (see also
pages 24, 27 and 28).
ENGLISH
Select for time search (see also
page 28).
4 Select the desired option in the pop-up window.
CHAP.
Select for chapter search (see also
page 29).
1
TITLE
2
CHAP
3
TOTAL 1:01:58
1/1
1/3
2/3
TRACK
Select for track search (see also
page 29).
FRENCH
Select to change the audio language or
channel (see also page 19).
1/3
5 Finish the setting.
Pop-up window goes off.
Select to change subtitle language (see
also page 20).
1/3
1/3
ENTER
Select to change view angle (see also
page 20).
Select to change the page (see also
page 20).
PAGE 1/15
To erase the on-screen bar
ON
SCREEN
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change the time information
You can change the time information in the on-screen bar
and the display window on the main unit.
Repeat Play
• See also page 24.
1 While playing a disc (without PBC for SVCD/VCD),
display the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.
• Except for DVD Video: Repeat Play can be selected
before starting playback.
1 Display the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.
Dolby D
3/2.1ch
DISC 1
T
I
TL
E
2
CHAP
TOTAL 1:01:58
3
DVD-VIDEO
TIME
O
F
F
CHAP.
1
/3/1
1
/
3
1
2 Select
.
3 Display the pop-up window.
2 Make sure TIME is selected (highlighted).
3 Change the time indication.
Dolby D
T
I
TL
E
2
CHAP
TOTAL 1:01:58
3
DISC 1
DVD-VIDEO
3/2.1ch
TIME
O
F
F
CHAP.
1
/3/1
1
/
3
1
ENTER
OFF
4 Select the repeat mode you want.
ALL
Repeats all discs or all programmed
tracks.
TOTAL
T.REM
TIME*
Elapsed disc time.
Remaining disc time.
A-B
Repeats a desired portion (see the next
page).
Elapsed playing time of the current
chapter/track.
TITLE
Repeats the current title.
REM*
Remaining time of the current chapter/
track.
GROUP
DISC
Repeats the current group.
Repeats the disc (except for DVD).
Repeats the current chapter.
Repeats the current track.
*Not available for DVD-VR.
CHAPTER
TRACK*
PG
To erase the on-screen bar
Repeats the current title (for DVD-VR
only). See also page 31.
ON
SCREEN
PL
Repeats the current play list (for DVD-
VR only). See also page 31.
OFF
Cancels Repeat Play.
*During Program Play or Random Play, “STEP”
appears.
5 Finish the setting.
Pop-up window goes off.
ENTER
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A-B Repeat
Time Search
You can move to a particular point by specifying the elapsed
playing time from the beginning.
1 While playing, display the on-screen bar with the pull-
down menu.
1 While playing (without PBC for SVCD/VCD), display
the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.
• Except for DVD: Time Search can be used before
starting playback.
2 Select
3 Display the pop-up window.
.
Dolby D
3/2.1ch
DISC 1
T
I
TL
E
2
CHAP
TOTAL 1:01:58
3
DVD-VIDEO
TIME
O
F
F
CHAP.
1
/3/1
1
/
3
1
2 Select
.
OFF
3 Display the pop-up window.
Dolby D
CHAP
TOTAL 1:01:58
3
DISC 1
T
I
TL
E
2
DVD-VIDEO
4 Select “A-B”.
3/2.1ch
TIME
O
F
F
CHAP.
TIME _ : _ _ : _ _
1
/3/1
1
/
3
1
Dolby D
DISC 1
T
I
TL
E
2
CHAP
TOTAL 1:01:58
3
DVD-VIDEO
3/2.1ch
TIME
O
F
F
CHAP.
1
/3/1
1
/
3
1
4 Enter the time.
A–B
You can specify the time in hours/minutes/seconds.
Examples:
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
5 Select the start point (A).
To move to a point of 1 (hours):
02 (minutes): 00 (seconds), press
1, 0, 2, 0, then 0.
Dolby D
3/2.1ch
T
I
TL
E
2
H
C
DISC 1
DVD-VIDEO
ENTER
7
9
TIME
A
-
CHAP.
1
/3
To move to a point of 54
(minutes): 00 (seconds), press 0,
5, 4, 0, then 0.
10
+10
• After selecting the starting point (A), you can search for
the end point using ¡.
6 Select the end point (B).
• It is always required to enter the hour digit (even “0”
hour), but it is not required to enter trailing zeros (the
last two digits in the examples above).
• To correct a misentry, press cursor 2 to erase the last
entry.
A-B Repeat starts. The selected
ENTER
portion plays repeatedly.
5 Finish the setting.
The System starts playing from the
specified time.
To cancel A-B Repeat, repeat steps 1 to 3, and select “OFF”
in step 4.
ENTER
To erase the on-screen bar
ON
To erase the on-screen bar
SCREEN
ON
SCREEN
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter/Track Search
You can search for the number of the item to play.
For DVD Video/DVD-VR: Chapter
For DVD Audio: Track
Remote
ONLY
Operations on the Control
Screen
INFO
For DVD-VR/MP3/WMA/JPEG: You can search for and
play the desired items through the control screen.
1 While playing, display the on-screen bar with the pull-
down menu.
CHAP.
TRACK
2 Select
or
.
Control screen for DVD-RW/RAM in DVD-VR
format
The control screen is superimposed on the TV screen when
you call up Original Program (PG) or Play List (PL).
To select playback type
3 Display the pop-up window.
Dolby D
3/2.1ch
T
I
TL
E
2
CHAP
TOTAL 1:01:58
3
DISC 1
DVD-VIDEO
TIME
OFF
CHAP.
CHAPTER
1/3/1
1
/
3
1
_
To select the Original
Program:
To select the Play List:
4 Enter the desired chapter/track number.
Examples:
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
MENU/PL
TOP MENU/PG
To select chapter/track 5, press 5.
To select chapter/track 15, press
1, then 5.
7
9
To select chapter/track 30, press
3, then 0.
10
+10
When Original Program is selected.
ORIGINAL PROGRAM
No Date
Ch
Time
Title
1 25/04/04 4ch 19:00
2 17/05/04 8ch 10:30
3 22/05/04 8ch 17:00
4 26/05/04 L-1 13:19
5 20/06/04 4ch 22:00
JVC DVD World 2004
• To correct a misentry, press the 10 keys until the
desired number is shown in the pop-up window.
Music Festival
children 001
5 Finish the setting.
6 25/06/04 L-1
8:23
children 002
The System starts playing the
searched chapter or track.
ENTER
1 2
3
4
5
6
When Play List is selected.
PLAY LIST
To erase the on-screen bar
No Date
Chap Length
Title
My JVC World
1 25/05/04 001 1:03:16
2 17/06/04 005 1:35:25
3 20/06/04 003 0:10:23
4 25/06/04 001 0:07:19
ON
Favorite music
children001-002
SCREEN
1 7
8
9
5
6
1 Title/Play list number
2 Recording date
3 Recording source (TV station, the input terminal of the
recording equipment, etc.)
4 Start time of recording
5 Title of the program/play list*
6 Highlight bar (current selection)
7 Creating date of play lists
8 Number of chapters
9 Playback time
*The title of the original program or play list may not be
displayed depending on the recording equipment.
To erase the control screen for DVD-VR, press ENTER.
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To move the highlight (green) bar between group list and
track list (for MP3/WMA/JPEG):
Control screen for MP3/WMA/JPEG disc
The control screen automatically appears on the TV screen
when you load an MP3, WMA, or JPEG disc.
Moves the bar to the track list.
Moves the bar to the group list.
Ex.: When the MP3 disc is loaded.
6
7
8
REPEAT TRACK Time : 00:00:14
1
Group : 2 / 3
Track : 5 / 14 (Total 41)
9
Blue
Red
Green
Cloudy.mp3
Fair.mp3
Fog.mp3
To select an item in the list:
2
Hail.mp3
Indian summer.mp3
Rain.mp3
Shower.mp3
Snow.mp3
Thunder.mp3
Typhoon.mp3
Wind.mp3
3
4
Move the highlight bar to a
desired item.
• If you move the highlight bar
while playing back DVD-VR/
MP3/WMA, the selected item
starts playback automatically.
Track Information
0
-
Title
Rain
Artist
5
Album
Winter sky.mp3
1 Current group number/total group number
2 Current group
3 Group list
4 Current track
5 Track information (ID3 Tag Version 1.0: only for
MP3/WMA)
To start playback
For DVD-VR/MP3/WMA:
Playback starts with the selected
chapter/track.
• Pressing DVD/CD 3 also starts
playback.
ENTER
6 Repeat Play setting
7 Elapsed playing time of the current track
(only for MP3/WMA)
8 Operation mode icon
9 Current track number/total number of tracks in the
current group (total number of tracks on the loaded
disc)
For JPEG:
The selected track (still picture) is
displayed until you change it.
ENTER
0 Highlight bar
- Track list
• If both types of files (MP3/WMA files and JPEG files)
are recorded on a disc, select the file type to play (see
page 39).
Slide-show playback starts.
DVD/CD
Each track (still picture) is shown on
the screen for a few seconds, then
changes one after another.
• Once you start playing back a JPEG track, the control
screen goes off.
• To cancel slide-show, and display the current still picture,
press 8.
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To stop playback
To zoom in the still picture (for JPEG)
1 During being paused...
ZOOM
ZOOM 1
ZOOM 2
ZOOM OFF
To repeat title/play list for DVD-VR
While playing or before starting playback...
As the number increases, magnification also increases.
For Original Program
2 Move the zoomed-in position.
REPEAT 1
CHAP)
REPEAT
PG)
REPEAT 1 DISC
DISC)
REPEAT
(
(
(
Canceled
REPEAT ALL DISC
(
OFF)
(
ALL)
For Play List
REPEAT 1
CHAP)
REPEAT
PL)
REPEAT
(
(
To cancel Zoom, press ZOOM repeatedly until “ZOOM
OFF” appears on the TV screen.
Canceled
REPEAT ALL DISC
(
OFF)
(
ALL)
REPEAT 1* Repeats the current chapter.
REPEAT* Repeats the current title/play list.
REPEAT 1 Repeats all titles on the current disc.
DISC*
REPEAT
Repeats all loaded discs.
ALL DISC
*Not available before starting playback.
To repeat slide-show for JPEG
While playing or before starting playback...
REPEAT
GROUP)
REPEAT 1 DISC
DISC)
REPEAT
(
(
(Canceled)
OFF)
REPEAT ALL DISC
ALL)
(
(
REPEAT
Repeats the current group.
REPEAT 1
DISC
Repeats all files on the current disc.
REPEAT ALL Repeats all loaded discs.
DISC
• For Repeat Play of MP3/WMA, see pages 24 and 27.
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording Operations
Before recording, select the Stereo Mode (“STEREO”—
see page 16) for DVD Video to downmix its
Main unit
multichannel sound into 2 channel; otherwise, you can
only record the front left/right sound onto a tape.
Recording on a Tape
INFO
Main Unit
ONLY
FM/AM
DVD/CD
You can use type I tapes for recording.
• To play a tape, see page 13.
TAPE-A /
TAPE-B
DISC 1–5 3
1 Insert a recordable cassette in deck B.
DISC REC
START
REVERSE
MODE
Push
Insert
Close
REC
START/STOP
DUBBING
Deck A
Deck B
2 Check the tape running direction and Reverse Mode
settings on the display.
Tape direction
indicator
Reverse Mode indicator
IMPORTANT
It may be unlawful to record or play back
copyrighted material without the consent of the
copyright owner.
Current source
To change the direction
3 (forward
2 (reverse
)
)
Change the Reverse Mode if necessary
To record on both sides.
• When using Reverse Mode, start
(
)
recording in the forward (3) direction.
To record on only one side.
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Start playing the source—“FM,” “AM,” “DVD/CD,”
“TAPE-A” or “AUX.”
Synchronized Disc Recording
INFO
Main Unit
ONLY
• When recording a disc, you can also use “Synchronized
Disc Recording” (see the right column).
• When recording from deck A, you can also use
“Dubbing” (see below).
You can start and stop both disc play and tape recording at
the same time.
1 Load a disc and insert a recordable cassette.
4 Start recording.
2 Check the tape running direction and Reverse Mode
settings on the display.
• See step 2 of “Recording on a Tape” on page 32.
3 Select the disc number you want to start recording
from.
To stop recording
or
For recording desired tracks on discs:
You can program tracks to record in your preferred order.
• Select Program Play (and make a program; see page 22)
without starting playback.
Dubbing Tapes
Main Unit
ONLY
4 Start recording.
1 Change the source to TAPE.
The disc playback and recording start
from the first track.
• The System automatically creates 4-
second blanks between the tunes
recorded on the tapes.
• When either disc play or recording ends, both disc player
and the cassette deck stop at the same time.
2 Insert the source cassette in deck A, and a recordable
cassette in deck B.
3 Check the tape running direction and Reverse Mode
settings on the display.
To record only your favorite track—One Track
Recording
You can specify tracks to be recorded on the tape while
listening to a disc (except for DVD Video).
While the track you want to record on the tape is
playing...
See step 2 of “Recording on a Tape” on page 32.
4 Start dubbing.
• When either tape playback or recording ends, both cassette
deck stop at the same time.
The disc player returns to the
beginning of that track and the track is
recorded on the tape. After recording,
the disc player and cassette deck
automatically stop.
To stop dubbing
To cancel while recording
or
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enjoying Karaoke
• For DVD Audio/DVD-VR: The functions described in
this section are not available.
Remote control
• When you activate the Mic Mixing Mode or Voice
Masking Mode, multi-channel sounds are downmixed into
2 channel. The multi-channel surround mode (“ALL CH.
ST,” “MOVIE,” “MUSIC,” or “AUTO” for multi-channel
surround signals—see page 16) is changed to “STEREO”
temporarily* (and restored when the Mic Mixing Mode or
Voice Masking Mode is deactivated).
KARAOKE
SCORING
AUDIO
TV
Source
buttons
*The indicator remains on the display.
AUDIO VOL +/–
IMPORTANT
• Always set MIC LEVEL to MIN when connecting or
disconnecting the microphone.
• MIC LEVEL adjustment is valid for both microphones
connected to the MIC 1 and MIC 2 jacks.
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
Singing Along (Karaoke)
You can enjoy singing along (Karaoke) by using two
microphones.
INFO
10 keys
7
9
10
+10
• By pressing REC START/STOP, you can record your
singing-along.
V.MASKING
ECHO
/
KEY
RESERVE
1 Turn MIC LEVEL to MIN.
MIC MIX
+ / –
SET
SETTING
CANCEL
Main unit
2 Connect the microphone(s) (not supplied) to the
MIC 1 and/or MIC 2 jack.
3 Activate the Mic Mixing Mode.
MIC MIX
MIC MIX
MIC OFF
Source
buttons
VOLUME +/–
4 Start playing a source—“FM,” “AM,” DVD/CD,”
“TAPE,” or “AUX.”
KARAOKE
SCORING
• For Karaoke SVCD/VCD: Select a desired audio
channel. See “Selecting the Sound Track” on page 19.
5 Sing into the microphone.
6 Adjust the MIC LEVEL and VOLUME.
MIC 1
MIC 2
MIC LEVEL
To cancel from the Mic Mixing Mode, select “MIC OFF”
in step 3.
To use microphone only, select “DVD/CD” in step 4, but
do not start playback.
DO NOT keep the microphones
connected while they are not in use.
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
To apply an echo to your voice
While the Mic Mix Mode is activated...
Scoring Your Karaoke Skill
INFO
This System can score your Karaoke skill by comparing your
singing along with the vocal on the playback disc.
• This function is for disc playback only.
• It is recommended to select the sound track as follows (see
page 19):
ECHO
ECHO 1
ECHO 0
(Canceled)
ECHO 2
ECHO 3
ECHO 4
For DVD Video: Select the sound track with vocal.
For SVCD/VCD: Select “ST,” “ST1,” or “ST2.”
• It is recommended to sing for more than one and a half
minutes to make the scoring function work properly.
• As the number increases, echo level also increases.
Remote
ONLY
To adjust the Key (disc playback only)
While playing back...
KEY
KEY
#
1 Select “DVD/CD” as the source.
To raise the key (up to +6).
DVD/CD
To lower the key (up to –6).
To cancel the Key Control
2 Activate the scoring function.
KEY
KEY
#
KARAOKE
SCORING
KARAOKE SCORE BOARD
–6
0
+6
SINGING
On the TV screen
KEYCON
Playback of the first track starts and the Mic Mixing
Mode is automatically activated (with the last adjustment
for echo).
0
On the display
On the TV screen
3 Sing into the microphone.
See steps 1, 2, and 6 on page 34.
• Adjust echo level and key if you want (see the left
column).
• Key Control is also canceled when you deactivate the Mic
Mixing Mode, or select another track or disc.
Remote
ONLY
Reducing the Lead Vocal
INFO
After the song ends, playback stops and the score board
appears on the TV screen with fanfare.
—Vocal Masking
Ex.:
Your score
If you want to reduce the lead vocal (of any source except
DVD Audio/DVD-VR), you can use the Vocal Masking
Mode.
KARAOKE SCORE BOARD
85
POINTS
Very good!!
V. MASKING
V.MASK1
OFF
V.MASK2
1
2
3
ST
93
85
73
POINTS
POINTS
POINTS
ND
RD
V.MASK1
V.MASK2
Cancels vocal on stereo sources.
Cancels the right audio channel.
The latest top 3
To stop the playback in the middle of the song, press 7.
The scoring function is not canceled and your singing along
is scored if the playback time is more than one minute.
To sing into microphone(s), activate the Mic Mixing Mode
(follow steps 1 to 3 and 6 on page 34).
To cancel from the Vocal Masking Mode, select “OFF.”
To cancel the scoring function, press KARAOKE
SCORING. The screen on the TV disappears. (The Mic
Mixing Mode remains activated.)
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
4 Activate the Mic Mixing Mode.
To turn on/off the fanfare
MIC MIX
1 Enter the fanfare setting mode
.
MIC MIX
MIC OFF
SET
SETTING
5 Start playback.
To start Karaoke
Program Play:
To start Karaoke
Program Play with the
scoring function:
2 Select the fanfare setting.
ON
DVD/CD
KARAOKE
SCORING
OFF
Playback starts in the order you have programmed.
• For the Karaoke Program Play with the scoring
function: Each time the song ends, playback stops and
the score board appears. Press KARAOKE SCORING
twice to start playback of the next track.
Remote
ONLY
Reserving Karaoke Songs
—Karaoke Program Play
INFO
You can determine the playback order of the titles or tracks
on the disc player. You can program up to 12 steps.
1 Change the source to “DVD/CD.”
To check the programmed contents
RESERVE
DVD/CD
The Karaoke reserve screen appears.
• You cannot display the Karaoke reserve screen while the
scoring function is in use.
2 Activate Karaoke Program Play.
RESERVE
No Disc Gr/Tt Tr/Chap
1
2
3
4
5
To modify the program
While the Karaoke reserve screen is shown on the TV...
To erase the unwanted step:
On the TV screen
• PROGRAM indicator flashes during this mode.
CANCEL
3 Select songs you want for Karaoke Program Play.
Press the number buttons to select a song in the following
order.
1 Select a disc.
2 Select a title/group.
3 Select a chapter/track.
To erase the entire program, repeat the procedure.
To add steps in the program:
Repeat step 3.
Examples:
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
To select number 5, press 5.
To select number 15, press
+10, then 5.
To select number 30, press
+10, +10, then 10.
7
9
10
+10
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Timer Operations
Remote
ONLY
Setting the Timer
INFO
Remote control
Using Daily Timer, you can wake up with your favorite
song. On the other hand, with Recording Timer, you can
make a tape of a radio broadcast automatically.
• You cannot activate Daily Timer and Recording Timer at a
time. (Activating either timer deactivates the other timer.)
• To correct a misentry during the process, press CANCEL.
You can return to the previous step.
AUDIO
AUDIO
TV
1 Select one of the timer setting modes—ON for Daily
Timer or Recording Timer.
Recording Timer
Daily Timer
CLOCK/
TIMER
ON
REC TIMER
DAILYTIMER
Canceled
Clock setting
ON
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
7
9
10
+10
2 Make the timer setting as you want.
SET
CANCEL
SET
CLOCK/
TIMER
Repeat the procedure until you finish setting in the
following order:
1
2
3
Set the hour then minute for on-time.
Set the hour then minute for off-time.
For Recording Timer: Select the playback
source—“TUNER-FM” or “TUNER-AM.”
For Daily Timer: Select the playback source—
“TUNER-FM,” “TUNER-AM,” “DISC,”
“TAPE-A,” “TAPE-B” or “AUX IN.”
EX.: When “TUNER-FM” is selected.
4
5
Select a preset station for “TUNER-FM” and
“TUNER-AM,” or select a disc, group, and then
track number for “DISC.”
Select the volume level.
• You can select the volume level (“VOLUME 0” –
“VOLUME 30” and “VOLUME --”). If you select
“VOLUME --,” the volume is set to the last level
when the System has been turned off.
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To turn off the Timer after the setting is done
You can turn off the timer after it has been set.
3 Turn off the System (on standby) if you have set the
timer with the System turned on.
• Since Daily Timer is activated at the same time everyday,
you may need to cancel it on some particular days.
AUDIO
1 Select the timer you want to cancel (REC TIMER or
DAILYTIMER) you want to cancel.
Recording Timer
Daily Timer
CLOCK/
TIMER
How Daily Timer actually works
ON
REC TIMER
DAILYTIMER
Once the Daily Timer has been set, the timer (
)
Canceled
ON
Clock setting
indicator and DAILY indicator are lit on the display.
Daily Timer is activated at the same time everyday until
the timer is turned off manually (see the next column).
• Daily Timer starts working only when the System is
turned off (on standby).
2 Turn off the selected timer.
CANCEL
When the on-time comes
The System turns on, tunes in to the specified station or
starts playing the specified source, and sets the volume
level to the preset level.
• The timer (
) indicator goes off.
When the off-time comes
To turn on the timer again, repeat the step 1 and press SET
in step 2.
The System stops playback, and turns off (standby).
• The timer setting remains in memory until you change
it.
Timer Priority
If the settings for Sleep Timer and Recording Timer/Daily
Timer overlap, the timers work as described below.
• Sleep Timer (see page 18) has priority over the Recording
Timer and Daily Timer.
How Recording Timer actually works
When Recording Timer has been set, Timer (
)
indicator and the REC indicator are lit on the display.
Recording Timer works only once.
• Recording Timer starts working only when the System
is turned off (on standby).
Canceled
6:00
6:30
7:00
7:30
When the on-time comes
The System turns on, tunes in to the specified station, sets
the volume level to the preset level, and starts recording.
Recording Timer/
Daily Timer
When the off-time comes
Sleep Timer
The System stops recording, and turns off (standby).
• The timer setting remains in memory until you change
it.
The System turns off.
• In this case, Recording Timer/Daily Timer does not work.
Recording/Playback
Canceled
6:00
6:30
7:00
7:30
Recording Timer/
Daily Timer
Sleep Timer
The System turns off.
• In this case, Recording Timer/Daily Timer is canceled. (If
Sleep Timer shuts off the System earlier than the off time
you have set for Recording Timer, recording stops when
Sleep Timer shuts off the System.)
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup Menu Operations
Initial settings
INFO
Remote Control
Some items in the menus cannot be changed during
playback.
1 Press SET UP.
AUDIO
TV
LANGUAGE
MENU LANGUAGE
AUDIO LANGUAGE
SUBTITLE
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE
2 Press 2 (or 3) to select the menu.
3 Press 5 (or ∞) to move to select the item.
4 Press ENTER.
/ / / /
ENTER
SET UP
5 Press 5 (or ∞) to select the options, then press
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
ENTER.
7
9
To erase a preference display
10
+10
Press SET UP.
LANGUAGE menu
Item
Contents
MENU LANGUAGE
You can select the initial menu language of DVD Video (see page 46).
You can select the initial audio language of DVD Video (see page 46).
You can select the initial subtitle language of DVD Video (see page 46).
You can select “ENGLISH,” “CHINESE,” or “SPANISH” as the on-screen language.
AUDIO LANGUAGE
SUBTITLE
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE
PICTURE menu
Item
Contents
MONITOR TYPE
You can select the monitor type to match your TV when you play back DVD Video discs recorded for
wide-screen televisions.
16:9/16:9 MULTI (Wide television screen): For a wide-screen (16:9) TV.
4:3 LB/4:3 MULTI LB (Letter box conversion): For a conventional (4:3) TV. Displays a wide-
screen picture to fit the width of the TV screen keeping the aspect ratio.
16:9
4:3 LB
4:3 PS/4:3 MULTI PS (Pan Scan conversion): For a conventional (4:3) TV. The picture is zoomed
up for filling the screen vertically and the left and right sides of the picture are cut off.
• By selecting “MULTI” mode, the color system of the System changes automatically to match the
color system of the loaded disc. For the color system setting, see page 17.
4:3 PS
PICTURE SOURCE
You can obtain optimal picture quality by selecting the source type of the disc contents.
AUTO: Normally, select this option. The System recognizes the picture type (film or video source) of
the current disc according to the disc information.
FILM: For a film source disc.
VIDEO: For a video source disc.
SCREEN SAVER
FILE TYPE
You can set the screen saver function to ON or OFF.
ON: The on-screen display becomes dark when no operation is done for about 5 minutes.
OFF: To cancel the screen saver.
You can select a file type to play.
AUDIO: To play MP3/WMA files.
STILL PICTURE: To play JPEG files.
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUDIO menu
Item
Contents
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT
Set this item correctly when using the OPTICAL DIGITAL OUTPUT terminal on the rear.
PCM ONLY: When connecting to audio equipment which can decode only linear PCM signals.
DOLBY DIGITAL/PCM: When connecting to a Dolby Digital decoder or an amplifier with a built-
in Dolby Digital decoder.
STREAM/PCM: When connecting to a DTS decoder or an amplifier with a built-in DTS decoder.
D.RANGE COMPRESSION
Set this item to listen to DVD Video recorded in Dolby Digital format at low or middle volume.
AUTO: You can enjoy powerful playback sound.
ON: Select this if the sound level of DVD Video is lower than the one of TV program to make the
sound at a lower volume clear.
SPK. SETTING menu
Item
Contents
LEVEL
Select this item, then press ENTER to show the LEVEL submenu for adjusting the speaker output
level.
LEVEL
FRONT LEFT SPEAKER
FRONT LEFT/RIGHT SPEAKER, CENTER SPEAKER, SURROUND LEFT/RIGHT
SPEAKER: Select the speaker, then adjust the output level (–6 dB to +6 dB in 1 dB steps).
TEST TONE: Turns on/off the test tone.
0dB
0dB
FRONT RIGHT SPEAKER
CENTER SPEAKER
0dB
0dB
SURROUND RIGHT SPEAKER
SURROUND LEFT SPEAKER
TEST TONE
0dB
OFF
• Select “ALL CH. ST,” “MUSIC,” or “MOVIE” (see page 16) to adjust the output level for all
speakers with the test tone.
DELAY
Select this item, then press ENTER to show the DELAY submenu for adjusting the speaker delay time.
FRONT LEFT/RIGHT SPEAKER, CENTER SPEAKER, SURROUND LEFT/RIGHT
SPEAKER: Select the speaker, then adjust the delay time (0 ms to 15 ms in 1 ms steps).
• Set one speaker to “0 ms,” then set other speakers so that the sound from all speakers can reach you
at the same time.
DELAY
FRONT LEFT SPEAKER
FRONT RIGHT SPEAKER
CENTER SPEAKER
0
0
ms
ms
0
0
ms
ms
SURROUND RIGHT SPEAKER
SURROUND LEFT SPEAKER
0
ms
OTHERS menu
Item
Contents
RESUME
You can select Resume.
ON: The System resumes playback from the position where playback has been stopped if the disc is
still in the disc tray.
OFF: Resume is deactivated.
ON SCREEN GUIDE
Activate or deactivate the on-screen guide.
ON: Activate the on-screen guide.
OFF: Deactivate the on-screen guide.
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating the TV
Operating TV
Remote control
You can operate the JVC’s or other manufacturers’ TV using
this remote control.
1 Slide the AUDIO/TV selector to “TV.”
TV
AUDIO
TV/VIDEO
AUDIO
TV
TV
TV VOL +/–
CHANNEL +/–
2 Press and hold until the following steps are complete.
TV
ENTER
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
3
10 keys
7
9
ENTER
10
+10
4 Enter the 2-digit manufacture’s code number.
1
2
5
8
0
3
4
6
7
9
10
+10
Manufacture’s code
Manufacture Code number
5 Release
TV.
JVC
01
To operate the TV
To turn on or To select the input To adjust TV
Hitachi
Magnavox
Mitsubishi
Panasonic
Philips
RCA
10
02
off the TV:
mode (either TV or volume:
VIDEO):
03
04,11
15
TV VOL
TV/VIDEO
TV
05
Samsung
Sanyo
12
13, 14
06
To select the TV channel:
Sharp
Sony
07
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
CHANNEL
Toshiba
Zenith
08
or
09
7
9
10
+10
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Information
Daily Operations—Sound&Other Adjustments
(see pages 14 to 18)
Learning More about This System
Introduction (see pages 1 to 2)
Reinforcing the Bass Sound:
Playable Disc Types:
• About audio format
• The adjustment for the subwoofer level does not affect the
sound through the headphones.
–
Linear PCM: Uncompressed digital audio, the same
format used for CDs and most studio masters.
Dolby Digital: Compressed digital audio, developed by
Dolby Laboratories, which enables multi-channel
encode to create the realistic surround sound.
DTS (Digital Theater Systems): Compressed digital
audio, developed by Digital Theater Systems, Inc., which
enables multi-channel like Dolby Digital. As the
compression ratio is lower than for Dolby Digital, it
provides wider dynamic range and better separation.
Creating Your Own Sound Modes—User Mode:
• When you unplug the AC power cord or if a power failure
occurs, the User Mode settings will be erased in a few days.
If this happens, set the User Modes again.
Selecting the Surround Modes:
• Dolby Pro Logic II Modes: Dolby Pro Logic II Mode is
multichannel playback format to decode 2-channel sources
into 5.1-channel. Dolby Pro Logic II enables to reproduce
spacious sound from original sound without adding any
new sounds and tonal colorations.
• While you use the headphones, the Surround Mode is
canceled temporarily (“STEREO” appears) and you cannot
use SURROUND MODE and EFFECT.
• Some DVD Audios prohibit downmix. While playing back
such a disc...
– You cannot change the Surround Mode. (“MULTI CH”
appears on the display.)
– The System plays back the left front and right front
signals when you have selected “STEREO” for the
Surround Mode or when you use the headphones. (“LR
ONLY” appears on the display.)
Changing the Color System and Scanning Mode:
• If you play back an NTSC disc with the color system set to
“PAL (PROG),” the disc will be reproduced using “PAL
60” format, however, if the TV does not support this
format, the screen may rolls over upward and downward
rapidly.
• If you play back a PAL disc with the color system set to
“NTSC (PROG),” you can watch the playback pictures, but
the following symptoms may occur:
– The items on the disc menu will be blurred, and be shown
slightly shifted when highlighted.
– The aspect ratio of the picture may differ from the
original aspect ratio.
– The picture movement is not smooth.
• You cannot change the scanning mode to progressive in the
following cases:
– When your TV does not support the progressive video
input.
– When you have not connected your TV to the unit using
a component video cord.
• When you play back an NTSC disc in progressive scanning
mode, the System outputs the NTSC signal regardless of
the color system settings.
–
–
• If you use a DVD-RAM with a cartridge, take the disc out
of the cartridge before inserting.
Daily Operations—Playback (see pages 9 to 13)
Listening to the Radio:
• If you store a new station into an occupied preset number,
the previously stored station in that number will be erased.
• When you unplug the AC power cord or if a power failure
occurs, the preset stations will be erased in a few days. If
this happens, preset the stations again.
Playing Back a Disc:
• On some DVD, SVCD, or VCD discs, the actual operations
may be different from what is explained in this manual, due
to the programming and disc structure; such differences are
not a malfunction of this System.
• When playing back a DVD Audio disc recorded in MLP
(Meridian Lossless Packing; a lossless audio compression
system that can completely recreate the PCM signal), the
signals are recognized as the linear PCM signals, however,
no indicator lights up on the display.
• For MP3/WMA playback...
– MP3/WMA discs require a longer readout time than
regular CDs. (It depends on the complexity of the group/
file configuration.)
– Some MP3/WMA files cannot be played back and will
be skipped. This results from their recording processes
and conditions.
– When making MP3/WMA discs, use ISO 9660 Level 1
or Level 2 for the disc format.
– This System can play back MP3/WMA files with the
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of the
letter case—upper/lower).
– It is recommended that you make each MP3/WMA file at
a sampling rate of 44.1 kHz and at bit rate of 128 kbps.
This System cannot play back files made at bit rate of less
than 64 kbps.
Setting the Clock:
• “0:00” will flash on the display until you set the clock.
• The clock may gain or lose 1 to 2 minutes per month. If this
happens, reset the clock.
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
– This System can play only baseline JPEG files*.
Progressive JPEG files* or lossless JPEG files* cannot
be played.
* Baseline JPEG format: Used for digital cameras,
web, etc.
Unique DVD/VCD Operations (see pages 19 to 21)
Selecting the Sound Track:
• On some DVD Videos, you cannot change audio languages
while playing back.
Playing Back Bonus Group:
• You cannot select a track in the bonus group for Program
Play.
Special Picture Playback:
• During slow-motion playback, no sound will be
reproduced.
• You cannot use frame-by-frame playback for DVD-VR.
• While zoomed in, the picture may look coarse.
Progressive JPEG format:Used for web.
Lossless JPEG format: An old type and rarely used
now.
• This System can play back JPEG files with the extension
code <.jpg> or <.jpeg> (regardless of the letter case—
upper/lower).
• This System may not play back JPEG files properly if they
are recorded on the devices other than digital still camera.
• During slide-show playback, zoom cannot be operated.
Advanced Disc Operations (see pages 22 to 24)
Programming the Playing Order—Program Play:
– While programming steps...
Recording Operations (see pages 32 to 33)
General:
Your entry will be ignored if you have tried to program
an item number that does not exist on the disc (for
example, selecting track 14 on a disc that only has 12
tracks).
– For SVCD/VCD/CD loaded on the other tray than the
current one, the System may prompt for the group
number entry as well, however, these entries will be
ignored during playback.
• You cannot use Program Play and Random Play for DVD-
VR/JPEG discs.
• The programmed contents will remain until you erase it.
• While the PROGRAM indicator is on, you cannot change
the disc to play. (DISC 1 – 5 on the remote control and 3
on the main unit do not work.)
• You cannot change the source during recording.
• There is leader tape which cannot be recorded onto at the
start and the end of cassette tapes. Thus, when recording
discs or radio broadcasts, wind the leader tape first to
ensure that the recording will be made without any music
part lost.
• If no cassette is inserted or a protected tape has been
inserted, “NO REC” appears on the display.
• The recording level is automatically set correctly. Thus,
you can make sound adjustment other than the Surround
Mode without affecting the recording level.
Recording on a Tape:
• When using Reverse Mode for recording, start recording in
the forward (3) direction first; otherwise, recording will
stop when only one side (reverse) of the tape is recorded.
Synchronized Disc Recording:
• Recording starts from the first track even if you have
selected a track by using ¢/4. To specify track(s) to
record, program them (or use One Track Recording).
• While recording, you cannot use disc operation buttons
(except for 7) and sound setting buttons (except for
volume control).
On-Screen Disc Operations (see pages 25 to 31)
Operations Using the On-screen Bar:
• A-B Repeat:
– A-B Repeat cannot be used on some DVDs.
– A-B Repeat is possible only within the same title or
within the same track.
Operations on the Control Screen:
• For DVD-VR playback...
–
Original Program: The System can play back the
original picture in the recorded order.
Play List: The System can play back the play list edited
by the recording equipment. The control screen for the
play list appears only when the disc has the play list.
• Everything on the disc goes onto the tape in the order on
the disc, or according to the order you have made for
Program Play.
• You cannot use Repeat Play while synchronized recording
(Repeat Play will be canceled).
–
– Resume is not available.
• DISC REC START button does not work:
– While playback is paused.
– When Random Play is activated.
– While playing back or being paused with Program Play.
• When the tape reaches its end in the forward direction (3)
during recording, the last song will be re-recorded at the
beginning of the reverse side (2).
• When the tape reaches its end in the reverse side (2)
during recording, recording stops even though the disc is
not entirely recorded.
– For details about DVD-VR format and play list, refer to
the manual of the recording equipment.
• For JPEG files playback...
– It is recommended that you record a file at 640 x 480
resolution. (If a file has been recorded at a resolution of
more than 640 x 480, it will take a long time to be
shown.)
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enjoying Karaoke (see pages 34 to 36)
General:
Timer Operations (see pages 37 to 38)
Setting the Timer:
• When the Mic Mixing or Vocal Masking Mode is
activated:
– Multichannel source will be downmixed into 2 channel
temporarily.
• If you do not specify the preset station or track number
correctly while setting a timer, the currently selected
station or the first track will be played when timer is
activated.
– Dolby Pro Logic II Mode will be canceled temporarily.
Reducing the Lead Vocal—Vocal Masking:
• The Vocal Masking Mode setting is not applied to the
optical digital output signals through the OPTICAL
DIGITAL OUTPUT terminal.
• When playing a Karaoke disc in the Vocal Masking Mode,
the vocal may not be reduced or the volume may be lower.
• On some music, the Vocal Masking Mode does not provide
the correct effect.
• When you unplug the AC power cord or if a power failure
occurs, the timer will be canceled. You need to set the
clock first, then the timer again.
• Without stopping the recording, you cannot change the
source after Recording Timer starts recording.
• If you set DVD Video as the source, Daily Timer will not
work correctly.
Setup Menu Operations (see pages 39 to 40)
General:
Scoring Your Karaoke Skill:
• If the upper and lower parts of the menu are cut off, adjust
the picture size control of the TV.
LANGUAGE menu:
• When the language you have selected for MENU
LANGUAGE, AUDIO LANGUAGE, or SUBTITLE is
not recorded on a disc, the original language is used as the
initial language.
PICTURE menu—MONITOR TYPE:
• Even if “4:3 PS (MULTI)” is selected, the screen size may
become 4:3 letter box with some DVD Videos. This
depends on how the discs are recorded.
• When you select “16:9 (MULTI)” for a picture whose
aspect ratio is 4:3, the picture slightly changes due to the
process for converting the picture width.
SPK. SETTING menu—DELAY:
• See the following diagram as an example for setting the
delay time:
• Before the scoring function is activated, you can select the
track by pressing ¢/4 (except for DVD Video and
SVCD/VCD with PBC).
• If you press ¢/4 while scoring, playback stops and
scoring is canceled (but the track is not skipped).
• If you activate the scoring function while playback is
stopped with Resume function, playback starts from the
position you have stopped.
• You can also activate the scoring function while playing
back. In this case, the scoring starts from that point.
• While the scoring function is in use, you cannot use the
following buttons: V.MASKING, MIC MIX, RESERVE,
and disc operation buttons (except for ¢/4/7).
• Activating the scoring function cancels Repeat Play.
• You cannot use the scoring function during Program Play,
Random Play, or recording.
• The ranking (top 3) is cleared when you turn off the
System. (If the number of songs scored is less than 3, “0
POINT” appears.)
Reserving Karaoke Songs—Karaoke Program Play:
• If you have selected a disc tray on which DVD Audio or
DVD-VR is loaded, that disc number is skipped.
• If DVD Audio or DVD-VR is loaded on the current tray,
you cannot use Karaoke Program Play.
Front speakers:
0 ms
Center speaker:
1 ms
Surround speakers:
2 ms
• When the track starts playback, that track number will be
erased from the Karaoke reserve screen (the programmed
contents will remain until you erase it).
• While the PROGRAM indicator is flashing, you cannot
change the disc to play. (DISC 1 – 5 on the remote control
and 3 on the main unit do not work.)
OTHERS menu—ON SCREEN GUIDE:
• The setup menu and on-screen bar will be displayed (and
recorded) even though this function is set to “OFF.”
Subtitles and the information for zoom-in always appear on
the display regardless of this setting.
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning the System
Maintenance
To get the best performance of the System, keep your discs,
tapes, and mechanism clean.
• Stains should be wiped off with a soft cloth. If the System
is heavily stained, wipe it with a cloth soaked in water-
diluted neutral detergent and wrung well, then wipe clean
with a dry cloth.
• Since the System may deteriorate in quality, become
damaged or get its paint peeled off, be careful about the
following:
– DO NOT wipe it with a hard cloth.
– DO NOT wipe it strong.
– DO NOT wipe it with thinner or benzine.
– DO NOT apply any volatile substance such as
insecticides to it.
– DO NOT allow any rubber or plastic to remain in contact
for a long time.
Handling discs
• Remove the disc from its case by holding it at the edge
while pressing the center hole lightly.
• Do not touch the shiny surface of the disc, or bend the disc.
• Put the disc back in its case after use to prevent warping.
• Be careful not to scratch the surface of the disc when
placing it back in its case.
• Avoid exposure to direct sunlight, temperature extremes,
and moisture.
To clean the disc:
Wipe the disc with a soft cloth in a straight line from center
to edge.
Troubleshooting
Handling cassette tapes
If you are having a problem with your System, check this list
for a possible solution before calling for service.
• If the tape is loose in its cassette, take up the slack by
inserting a pencil in one of the reels and rotate it.
– If the tape is loose, it may get stretched, cut, or caught in
the cassette.
• Be careful not to touch the tape surface.
• Avoid the following places to store the tape—in dusty
places, in direct sunlight or heat, in moist areas, on a TV or
speaker, or near a magnet.
To keep the best recording and playback sound quality
• Use a cotton swab moistened with alcohol to clean the
heads, capstans, and pinch rollers.
• Use a head demagnetizer (available at electronics and
audio shops) to demagnetize the heads (when the System
turned off).
General:
Adjustments or settings are suddenly canceled before
you finish.
] There is a time limit. Repeat procedure again.
Operations are disabled.
] The built-in microprocessor may malfunction due to
external electrical interference. Unplug the AC power
cord and then plug it back in.
Unable to operate the System from the remote control.
] The path between the remote control and the remote
sensor on the System is blocked.
] The batteries are exhausted.
No sound is heard.
To protect your recording
Cassettes have two small tabs on the back
to protect from unexpected erasure or re-
recording.
To protect your recording, remove these
tabs.
] Speaker connections are incorrect or loose.
] Headphones are connected.
No picture appears on the screen.
] The video cord connections are incorrect or loose.
No picture is displayed on the TV screen, the picture is
blurred, or the picture is divided into two parts.
] The System is connected to a TV which does not support
progressive video input.
To re-record on a protected tape, cover
the holes with adhesive tape.
] Incorrect color system is selected (see page 17).
The left and right edges of the picture are missing on the
screen.
] Select “4:3 LB (MULTI)” for “MONITOR TYPE” (see
page 39).
Radio Operations:
Hard to listen to broadcasts because of noise.
] Antennas connections are incorrect or loose.
] The AM loop antenna is too close to the System.
] The FM antenna is not properly extended and positioned.
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The disc tray does not open or close.
] The AC power cord is not plugged in.
] Child Lock is in use. “LOCKED” appears in the display
window (see page 24).
] The Program Play is in use. Cancel the Program Play
(see page 23).
Disc Operations:
The disc does not play.
] You have inserted a disc whose Region Code is not “2.”
(“REGION ERR” appears on the display.)
] The disc is placed upside down. Place the disc with the
label side up.
ID3 Tag on an MP3 disc cannot be shown.
Tape Operations:
The cassette holder cannot be opened.
]
There are two types of ID3 Tag—Version 1 and Version 2.
This System can only show ID3 Tag Version 1.
] Power supply from the AC power cord has been cut off
MP3 groups and tracks are not played back as you
expect.
while the tape was running. Turn on the System.
Recording Operations:
Impossible to record.
] The playing order is determined when the disc was
recorded. It depends on the writing application.
] Small tabs on the back of the cassette are removed.
MP3/WMA or JPEG files are not played back.
] The inserted disc may include both type of tracks (MP3/
WMA files and JPEG files). In this case, you can only
play back the files selected by the “FILE TYPE” setting
(see page 39).
Cover the holes with adhesive tape.
] The Karaoke scoring function is in use. Cancel the
scoring function (see page 35).
Karaoke Operations:
Cannot activate the scoring function.
] DVD Audio or DVD-VR is playing.
] You cannot use the scoring function while recording, or
while the disc menu for DVD Video/SVCD/VCD is
shown on the TV screen.
Scoring result seems wrong (or “– –” appears).
] The playback time with the scoring function is too short.
It is recommended to sing for more than one and a half
minutes. (If playback time is less than one minute, the
scoring is canceled.)
] No input from the microphone or the input level (MIC
LEVEL) is too low.
] You have sung in too low voice.
] You have changed the “FILE TYPE” setting after you
inserted a disc. In this case, reload the disc.
The disc sound is discontinuous.
] The disc is scratched or dirty.
The disc playback sounds strange.
] Cancel Key Control (see page 35).
No subtitle appears on the display though you have
selected the initial subtitle language.
] Some DVDs are programmed to always display no
subtitle initially. If this happens, press SUB TITLE after
starting play (see page 20).
Audio language is different from the one you have
selected as the initial audio language.
] Some DVDs are programmed to always use the original
language initially. If this happens, press AUDIO after
starting play (see page 19).
Timer Operations:
Daily Timer or Recording Timer does not work.
] The System has been turned on when the on-time comes.
Timer starts working only when the System is turned off.
Language Code List
AA
AB
AF
Afar
FA
FI
Persian
Finnish
Fiji
KM
KN
KO
KS
Cambodian
Kannada
Korean (KOR)
Kashmiri
Kurdish
OM (Afan) Oromo
SU Sundanese
SV Swedish
SW Swahili
TA Tamil
TE Telugu
TG Tajik
Abkhazian
Afrikaans
OR
PA
PL
PS
Oriya
FJ
Panjabi
Polish
AM Ameharic
FO
FY
Faroese
Frisian
AR
AS
AY
AZ
BA
BE
BG
BH
BI
BN
BO
BR
CA
Arabic
Assamese
Aymara
Azerbaijani
Bashkir
KU
KY
LA
LN
LO
LT
Pashto, Pushto
Portuguese
Quechua
GA Irish
Kirghiz
PT
QU
GD Scots Gaelic
Latin
Lingala
Laothian
Lithuanian
Latvian, Lettish
Malagasy
Maori
Macedonian
Malayalam
Mongolian
Moldavian
Marathi
Malay (MAY)
Maltese
Burmese
Nauru
Nepali
Dutch
Norwegian
Occitan
TH Thai
GL
Galician
RM Rhaeto-Romance
TI
Tigrinya
GN Guarani
GU Gujarati
HA Hausa
RN
RO
RU
Kirundi
Rumanian
Russian
TK Turkmen
TL Tagalog
TN Setswana
TO Tonga
TR Turkish
TS Tsonga
TT Tatar
Byelorussian
Bulgarian
Bihari
LV
MG
MI
HI
Hindi
RW Kinyarwanda
Bislama
HR Croatian
HU Hungarian
HY Armenian
SA
SD
SG
SH
SI
Sanskrit
Sindhi
Bengali, Bangla
Tibetan
MK
ML
MN
MO
MR
MS
MT
MY
NA
NE
NL
NO
OC
Sangho
Breton
Catalan
IA
IE
IK
IN
IS
IW
JI
Interlingua
Interlingue
Inupiak
Serbo-Croatian
Singhalese
Slovak
TW Twi
UK Ukrainian
UR Urdu
CO Corsican
SK
SL
SM
SN
SO
SQ
SR
SS
CS
CY
DA
DZ
EL
EO
ET
EU
Czech
Indonesian
Icelandic
Hebrew
Slovenian
Samoan
Shona
UZ Uzbek
Welsh
VI
Vietnamese
Danish
Bhutani
Greek
VO Volapuk
WO Wolof
XH Xhosa
YO Yoruba
ZU Zulu
Yiddish
Somali
JW Javanese
KA Georgian
KK Kazakh
Albanian
Serbian
Esperanto
Estonian
Basque
Siswati
Sesotho
KL
Greenlandic
ST
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
CA-DXT9
Amplifier section
Output Power:
FRONT SPEAKERS: 150 W per channel, min. RMS, driven into
4 Ω at 1 kHz with no more than 10% total harmonic
distortion.
Disc player section
Playable disc: DVD Video/DVD Audio/CD/VCD/SVCD
CD-R/CD-RW (recorded in Audio CD/Video CD/
Super Video CD formats and MP3/WMA/JPEG
files)
CENTER SPEAKER: 140 W per channel, min. RMS, driven into
6 Ω at 1 kHz with no more than 10% total harmonic
distortion.
DVD-R (recorded in DVD Video format)
DVD-RW (recorded in DVD Video format or DVD-
VR format)
SURROUND SPEAKERS: 140 W per channel, min. RMS, driven
into 6 Ω at 1 kHz with no more than 10% total
harmonic distortion.
SUBWOOFERS: 150 W per channel, min. RMS, driven into 4 Ω at
1 kHz with no more than 10% total harmonic
distortion.
Digital output:
OPTICAL DIGITAL OUTPUT:
–21 dBm to –15 dBm (660 nm 30 nm)
Audio input sensitivity/Impedance
DVD-RAM (recorded in DVD-VR format)
Dynamic range:
80 dB
Horizontal resolution:
Wow and flutter:
500 lines
Immeasurable
Cassette deck section
Frequency response
Normal (type I):
Wow and flutter:
50 Hz – 14 000 Hz
0.15% (WRMS)
(Measured at 1 kHz, with tape recording signal 300 mV)
AUX:
MIC 1/2:
300 mV/47 kΩ
General
Power requirement:
3.0 mV/50 kΩ
AC 110 V / AC 127 V / AC 220 V / AC
VIDEO OUT:
Color system:
230 V – AC 240 V
, (adjustable with
NTSC/PAL selectable
the voltage selector), 50 Hz / 60 Hz
335 W (at operation)
29 W (on standby)
Dimensions (W/H/D) (approx.): 185 mm x 460 mm x 361 mm
Mass (approx.): 11.4 kg
Power consumption:
VIDEO (composite):
S-VIDEO:
C (chrominance, burst)
COMPONENT (Interlace/Progressive):
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
0.286 V(p-p)/75 Ω
Y (luminance)
(Y)
(PB/PR)
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
0.7 V(p-p)/75 Ω
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.
Speaker Terminals: 4 Ω − 16 Ω (front speakers/subwoofers)
6 Ω − 16 Ω (surround/center speakers)
Tuner section
FM tuning range:
87.50 MHz – 108.00 MHz
AM (MW) tuning range:
531 kHz – 1 602 kHz (at 9 kHz)
530 kHz – 1 600 kHz (at 10 kHz)
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CA-DXT7
Amplifier section
Output Power:
Cassette deck section
Frequency response
FRONT SPEAKERS: 150 W per channel, min. RMS, driven into
4 Ω at 1 kHz with no more than 10% total harmonic
distortion.
Normal (type I):
Wow and flutter:
50 Hz – 14 000 Hz
0.15% (WRMS)
CENTER SPEAKER: 50 W per channel, min. RMS, driven into
6 Ω at 1 kHz with no more than 10% total harmonic
distortion.
SURROUND SPEAKERS: 50 W per channel, min. RMS, driven
into 6 Ω at 1 kHz with no more than 10% total
harmonic distortion.
SUBWOOFER: 150 W per channel, min. RMS, driven into 4 Ω at
1 kHz with no more than 10% total harmonic
distortion.
General
Power requirement:
AC 110 V / AC 127 V / AC 220 V / AC
230 V – AC 240 V
, (adjustable with
the voltage selector), 50 Hz / 60 Hz
270 W (at operation)
Power consumption:
25 W (on standby)
Dimensions (W/H/D) (approx.): 185 mm x 460 mm x 361 mm
Mass (approx.): 11.4 kg
Digital output:
OPTICAL DIGITAL OUTPUT:
–21 dBm to –15 dBm (660 nm 30 nm)
Audio input sensitivity/Impedance
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.
(Measured at 1 kHz, with tape recording signal 300 mV)
AUX:
MIC 1/2:
300 mV/47 kΩ
• Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “MLP Lossless”, and the double-D
symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
3.0 mV/50 kΩ
VIDEO OUT:
Color system:
NTSC/PAL selectable
• “DTS” and “DTS 2.0+DIGITAL OUT” are trademarks of
Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
VIDEO (composite):
S-VIDEO:
C (chrominance, burst)
COMPONENT (Interlace/Progressive):
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
Y (luminance)
• This product incorporates copyright protection technology
that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property
rights. Use of this copyright protection technology must be
authorized by Macrovision, and is intended for home and
other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized
by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is
prohibited.
0.286 V(p-p)/75 Ω
(Y)
(PB/PR)
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
0.7 V(p-p)/75 Ω
Speaker Terminals: 4 Ω − 16 Ω (front speakers/subwoofer)
6 Ω − 16 Ω (surround/center speakers)
• “CONSUMERS SHOULD NOTE THAT NOT ALL HIGH
DEFINITION TELEVISION SETS ARE FULLY
COMPATIBLE WITH THIS PRODUCT AND MAY
CAUSE ARTIFACTS TO BE DISPLAYED IN THE
PICTURE. IN CASE OF 525 OR 625 PROGRESSIVE SCAN
PICTURE PROBLEMS, IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT
THE USER SWITCH THE CONNECTION TO THE
‘STANDARD DEFINITION’ OUTPUT. IF THERE ARE
QUESTIONS REGARDING OUR TV SET
Tuner section
FM tuning range:
87.50 MHz – 108.00 MHz
531 kHz – 1 602 kHz (at 9 kHz)
530 kHz – 1 600 kHz (at 10 kHz)
AM (MW) tuning range:
Disc player section
Playable disc: DVD Video/DVD Audio/CD/VCD/SVCD
CD-R/CD-RW (recorded in Audio CD/Video CD/
Super Video CD formats and MP3/WMA/JPEG
files)
COMPATIBILITY WITH THIS MODEL 525p AND 625p
DVD PLAYER, PLEASE CONTACT OUR CUSTOMER
SERVICE CENTER.”
DVD-R (recorded in DVD Video format)
DVD-RW (recorded in DVD Video format or DVD-
VR format)
DVD-RAM (recorded in DVD-VR format)
Dynamic range:
80 dB
Horizontal resolution:
Wow and flutter:
500 lines
Immeasurable
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPTICAL DIGITAL OUTPUT Signals
DIGITAL AUDIO
OUTPUT
Output Signals
Playback disc
DVD Video
STREAM/PCM
DOLBY DIGITAL/PCM
PCM ONLY
with 48 kHz, 16/20/24 bit Linear
PCM
1
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM*
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
with 96 kHz, Linear PCM
with Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital bitstream
DTS bitstream
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
with DTS
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
2
DVD Audio*
with 48/96/192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit
Linear PCM
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
44.1 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
with 44.1/88.2/176.4 kHz, 16/20/
24 bit Linear PCM
with Dolby Digital
with DTS
Dolby Digital bitstream
DTS bitstream
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
DVD-RW/RAM in DVD-VR format
with 48 kHz, 16/20/24 bit Linear
PCM
1
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM*
Dolby Digital bitstream
with Dolby Digital
SVCD, VCD, CD
CD with DTS
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
1
1
44.1 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM* /48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM*
DTS bitstream
44.1 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
32/44.1/48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
MP3/WMA disc
*1 While playing some DVDs, digital signals may be emitted at 20 bits or 24 bits (at their original bit rate) through the OPTICAL DIGITAL
OUTPUT terminal if the discs are not copy-protected.
*2 There is no output for DVD Audio with content protection set.
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parts Index
Remote control
Button
Page
Button
Page
REVERSE
Page
¢
6
(
13, 32
TAPE-A
4
3
%
~
9, 13, 33
9, 13, 32, 33
10
Button
Page
Button
MODE
TAPE-B
AUDIO
z
x
8
9
KARAOKE
SCORING
1
35
SUBWOOFER
LEVEL +/–
15
16
TUNING
VOLUME +/–
TV
41
9, 14, 34
7
11 – 13, 23
KEY #/
:
d
W
R
i
O
;
g
f
Y
I
35
SURROUND
MODE
¡
¢
8
1
4
/
9 Q 10, 12, 13, 21
7 . 11
MIC MIX
MENU/PL
ON SCREEN
34, 36
/
12, 29
P
E
11, 21
26 – 29
20
5
∞
3
2
/
/
/
/
12, 17, 20, 21, PAGE
Remote control
ENTER
26 – 31, 39, 41
PLAY MODE
22, 23
24, 31
15
z
1
+ / –
H
T
14, 15, 17, 18,
36, 37
REPEAT
x
RHYTHM AX
2
c
10 keys
10 – 12, 21, 22, RESERVE
28, 36, 41
36
3
5
7
v
n
RETURN
12
4
6
b
m
.
Q
ANGLE
AUDIO
y
r
m
20
REVERSE
MODE
13
19
,
P
W
AUDIO/TV
selector
9, 41
SCAN MODE
SET
U
j
17
8
p
10, 14, 15, 18,
36 – 38
9
q
AUDIO VOL
+ / –
,
9, 14
SET UP
w
G
/
F
t
S
39
36
18
15
20
15
AUX
v
l
5
A
9
SETTING
SLEEP
E
R
w
CANCEL
23, 36, 38
e
r
t
y
u
i
CHANNEL + / –
41
14
SOUND MODE
SUB TITLE
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
T
U
CHANNEL
LEVEL
SUB WFR
LEVEL
7
9
Y
I
CLOCK/
TIMER
k
18, 37, 38
10
+10
SURROUND
MODE
D
16
DIMMER
DISC 1–5
J
2
o
4
s
h
P
b
p
18
o
a
d
g
j
O
A
;
:
S
2 3
2 3
11
TAPE-A
TAPE-B
3
n
q
9, 13
9, 13
12, 29
s
f
h
k
DVD LEVEL
16
D
F
G
J
3
DVD/CD
ECHO
9, 11
35
TOP MENU/
PG
l
H
/
EFFECT
16
TV VOL + / –
TV/VIDEO
V.MASKING
VFP
6
c
a
U
u
41
FM MODE
FM/AM
10
41
Main unit
9, 10
20
35
GLANCE
BACK
17
1
ZOOM
21, 31
8
GROUP/
TITLE
e
11
2
3
4
5
9
0
Remote
sensor
-
=
Main unit
Button
Page
Button
Page
9, 11
16
~
6
2
8
!
%
=
-
+
_
1
5
¡
9
8
DVD/CD
0
)
9
@
!
@
Display
DVD LEVEL
7
10 – 13, 23, 24 FM/AM
9, 10
35
#
$
%
( ) _ +
¡ ™ £ ¢
¡
¢
8
1
4
/
10, 12, 13, 21
KARAOKE
SCORING
/
11
11, 21
MIC 1 / MIC 2
MIC LEVEL
PHONES
&
*
7
=
34
34
9
AUX
9
^
DEMO
9
Disc trays
11
PRESET +/–
11
&
*
3 0
/
0
DISC1–5
11, 24, 33
33
PUSH-OPEN
# ^ 13, 32
7
DISC REC
START
REC START/
STOP
™
33
DUBBING
£
33
RHYTHM AX
$
15
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mains (AC) Line Instruction (not applicable for Europe, U.S.A.,
Canada, and U.K.)
CAUTION for mains (AC) line
BEFORE PLUGGING IN, do check that your mains (AC)
line voltage corresponds with the position of the voltage
selector switch provided on the outside of this
equipment and, if different, reset the voltage selector
switch, to prevent from a damage or risk of fire/electric
shock.
EN, AR, PE
0205AIMMDWJEM
© 2005 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
COMPACT COMPONENT SYSTEM
DX-T5
—Consists of CA-DXT5, SP-XT5 and SP-XST5
CA-DXT5 SP-XT5 SP-XST5
INSTRUCTIONS
GVT0146-001A
[US, UN]
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Warnings, Cautions and Others
Caution––
button!
Disconnect the mains plug to shut the power off completely.
The button in any position does not
disconnect the mains line. The power can be remote
controlled.
CAUTION
To reduce the risk of electrical shocks, fire, etc.:
1. Do not remove screws, covers or cabinet.
2. Do not expose this appliance to rain or moisture.
CAUTION
• Do not block the ventilation openings or holes.
(If the ventilation openings or holes are blocked by a
newspaper or cloth, etc., the heat may not be able to get
out.)
• Do not place any naked flame sources, such as lighted
candles, on the apparatus.
• When discarding batteries, environmental problems must
be considered and local rules or laws governing the
disposal of these batteries must be followed strictly.
• Do not expose this apparatus to rain, moisture, dripping or
splashing and that no objects filled with liquids, such as
vases, shall be placed on the apparatus.
28 kg / 62 lbs.
CAUTION!
To avoid personal injury or accidentally dropping
theunit,havetwopersonsunpack,carry, and install the
unit.
G-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Caution: Proper Ventilation
To avoid risk of electric shock and fire, and to prevent damage, locate the apparatus as follows:
1. Front:
No obstructions and open spacing.
2. Sides/Top/Back: No obstructions should be placed in the areas shown by the dimensions below.
3. Bottom:
Place on the level surface. Maintain an adequate air path for ventilation by placing
on a stand with a height of 10 cm or more.
Front view
Side view
Wall or obstructions
Wall or obstructions
15 cm
15 cm
1 cm
1 cm
15 cm
CA-DXT5
CA-DXT5
10 cm
G-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts
inside the unit; leave all servicing to qualified service personnel.
3. CAUTION: Visible and invisible laser radiation when open and interlock
failed or defeated. Avoid direct exposure to beam.
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED INSIDE UNIT.
G-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Precautions
Contents
Connections........................................................................ 3
Installation
Display Indication ............................................................. 6
Daily Operations—Playback............................................ 7
Canceling the Demonstration.......................................... 7
Listening to the Radio ..................................................... 8
Playing Back a Disc ........................................................ 9
Playing Back a Tape...................................................... 11
Daily Operations—Sound&Other Adjustments............. 12
Adjusting the Volume ................................................... 12
Reinforcing the Bass Sound.......................................... 12
Adjusting the Output Balance ....................................... 12
Selecting the Sound Modes........................................... 13
Creating Your Own Sound Modes—User Mode .......... 13
Creating 3-dimensional Sound Field—3D Phonic........ 14
Presetting Automatic DVD Video Sound
• Install the System in a location with adequate ventilation to
prevent internal heat buildup in the System.
DO NOT install the System in a location near
heat sources, or in a place subject to direct
sunlight, excessive dust or vibration.
• Install in a place which is level, dry and neither too hot nor
too cold—between 5°C and 35°C.
• Leave sufficient distance between the System and the TV.
• Keep the speakers away from the TV to avoid interference
with TV.
Power sources
• When unplugging the System from the wall outlet, always
pull on the plug, not the AC power cord.
Increase Level............................................................ 14
Changing the Color System and Scanning Mode.......... 14
Changing the Picture Tone............................................ 14
Changing the Display Brightness.................................. 15
Setting the Clock........................................................... 15
Turning Off the Power Automatically .......................... 15
Unique DVD/VCD Operations....................................... 16
Selecting the Sound Track............................................. 16
Selecting the Subtitle Language.................................... 17
Selecting the View Angle.............................................. 17
Reviewing the Playback Quickly .................................. 17
Selecting Browsable Still Pictures ................................ 17
Playing Back Bonus Group........................................... 18
Special Picture Playback ............................................... 18
Advanced Disc Operations ............................................. 19
Programming the Playing Order—Program Play.......... 19
Playing at Random—Random Play............................... 20
Playing Repeatedly—Repeat Play ................................ 21
Prohibiting Disc Ejection—Child Lock........................ 21
On-Screen Disc Operations............................................ 22
On-screen Bar Information............................................ 22
Operations Using the On-screen Bar............................. 23
Operations on the Control Screen ................................. 26
Recording Operations..................................................... 29
Enjoying Karaoke ........................................................... 31
Singing Along (Karaoke) .............................................. 31
Reducing the Lead Vocal—Vocal Masking.................. 32
Scoring Your Karaoke Skill .......................................... 32
Reserving Karaoke Songs—Karaoke Program Play..... 33
Timer Operations............................................................ 34
Setup Menu Operations.................................................. 36
Operating the TV ............................................................ 38
Additional Information................................................... 39
Troubleshooting ............................................................ 42
Specifications ................................................................ 44
Parts Index ...................................................................... 46
DO NOT handle the AC power cord with wet
hands.
Moisture condensation
Moisture may condense on the lenses inside the System in
the following cases:
• After starting to heat the room
• In a damp room
• If the System is brought directly from a cold to a warm
place.
Should this occur, the System may malfunction. In this case,
leave the System turned on for a few hours until the moisture
evaporates, unplug the AC power cord, then plug it in again.
Internal heat
• Make sure there is good ventilation around the unit. Poor
ventilation could overheat and damage the unit.
–A cooling fan is inside the unit to prevent heat buildup.
DO NOT block the ventilation openings or
holes. If they are blocked by a newspaper or
cloth, etc., the heat may not be able to get out.
Others
• Should any metallic object or liquid fall into the System,
unplug the AC power cord and consult your dealer before
operating any further.
DO NOT disassemble the System since there
are no user serviceable parts inside.
• If you are not going to operate the System for an extended
period of time, unplug the AC power cord from the wall
outlet.
If anything goes wrong, unplug the AC power cord and
consult your dealer.
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When playing a multi-channel encoded DVDs, the System
properly converts these multi-channel signals into 2
channels, and emits the downmixed sound from the main
speakers and matrix surround speakers.
Playable Disc Types
INFO
•
To enjoy the powerful sound of these multi-channel
encoded DVDs, connect a proper decoder or an amplifier
with a proper built-in decoder to the OPTICAL DIGITAL
OUTPUT terminal on the rear.
DIGITAL VIDEO
DVD Logo is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing
Corporation.
IMPORTANT: Before playing a disc, make sure of
the following...
• Turn on the TV and select an appropriate input mode on
the TV to view the pictures or on-screen displays.
• For disc playback, you can change the initial setting to
your preference. See “Setup Menu Operations” on
page 36.
• CD-R/-RW: Recorded in the Audio CD/Video CD/
SVCD formats and MP3/WMA/JPEG files.
• DVD-R: Recorded in the DVD Video format.
• DVD-RW: Recorded in the DVD Video format or the
Video Recording (DVD-VR) format.
If “
” appears on the TV screen when you press a
• DVD-RAM: Recorded in the Video Recording (DVD-
VR) format.
button, the disc cannot accept the operation you have
tried to do.
In addition to the above discs, this system can play back
audio data recorded on CD Text, CD-G (CD Graphics), and
CD-Extra.
How to Read This Manual
• The following discs cannot be played back:
DVD+R, DVD+RW, CD-I (CD-I Ready), Photo CD, etc.
Playing back these discs will generate noise and damage
the speakers.
• In this manual, “file” and “track” are interchangeably used
for MP3/WMA/JPEG operations.
• Button and control operations are explained as listed in the
table below.
•
Some related tips and notes are explained later in the
sections “Learning More about This System” and
“Troubleshooting,” but not in the same section
explaining the operations (
indicates that the
INFO
content has some information).
Caution for DualDisc playback:
The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply
with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.
Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on
this product may not be recommended.
Indicates that you press the button briefly.
Indicates that you press the button briefly and
repeatedly until an option you want is
selected.
About color system
Indicates that you press one of the buttons.
This System accommodates both NTSC and PAL system
and can play back discs recorded with either system.
To change the color system, see page 14.
Indicates that you press and hold the button
for a specified period.
The number inside the arrow indicates the
period of press (in the example, 2 seconds).
2sec.
Note on Region Code
This System can play back only DVD Videos whose Region
Code numbers include “3.”
EX.:
Indicates that you turn the control toward the
specified direction(s).
Indicates that this operation is only
possible using the remote control.
Remote
ONLY
Audio formats
The System can play back the following digital audio
formats.
Indicates that this operation is only
possible using the main unit.
Main Unit
ONLY
•
LPCM (Linear PCM),
DIGITAL (Dolby Digital),
DTS (Digital Theater Systems), MLP (Meridian Lossless
Packing)
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
Do not connect the AC power cord until all other
connections have been made.
Supplied accessories
• FM antenna (x1)
• AM loop antenna (x1)
• Composite video cord (x1)
• Remote control (x1)
• Batteries (x2)
• AC plug adapter (x1)
If any item is missing, consult your dealer immediately.
• Connect VIDEO OUT directly to the video input of your
TV. Connecting VIDEO OUT to a TV via a VCR may
interfere with your viewing when playing back a copy-
protected disc. Your viewing may be interfered when
connecting VIDEO OUT to an integrated TV/VCR system.
~ From the video input of TV/monitor
See page 4.
Ÿ From the digital input of digital audio
component such as CD recorder
See page 4.
! From the analog audio output of auxiliary
equipment (VCR, etc.)
See page 4.
⁄ From AM/FM antenna
See page 4.
@ From the main front/matrix surround
speakers
See page 5.
¤ From the powered subwoofer
See page 5.
# Voltage selector
Before plugging in, confirm the position the
voltage selector points at. See page 5.
‹ To a wall outlet
Plug the AC power cord only after all
connections are complete.
• If the wall outlet does not match the AC plug,
use the supplied AC plug adapter.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
~ TV/monitor
⁄ AM/FM antenna
To assemble the AM loop antenna
Composite video
cord (supplied)
S video cord
(not supplied)
Green
Component video cord (not supplied)
Red
To connect AM/FM antenna
Blue
AM loop antenna (supplied)
Turn it until the best reception is
obtained.
• To select progressive scanning mode (see page 14), use
COMPONENT jacks.
• Connect the VIDEO jack, S-VIDEO jack, or
COMPONENT jacks whichever you want to use.
Ÿ Digital audio component
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
FM antenna (supplied)
Extend it so that you can obtain the best
reception.
Protective cap
For better AM/FM reception
AM loop antenna (supplied)
Keep it connected.
• Set “DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT” in the “AUDIO” menu
correctly according to the connected digital audio
equipment (see page 37). If setting is incorrect, loud noise
may be generated causing damage to the speakers.
Vinyl-covered wire (not supplied)
Extend it horizontally.
! Auxiliary equipment
Red
FM outdoor antenna
(not supplied)
Stereo audio cord
(not supplied)
White
• Disconnect the supplied FM antenna, and connect to an
outdoor FM antenna using a 75 Ω wire with coaxial type
connector (IEC or DIN45325).
• Make sure the antenna conductors do not touch any other
terminals, connecting cords and power cord. Also, keep the
antennas away from metallic parts of the System,
connecting cords, and the AC power cord. This could cause
poor reception.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
@ Front main speakers and matrix surround
To remove the speaker grilles of the main speakers
speakers
Holes
Projection
• When connecting the speaker cords, match their polarity
with that of the speaker terminals: red/white to (+) and black
to (–).
1
2
Speaker grille
3
4
¤ Powered subwoofer
From right front main
speaker
From the powered subwoofer
(not supplied)
From left front
main speaker
# To adjust the voltage selector
Use a screwdriver to rotate the
voltage selector so that the voltage
mark is pointing at the same voltage
as where you are plugging in the unit.
(See also the back cover page.)
From left matrix
surround speaker
From right matrix
surround speaker
Voltage mark
• Use only speakers with the same speaker impedance as
indicated by the speaker terminals on the rear of the System.
• The front main speakers are magnetically shielded to avoid
color distortions on TVs. However, if not installed properly,
it may cause color distortions. So, pay attention to the
following when installing the speakers.
DO NOT plug in before setting the voltage
selector and all connection procedures are
complete.
– When placing the speakers near a TV set, turn off the
TV’s main power switch or unplug it before installing the
speakers.
Then wait at least 30 minutes before turning on the TV’s
main power switch again.
Some TVs may still be affected even though you have
followed the above instruction. If this happens, move the
speakers away from the TV.
Preparing the remote control
When using the remote
control, point the top of the
remote control toward the
remote sensor as directly as
possible. If you operate it
from a diagonal position,
theoperatingrange(approx.
• DO NOT connect more than one speaker to
each terminal.
• DO NOT push or pull the speakers as this
will damage the foot spacers at the bottom
of the speakers.
5 m) may be shorter.
R6(SUM-3)/AA(15F)
• Dispose of batteries in the proper manner, according to
federal, state, and local regulations.
DO NOT recharge, short, disassemble or
heat the battery or dispose of it in a fire.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Display Indication
The indications on the display teach you a lot of things while
9 Tape operation indicators
you are operating the System,
• TAPE: lights when a tape is loaded in either deck A or B.
Before operating the System, be familiar with when and how
the indicator illuminates on the display.
•
(Reverse Mode): lights to indicate the current
Reverse Mode (see page 11).
• A: lights when a tape is in the deck A.
• B: lights when a tape is in the deck B.
1
2
3456 7
8
9
•
2 3 (tape direction):
– Lights to indicate the current tape running direction.
– Flashes slowly during playback and recording.
– Flashes quickly while rewinding a tape.
• REC: lights while recording.
p Disc operation indicators
• PROGRAM: lights when Program Play is activated.
• RANDOM: lights when Random Play is activated.
• REPEAT: lights when Repeat Play is activated.
• ALL DISC: lights when All Disc Repeat is activated.
• 1 DISC: lights when One Disc Repeat is activated.
• 1: lights when One Track/Chapter/Step Repeat is
activated.
p
q w e
r
t
y
u
i
o
; a
1 PROGRESSIVE indicator
• Lights when the progressive scanning mode is selected.
2 Karaoke operation indicators (see pages 31 to 33)
•
: lights when the Mic Mixing Mode is activated;
flashes when scoring function is in use.
/
q Main display
w TITLE indicator
• Lights to indicate the title number for DVD Video.
e Audio signal indicators
• Lights to indicate the incoming audio channel signals.
r GROUP indicator
• MIC: lights when the Mic Mixing Mode is activated;
flashes when scoring function is in use.
• ECHO: lights when the echo effect is activated.
• V.MASKING: lights when the Vocal Masking Mode is
activated.
3 Source signal indicators
• Lights to indicate the group number.
t CHAP. indicator
• Lights to indicate the chapter number.
y TRACK indicator
• Lights to indicate the track number.
u FILE indicator
• Lights to indicate the file number.
i Disc indicators
• DTS: lights when a source signal is DTS.
•
DIGITAL: lights when a source signal is Dolby
Digital.
• DVD: lights when DVD Video is detected.
• DVD AUDIO: lights when DVD Audio is detected.
• PCM: lights when a source signal is linear PCM.
4 BONUS indicator
• Lights when DVD Audio with bonus group is detected
(see page 18).
• 1 – 5: lights to indicate the current disc tray.
•
: lights when a disc is detected on the disc tray; rotates
during playback or paused.
5 B.S.P. indicator
• Lights when browsable still pictures on DVD Audio are
available (see page 17).
o Sound Mode indicators (see page 13)
• S.MODE: lights when one of the Sound Modes
(Surround/SEA/User Modes) is activated (for Surround
6 RESUME indicator
• Lights when Resume is activated (see page 37).
7 Timer indicators
mode,
also lights).
• DSP MODE: lights when one of the Surround Modes is
activated.
•
: lights when Daily Timer or Recording Timer stands
by or is working or being set.
; FM reception indicators
• SLEEP: lights when the Sleep Timer is activated.
• DAILY: lights when the Daily Timer stands by; flashes
while working or being set.
• REC: lights when the Recording Timer stands by; flashes
while working or being set.
• ST (stereo): lights while an FM stereo station with
sufficient signal strength is tuned in.
• MONO: lights while receiving an FM stereo station in
monaural.
a 3D PHONIC indicator
8 DVD LEVEL 1/2/3 indicators
• Lights when 3D Phonic is activated (see page 14).
• Lights to indicate the DVD Video increase level.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Daily Operations—Playback
¥ Turn on the power.
In this manual, the operation using the remote control
The STANDBY lamp on the main unit goes off.
is mainly explained; however, you can use the buttons
and controls on the main unit if they have the same (or
similar) name and marks.
• Without pressing
AUDIO, the System also turns
on by pressing one of the source select buttons in the
next step.
ø Select the source.
Playback automatically starts if the selected source is
ready to start playback.
• If you press AUX, start playback source on the external
component.
1
AUDIO
DISC 1 –
DISC 5
TV
π Adjust the volume.
2
[ Operate the target source as explained
3
FM MODE /
later.
MENU
TOP MENU
/ / / /
ENTER
To turn off (stand by) the system
The STANDBY lamp on the main unit
lights in red.
• A small amount of power is always
consumed even while on standby.
AUDIO
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
GROUP/TITLE
10 keys
7
9
10
+10
RETURN
REVERSE
MODE
For private listening
Connect a pair of headphones to the PHONES jack on the
main unit. The sound will no longer come out of the
speakers. Be sure to turn down the volume before
connecting or putting the headphones.
• Disconnecting the headphones will activate the
speakers again.
SET
AUDIO
1
2
DO NOT turn off (stand by) the System with
the volume set to an extremely high level;
Otherwise, the sudden blast of sound can
damage your hearing, speakers and/or
headphones when you turn on the System or
start playback.
AUX
DVD/CD
TAPE-A
TAPE-B
FM/AM
Canceling the Demonstration
Main Unit
ONLY
2
sec.
DEMO OFF
AUDIO VOL
3
DEMO START
To start the demonstration, select DEMO START.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
Listening to the Radio
INFO
If the received FM station is hard to listen
To select the AM tuner interval spacing
The MONO indicator lights on the
display. Reception will improve though
stereo effect is lost—monaural reception
mode.
Main Unit
ONLY
FM MODE
Some countries space AM stations 9 kHz apart, and other
countries use 10 kHz spacing.
To restore the stereo effect, press the
button again (the MONO indicator goes
off).
1 Select “AM,” then turn off (stand by) the System.
FM
AM
Remote
ONLY
To preset stations
You can preset 30 FM and 15 AM stations.
• To cancel the operation during process, press CANCEL.
2 Select the AM tuner interval spacing.
To select 9 kHz:
1 Tune in to a station you want to preset.
• You can also store the monaural reception mode for FM
preset stations if selected.
2 Start presetting.
SET
(holding then...)
To select 10 kHz:
3 Select a preset number.
Examples:
1
2
5
8
0
3
To select preset number 5, press 5.
To select preset number 15, press +10,
then 5.
To select preset number 30, press +10,
+10, then 10.
4
6
7
9
(holding then...)
10
+10
• You can also use +/– buttons.
To select the band (FM/AM)
FM/AM
FM
AM
4 Store the station.
To tune in to a station
While FM or AM is selected...
SET
1
sec.
Increases the frequencies.
Decreases the frequencies.
To tune in to a preset station
1 Select the band (FM or AM).
FM/AM
FM
AM
Frequency starts changing on the display.
When a station (frequency) with sufficient signal strength is
tuned in, the frequency search stops.
• When you repeatedly press the button, the frequency
changes step by step.
To stop searching manually, press either button.
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Select a preset number.
On-screen guide icons
• During disc playback, the following icons may appear for
a while on the TV screen:
Examples:
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
To select preset number 5, press 5.
To select preset number 15, press
+10, then 5.
To select preset number 30, press
+10, +10, then 10.
Appears at the beginning of a scene containing
multi-angle views.
7
9
10
+10
Appears at the beginning of a scene containing
multi-audio languages.
• You can also use 4/¢
buttons on the remote control or
PRESET +/– buttons on the main
unit.
Appears at the beginning of a scene containing
multi-subtitle languages.
• The following icons will be also shown on the TV screen
to indicate your current operation.
,
,
,
,
,
Playing Back a Disc
Before operating a disc, be familiar how a disc is recorded.
INFO
• To deactivate the on-screen guide icons, see “ON
SCREEN GUIDE” on page 37.
• DVD Video comprises of “Titles” which includes
“
“
“
Chapters,” DVD Audio/MP3/WMA comprise of
Groups” which includes “Tracks,” JPEG comprises of
Groups” which includes “Files,” and CD/SVCD/VCD
To select a disc
DISC 1
DISC 2
DISC 3
comprise of only “Tracks.”
• For JPEG playback, see page 27.
DISC 4
DISC 5
To insert discs
Main Unit
ONLY
Playback starts.
Remote
ONLY
To select a title/group
While playing a disc...
1
2
3
6
GROUP/TITLE
4
5
8
0
• When using an 8 cm disc, place it on the inner circle of the
disc tray.
7
9
To close the disc tray, press the same 0 again.
• If you press 3 for the same tray, the disc tray closes
automatically and playback starts.
10
+10
To start:
To pause:
To stop:
To select a chapter/track
While playing a disc...
DVD/CD
FM MODE
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
or
Playback of the
To release it, press
7
9
current disc starts. DVD/CD 3.
• First time you press
4, you can go back
to the beginning of the
current chapter/track.
10
+10
While playing DVD/SVCD/VCD/MP3: This System can
store the stop point, and when you start playback again by
pressing DVD/CD 3, it starts from the position where you
have stopped—Resume Play. (RESUME indicator lights up
when you stop playback.)
To stop completely while Resume is activated, press 7
twice. (To cancel Resume, see “RESUME” on page 37.)
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7 For SVCD/VCD with PBC
While playing a disc with PBC, “PBC” appears on the
display instead of the playing time.
To locate a particular portion
While playing a disc except MP3/WMA...
When disc menu appears on the TV screen, select an item on
the menu. Playback of the selected item starts.
Examples:
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
To select number 5, press 5.
To select number 15, press +10,
then 5.
To select number 30, press +10,
+10, then 10.
• No sound comes out while searching on DVD Video/
SVCD/VCD.
To return to normal playback, press DVD/CD 3.
7
9
10
+10
Remote
ONLY
T
o select an item directly
You can select a title/chapter/track directly and start
playback.
To move to the next or
previous page of the
current menu:
To return to the previous
menu:
• For DVD Video, you can select a title before starting
playback, while you can select a chapter after starting
playback
.
RETURN
Examples:
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
To select number 5, press 5.
To select number 15, press +10,
then 5.
To select number 30, press +10,
+10, then 10.
7
9
To cancel PBC
10
+10
Remote
ONLY
To play back by using the disc menu
You can operate the disc play using the disc menu.
You can also cancel PBC by pressing the 10 keys to start
playback when disc menu is not shown on the TV screen.
To reactivate PBC, press 7, then press 4.
7 For DVD Video/DVD Audio
1 Show the disc menu.
TOP MENU/PG
MENU/PL
or
2 Select an item on the disc menu.
ENTER
• On some discs, you can also select items by entering the
number using the 10 keys.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change the tape running direction
Playing Back a Tape
TAPE-A
TAPE-B
3 (forward
2 (reverse
)
)
To insert a tape
You can play back type I tapes.
• The use of C-120 or longer tape is not recommended.
Push
To reverse the tape automatically
REVERSE
MODE
Tape is reversed, and playback repeats until
you stop it.
Insert
Tape is not reversed. When the current side of
the tape reaches its end, playback stops.
Tape is reversed once.
To playback the both decks A and B continuously
—Relay Play
When the cassettes are set in the both decks...
Close
REVERSE
MODE
TAPE-A
TAPE-B
To start:
To stop:
TAPE-A
TAPE-B
You can start playback of either deck A or B.
To rewind tape:
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Daily Operations—Sound&Other Adjustments
Adjusting the Volume
Remote Control
The volume level can be adjusted in 32 steps (VOLUME
MIN, VOLUME 1 – VOLUME 30, and VOLUME MAX).
Remote control:
Main unit:
AUDIO
AUDIO VOL
TV
AUDIO VOL +/–
/ / / /
ENTER
Reinforcing the Bass Sound
To adjust the bass level gradually—ACTIVE
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
BASS EX.
You can select the bass level from level 0 (minimum) to
level 2 (maximum).
7
9
VFP /
SCAN MODE
10
+10
DVD LEVEL
Remote control:
Main unit:
ACTIVE
SOUND MODE
BASS EX.
3D PHONIC
+/–
L/R BALANCE
RHYTHM AX
ACTIVE
BASS EX
SET
CLOCK/TIMER
SLEEP
SETTING
DIMMER
Main unit
To emphasize rhythmical feeling—RHYTHM AX
This function emphasizes bass attack feeling.
RHYTHM AX
ON
OFF
Remote
ONLY
ACTIVE BASS
EX.
VOLUME
Adjusting the Output Balance
You can adjust the speaker output balance.
RHYTHM AX
SOUND MODE
DVD LEVEL
1 Enter the balance setting mode.
SET
SETTING
LR BALANCE
FANFARE
2 Adjust the balance.
L
BALANCE
R
R –6
0
L –6
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
Selecting the Sound Modes
You can select one of the preset Sound Modes.
Creating Your Own Sound
Modes—User Mode
INFO
SEA Modes
You can adjust the preset Sound Modes to create your own
Sound Modes which suit your taste. The changed settings can
be stored as the USER1, USER2 and USER3 Modes.
• If you want to add surround elements into your Sound
Mode, select one of the Surround Modes to adjust.
SOUND
MODE
ROCK POP CLASSIC
STADIUM HALL
OFF
DANCE MULTI
Surround Modes*
SEA (Sound Effect Amplifier) Modes
While the Sound Mode name is shown on the display...
ROCK
Boosts low and high frequency. Good for
acoustic music (initial setting).
1 Enter the SEA Control Mode.
SET
POP
Good for vocal music.
CLASSIC
User Modes
USER1/2/3
Good for classical music.
2
Your individual mode stored in memory.
See the next column “Creating Your Own
Sound Modes—User Mode.”
SET
Multi Mode
3 Adjust the SEA pattern.
1 Adjust BASS.
MULTI
Outputs the same sound from the
surround speakers as the sound output
from the main speakers.
2 Adjust TREBLE.
L
BALANCE
R
SET
Surround Modes*
DANCE
HALL
Increases resonance and bass.
Adds depth and brilliance to the sound.
STADIUM
Adds clarity and spreads the sound, as in
an outdoor stadium.
• You can adjust the bass and treble level from –5 to
+5.
*Surround elements are added to the SEA elements to create
being-there feeling in your room.
4 Select one of the User Modes.
L
BALANCE
R
To cancel the Sound Mode, select “OFF.”
USER1
USER2
USER3
5 Store the setting.
SET
• The Sound Mode changes to the one you have stored.
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating 3-dimensional Sound
Changing the Color System and
Remote
Remote
ONLY
ONLY
Field—3D Phonic
INFO
Scanning Mode
INFO
While playing a disc...
You can select the video output to match it to the color
system of your TV (NTSC or PAL).
3D PHONIC
• If you connect a progressive TV through the
COMPONENT jacks, you can enjoy a high quality picture
from the built-in DVD player by selecting progressive
scanning mode.
• You can change the setting only while the disc playback is
stopped.
ACTION
OFF
DRAMA
3D PHONIC
3D PHONIC
3D PHONIC
3D PHONIC
THEATER
On the TV screen
1 Enter the color system setting mode.
3D ACTION
3D DRAMA
Suitable for action movies and sports
programs.
4
sec.
SCAN MODE
VFP
Creates natural and warm sound. Enjoy
movies in a relaxed mood.
3D THEATER Enjoy sound effects like in a major
theater.
2 Select the color system and scanning mode.
L
BALANCE
R
NTSC
PAL
PAL PROG
NTSC PROG
Presetting Automatic DVD Video Sound
Increase Level
NTSC / PAL NTSC or PAL Interlaced scanning. For
a conventional PAL or NTSC TV.
The DVD Video sound is sometimes recorded at a lower
level than for other discs and sources. You can set the
increase level for the currently loaded DVD Video, so you
do not have to adjust the volume when you change the
source.
NTSC / PAL NTSC or PAL Progressive scanning.
PROG
For a progressive NTSC or PAL TV.
3 Store the setting.
SET
DVD LEVEL
DVD LEVEL1
DVD LEVEL2
DVD LEVEL3
As the number increases, sound level also increases.
• The initial setting is “DVD LEVEL3.”
Remote
ONLY
Changing the Picture Tone
While viewing a playback pictures on the TV, you can select
the preset picture tone, or adjust it and store your own
preference.
To select a preset picture tone
1 While playing, display VFP setting screen.
NORMAL
SCAN MODE
GAMMA
0
0
0
0
0
0
VFP
BRIGHTNESS
CONTRAST
SATURATION
TINT
SHARPNESS
On the TV screen
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Select a preset picture tone.
NORMAL
Remote
ONLY
Changing the Display Brightness
CINEMA
USER1
DIMMER
DIMMER 1 DIMMER 2
USER2
DIMMER OFF
(Canceled)
DIMMER 1
DIMMER 2
Dims the display and the illumination
on the main unit*.
NORMAL
CINEMA
Normally select this.
Suitable for a movie source.
Dims the display (same as DIMMER 1)
and turns off the illumination on the
main unit*.
USER1/USER2 You can adjust parameters and can
store the settings (see below).
*Except for the RHYTHM AX and KARAOKE SCORING
lamps.
To adjust the picture tone
1 Select “USER1” or “USER2.”
Remote
ONLY
Setting the Clock
INFO
• Follow steps 1 and 2 explained on the previous page.
2 Select a parameter you want to adjust.
Without setting the build-in clock, you cannot use any
timers.
• To exit from the clock setting, press CLOCK/TIMER as
required.
ENTER
• To correct a misentry during the process, press CANCEL.
You can return to the previous step.
1 Activate clock setting mode.
GAMMA
Adjust if the neutral color is bright
or dark. The brightness of dark and
bright portions is maintained
(–3 to +3).
CLOCK/
TIMER
BRIGHTNESS Adjust if the picture is bright or
• If you have already adjusted the clock before, press the
button repeatedly until the clock time starts flashing.
dark as a whole (–8 to +8).
CONTRAST
Adjust if the far and near position
is unnatural (–7 to +7).
2 Adjust the hour, then minute.
L
BALANCE
R
SET
SATURATION Adjust if the picture is whitish or
blackish (–7 to +7).
TINT
Adjust if the human skin color is
unnatural (–7 to +7).
Now the built-in clock starts working.
SHARPNESS
Adjust if the picture is indistinct
(–8 to +8).
Remote
ONLY
Turning Off the Power Automatically
3 Adjust the parameter.
With Sleep Timer, you can fall asleep while listening to
music.
1 Specify the time (in minutes).
ENTER
SLEEP
10
20
30
60
150
90
Canceled
120
4 Repeat steps 2 to 3 to adjust other parameters.
To erase the VFP screen, press VFP again.
2 Wait until the set time goes off.
To check the time remaining until the shut-off time
SLEEP
• If you press the button repeatedly, you can
change the shut-off time.
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unique DVD/VCD Operations
Remote
ONLY
Selecting the Sound Track
INFO
Remote Control
For DVD Video: While playing back a chapter containing
audio languages, you can select the language to listen to.
For DVD Audio: While playing back a track containing
audio channels, you can select the audio channel to listen to.
For DVD-VR/Karaoke SVCD/VCD: When playing back a
track, you can select the audio channel to play.
• You can also select the audio track using the on-screen bar
(see page 23).
AUDIO
TV
DVD/CD 3
While playing DVD Video...
AUDIO
GLANCE
BACK
/ / / /
ENTER
Ex.:
1/3
2/3
3/3
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
10 keys
ENGLISH
FRENCH
JAPANESE
AUDIO
SUB TITLE
ANGLE
7
9
10
+10
1/3
2/3
FRENCH
3/3
JAPANESE
ENGLISH
ZOOM
PAGE
While playing a DVD-VR, SVCD, or VCD...
SVCD
ST1
ST2
L2
L1
AUDIO
R2
R1
DVD-VR/VCD
ST
L
R
ST1/ST2/ST To listen to normal stereo (2 channel)
playback.
L1/L2/L
R1/R2/R
To listen to the left audio channel.
To listen to the right audio channel.
• SVCD can have 4 audio channels. Karaoke SVCD usually
uses these 4 channels to record two 2-channel recordings
(ST1/ST2).
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
Remote
ONLY
Selecting the Subtitle Language
Selecting the View Angle
For DVD Video: While playing back a chapter containing
subtitles in different languages, you can select the subtitle
language to display on the TV screen.
For DVD Video only: While playing back a chapter
containing multi-view angles, you can view the same scene
from different angles.
For DVD-VR: While playing, you can turn on or off the
subtitle.
• You can also select the view angle using the on-screen bar
(see page 23).
For SVCD: While playing, you can select the subtitles even
if no subtitles are recorded on the disc.
While playing back...
• You can also select the subtitle language using the on-
screen bar (see page 23).
ANGLE
While playing a DVD Video...
Ex.:
1 Display the subtitle selection window.
1/3
2/3
3/3
SUB TITLE
1
2
3
1/3
2/3
3/3
1
2
3
2 Select the subtitle language.
Ex.:
Remote
ONLY
Reviewing the Playback Quickly
1/3
2/3
3/3
For DVD Video/DVD-VR only: You can move the
playback position to 10 seconds before the current position
(only within the same title)—Glance Back.
ENGLISH
FRENCH
JAPANESE
1/3
ENGLISH
2/3
FRENCH
3/3
JAPANESE
While playing back...
GLANCE BACK
While playing a DVD-VR...
SUB TITLE
Remote
ONLY
Selecting Browsable Still Pictures
For DVD Audio only: While playing back a track linked to
browsable still pictures (B.S.P.), you can select the still
picture (turn the page) to be shown on the TV screen.
• If a track is linked to browsable still pictures (B.S.P.), they
are usually shown in turn automatically during playback.
• You can also select the page using the on-screen bar (see
page 23).
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
While playing an SVCD...
SUB TITLE
Each time you press the button, the still
picture changes one after another (if
available).
PAGE
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
Slow-motion playback
Playing Back Bonus Group
INFO
For DVD Audio only: Some DVD Audios have a special
group called “bonus group” whose contents are not open to
the public.
1 While playing...
FM MODE
• To play back a bonus group, you have to enter the specific
“key number” (a kind of password) for the bonus group.
The way of getting the key number depends on the disc.
Still picture playback starts.
2 Select slow motion speed.
1 Select the bonus group.
• The bonus group is usually recorded as the last group
(for example, if a disc contains 4 groups including a
bonus group, “group 4” is the bonus group).
• For how to select the group, see “To select a title/group”
on page 9.
1/32
1/32
1/16
1/16
1/8
1/8
1/4
1/4
1/2
1/2
2 Enter the key number.
1
2
5
8
0
3
4
6
* Not available for DVD-VR/SVCD/VCD.
ENTER
7
9
To resume normal playback, press DVD/CD 3.
10
+10
Remote
ONLY
Zoom
3 Follow the interactive instruction shown on the TV
1 While playing...
screen.
ZOOM 1
ZOOM 2
ZOOM 3
ZOOM 4
ZOOM 5
ZOOM
To cancel the key number entry, press 7.
ZOOM OFF
ZOOM 6
Special Picture Playback
INFO
As the number increases, magnification also increases.
• For JPEG, see page 28.
Still picture playback
While playing...
2 Move the zoomed-in position.
FM MODE
Still picture playback starts.
To resume normal playback, press DVD/CD 3.
Frame-by-frame playback
1 While playing...
FM MODE
To resume normal playback, press ZOOM repeatedly until
“ZOOM OFF” appears on the TV screen.
Still picture playback starts.
2 Advance the still picture frame by frame.
FM MODE
To resume normal playback, press DVD/CD 3.
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Disc Operations
Remote
ONLY
Programming the Playing Order
—Program Play
Remote Control
INFO
You can arrange the playing order of the tracks (up to 99)
before you start playback.
AUDIO
TV
1 Before starting playback, activate Program Play.
PLAY MODE
DVD/CD 3
PROGRAM RANDOM
Canceled
/
/
/
On the display
/
PROGRAM
No Disc
1
Group/Title
Track/Chapter
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
10 keys
7
9
10
+10
USE NUMERIC KEYS TO PROGRAM TRACKS.
USE CANCEL TO DELETE THE PROGRAM.
PLAY MODE
REPEAT
CANCEL
On the TV screen
2 Select chapters or tracks you want for Program Play.
1 Select a disc number.
2 Select a title or group number.
3 Select a chapter or track number.
Main unit
To enter the numbers:
Examples:
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
To enter number 5, press 5.
To enter number 15, press +10,
then 5.
To enter number 30, press +10,
+10, then 10.
7
9
10
+10
DVD/CD
DISC 1 0
3 Repeat the above step 2 until you finish what you want
to program.
4 Start playback.
Playback starts in the order you
have programmed.
DVD/CD
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
To skip a track:
To pause:
To stop*:
Playing at Random—Random Play
FM MODE
You can play the contents of all the loaded discs at random.
• Random Play cannot be used for some DVDs.
1 Before starting playback, activate Random Play.
Torelease, press
DVD/CD 3.
PLAY MODE
PROGRAM RANDOM
Canceled
*Resume does not work for Program Play.
Remote
ONLY
To check the programmed contents
Before or after playback...
in the reverse order
2 Start playback.
Playback of the current disc
DVD/CD
starts in a random order. When
all chapters/tracks on the current
disc are played, playback of the
next disc starts. Random Play
ends when all loaded discs are
played.
in the programmed order
To modify the program
Before or after playback...
To erase the last step:
To erase the entire
program:
To skip:
To pause:
To stop:
CANCEL
FM MODE
To go to the
beginning of the
current track,
press 4.
To release, press
DVD/CD 3.
To add steps in the program:
Repeat step 2 on page 19.
To exit from Program Play
Before or after playback...
To exit from Random Play
Before or after playback...
PLAY MODE
PROGRAM RANDOM
Canceled
PLAY MODE
PROGRAM RANDOM
Canceled
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
Playing Repeatedly—Repeat Play
REPEAT 1
REPEAT
Repeats the current chapter/track.
Repeats the current title/group.
Repeats the current disc.
You can repeat playback.
• You can also select the repeat mode using the on-screen bar
(see page 23).
• The indicator(s) lights on the display as follows to indicate
the current repeat mode.
REPEAT 1
DISC*
REPEAT ALL Repeats all discs.
DISC*
•
For DVD Video:
While playing...
REPEAT ALL Repeats all programmed tracks.
REPEAT
REPEAT 1
REPEAT
*These modes may not work correctly for DVD Video.
Canceled
REPEAT ALL DISC
Prohibiting Disc Ejection
Main Unit
ONLY
•
For DVD Audio:
—Child Lock
While playing or before playback...
REPEAT
You can lock the disc trays so that no one can eject the
loaded discs.
• This operation is possible only when the source is the disc
player.
REPEAT 1
REPEAT
Canceled
REPEAT ALL DISC
While in standby mode...
•
For MP3/WMA:
While playing or before playback...
REPEAT
REPEAT 1
Canceled
REPEAT
REPEAT 1 DISC
REPEAT ALL DISC
(holding then...)
•
For CD/SVCD/VCD:
While playing or before playback (without PBC for SVCD/
VCD)...
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same procedure.
“UNLOCKED” appears on the display.
REPEAT
REPEAT 1
REPEAT 1 DISC
Canceled
REPEAT ALL DISC
•
For Random Play:
While playing or before playback...
REPEAT
REPEAT 1
REPEAT 1 DISC
Canceled
REPEAT ALL DISC
•
For Program Play:
While playing or before playback...
REPEAT
REPEAT 1
REPEAT ALL
Canceled
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
On-Screen Disc Operations
On-screen Bar Information
Remote control
You can check the information on disc (except for MP3/
WMA/JPEG disc) and use some functions through the on-
screen bar.
AUDIO
TV
On-screen bars
DVD Video
DVD/CD 3
1
2
3
Dolby D
3/2.1ch
DISC 1 TITLE
CHAP.
2
CHAP
3
TOTAL 1:01:58
1/1
DVD-VIDEO
TIME
OFF
1/3
1/3
PG
PL
4
/ / / /
ENTER
DVD Audio
ON SCREEN
1
2
3
PPCM
DISC
2
GROUP 14 TRACK 23 TIME 0:15:58
PAGE
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
DVD-AUDIO
3/2.1ch
10 keys
OFF
TRACK
1/3
1/3
TIME
7
9
10
+10
4
ZOOM
DVD-VR
REPEAT
1
2
3
Dolby D
2/0.0ch
DISC
1
PG
2
CHAP
3
TOTAL 0:01:58
DVD-VR
TIME
OFF
CHAP.
ST
ON
4
SVCD
1
2
3
3
3
TRACK
3
TIME
0:04:58
DISC
3
SVCD
TIME
OFF
ST1
-/
4
4
VCD
1
2
DISC
4
TRACK
3
TIME
0:04:58
VCD
TIME
OFF
ST
4
CD
1
2
TRACK
3
TIME 0:04:58
DISC 5
CD
TIME
OFF
4
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
1 Disc type
O
perations Using the
2 Playback information
Indication Meanings
On-screen Bar
INFO
Basic operation procedure through the on-screen bar is as
follows:
Ex.: Selecting a subtitle (French) for DVD Video:
Dolby D/
PPCM
Audio format
3/2.1 ch/
2.0/0 ch
Channel number
While a disc is selected as the source...
DISC
TITLE
CHAP
1
Current disc
1 Display the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.
2
Current title
ON
Current chapter
Current group
Current track
Current title
3
SCREEN
Dolby D
DISC
1
1
TITLE
TITLE
2
CHAP
CHAP
3
TOTAL 1:01:58
DVD-VIDEO
3/2.1ch
GROUP
1
TRACK 14
Dolby D
3/2.1ch
DISC
2
3
TOTAL 1:01:58
1/1
DVD-VIDEO
TIME
OFF
CHAP.
1/3
1/3
PG
PL
2
2
Current play list
Time indications
Goes off
TOTAL1:25:58
3 Playback conditions
Indication Meanings
Playback
2 Select (highlight) the item you want.
/
/
Forward/Reverse search
Forward/Reverse slow-motion
Pause
Stop
Dolby D
DISC 1 TITLE
CHAP.
2
CHAP
3
TOTAL 1:01:58
1/1
DVD-VIDEO
3/2.1ch
TIME
OFF
1/3
1/3
4 Operation icons (on the pull-down menu)
3 Display the pop-up window.
Indication Meanings
TIME
Select to change the time indication
(see also page 24).
1
TITLE
2
CHAP
3
TOTAL 1:01:58
ENTER
1/3
1/3 1/1
Select to repeat playback (see also
pages 21, 24 and 25).
ENGLISH
Select for time search (see also
page 25).
4 Select the desired option in the pop-up window.
CHAP.
Select for chapter search (see also
page 26).
1
TITLE
2
CHAP
3
TOTAL 1:01:58
1/1
1/3
2/3
TRACK
Select for track search (see also
page 26).
FRENCH
Select to change the audio language or
channel (see also page 16).
1/3
5 Finish the setting.
Pop-up window goes off.
Select to change subtitle language (see
also page 17).
1/3
1/3
ENTER
Select to change view angle (see also
page 17).
Select to change the page (see also
page 17).
PAGE 1/15
To erase the on-screen bar
ON
SCREEN
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change the time information
You can change the time information in the on-screen bar
and the display window on the main unit.
Repeat Play
• See also page 21.
1 While playing a disc (without PBC for SVCD/VCD),
display the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.
• Except for DVD Video: Repeat Play can be selected
before starting playback.
1 Display the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.
Dolby D
3/2.1ch
DISC 1
T
I
TL
E
2
CHAP
TOTAL 1:01:58
3
DVD-VIDEO
TIME
O
F
F
CHAP.
1
/3/1
1
/
3
1
2 Select
.
3 Display the pop-up window.
2 Make sure TIME is selected (highlighted).
3 Change the time indication.
Dolby D
T
I
TL
E
2
CHAP
TOTAL 1:01:58
3
DISC 1
DVD-VIDEO
3/2.1ch
TIME
O
F
F
CHAP.
1
/3/1
1
/
3
1
ENTER
OFF
4 Select the repeat mode you want.
ALL
Repeats all discs or all programmed
tracks.
TOTAL
T.REM
TIME*
Elapsed disc time.
Remaining disc time.
A-B
Repeats a desired portion (see the next
page).
Elapsed playing time of the current
chapter/track.
TITLE
Repeats the current title.
REM*
Remaining time of the current chapter/
track.
GROUP
DISC
Repeats the current group.
Repeats the disc (except for DVD).
Repeats the current chapter.
Repeats the current track.
*Not available for DVD-VR.
CHAPTER
TRACK*
PG
To erase the on-screen bar
Repeats the current title (for DVD-VR
only). See also page 28.
ON
SCREEN
PL
Repeats the current play list (for DVD-
VR only). See also page 28.
OFF
Cancels Repeat Play.
*During Program Play or Random Play, “STEP”
appears.
5 Finish the setting.
Pop-up window goes off.
ENTER
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A-B Repeat
Time Search
You can move to a particular point by specifying the elapsed
playing time from the beginning.
1 While playing, display the on-screen bar with the pull-
down menu.
1 While playing (without PBC for SVCD/VCD), display
the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.
• Except for DVD: Time Search can be used before
starting playback.
2 Select
3 Display the pop-up window.
.
Dolby D
3/2.1ch
DISC 1
T
I
TL
E
2
CHAP
TOTAL 1:01:58
3
DVD-VIDEO
TIME
O
F
F
CHAP.
1
/3/1
1
/
3
1
2 Select
.
OFF
3 Display the pop-up window.
Dolby D
CHAP
TOTAL 1:01:58
3
DISC 1
T
I
TL
E
2
DVD-VIDEO
4 Select “A-B”.
3/2.1ch
TIME
O
F
F
CHAP.
TIME _ : _ _ : _ _
1
/3/1
1
/
3
1
Dolby D
DISC 1
T
I
TL
E
2
CHAP
TOTAL 1:01:58
3
DVD-VIDEO
3/2.1ch
TIME
O
F
F
CHAP.
1
/3/1
1
/
3
1
4 Enter the time.
A–B
You can specify the time in hours/minutes/seconds.
Examples:
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
5 Select the start point (A).
To move to a point of 1 (hours):
02 (minutes): 00 (seconds), press
1, 0, 2, 0, then 0.
Dolby D
3/2.1ch
T
I
TL
E
2
H
C
DISC 1
DVD-VIDEO
ENTER
7
9
TIME
A
-
CHAP.
1
/3
To move to a point of 54
(minutes): 00 (seconds), press 0,
5, 4, 0, then 0.
10
+10
• After selecting the starting point (A), you can search for
the end point using ¡.
6 Select the end point (B).
• It is always required to enter the hour digit (even “0”
hour), but it is not required to enter trailing zeros (the
last two digits in the examples above).
• To correct a misentry, press cursor 2 to erase the last
entry.
A-B Repeat starts. The selected
ENTER
portion plays repeatedly.
5 Finish the setting.
The System starts playing from the
specified time.
To cancel A-B Repeat, repeat steps 1 to 3, and select “OFF”
in step 4.
ENTER
To erase the on-screen bar
ON
To erase the on-screen bar
SCREEN
ON
SCREEN
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter/Track Search
You can search for the number of the item to play.
For DVD Video/DVD-VR: Chapter
For DVD Audio: Track
Remote
ONLY
Operations on the Control
Screen
INFO
For DVD-VR/MP3/WMA/JPEG: You can search for and
play the desired items through the control screen.
1 While playing, display the on-screen bar with the pull-
down menu.
CHAP.
TRACK
2 Select
or
.
Control screen for DVD-RW/RAM in DVD-VR
format
The control screen is superimposed on the TV screen when
you call up Original Program (PG) or Play List (PL).
To select playback type
3 Display the pop-up window.
Dolby D
3/2.1ch
T
I
TL
E
2
CHAP
TOTAL 1:01:58
3
DISC 1
DVD-VIDEO
TIME
OFF
CHAP.
CHAPTER
1/3/1
1/
3
1
_
To select the Original
Program:
To select the Play List:
4 Enter the desired chapter/track number.
Examples:
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
TOP MENU/PG
MENU/PL
To select chapter/track 5, press 5.
To select chapter/track 15, press
1, then 5.
7
9
To select chapter/track 30, press
3, then 0.
10
+10
When Original Program is selected.
ORIGINAL PROGRAM
No Date
Ch
Time
Title
1 25/04/04 4ch 19:00
2 17/05/04 8ch 10:30
3 22/05/04 8ch 17:00
4 26/05/04 L-1 13:19
5 20/06/04 4ch 22:00
JVC DVD World 2004
• To correct a misentry, press the 10 keys until the
desired number is shown in the pop-up window.
Music Festival
children 001
5 Finish the setting.
6 25/06/04 L-1
8:23
children 002
The System starts playing the
searched chapter or track.
ENTER
1 2
3
4
5
6
When Play List is selected.
PLAY LIST
To erase the on-screen bar
No Date
Chap Length
Title
My JVC World
1 25/05/04 001 1:03:16
2 17/06/04 005 1:35:25
3 20/06/04 003 0:10:23
4 25/06/04 001 0:07:19
ON
Favorite music
children001-002
SCREEN
1 7
8
9
5
6
1 Title/Play list number
2 Recording date
3 Recording source (TV station, the input terminal of the
recording equipment, etc.)
4 Start time of recording
5 Title of the program/play list*
6 Highlight bar (current selection)
7 Creating date of play lists
8 Number of chapters
9 Playback time
*The title of the original program or play list may not be
displayed depending on the recording equipment.
To erase the control screen for DVD-VR, press ENTER.
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To move the highlight (green) bar between group list and
track list (for MP3/WMA/JPEG):
Control screen for MP3/WMA/JPEG disc
The control screen automatically appears on the TV screen
when you load an MP3, WMA, or JPEG disc.
Moves the bar to the track list.
Moves the bar to the group list.
Ex.: When the MP3 disc is loaded.
6
7
8
REPEAT TRACK Time : 00:00:14
1
Group : 2 / 3
Track : 5 / 14 (Total 41)
9
Blue
Red
Green
Cloudy.mp3
Fair.mp3
Fog.mp3
2
To select an item in the list:
Hail.mp3
Indian summer.mp3
Rain.mp3
Shower.mp3
Snow.mp3
Thunder.mp3
Typhoon.mp3
Wind.mp3
3
4
Move the highlight bar to a
desired item.
• If you move the highlight bar
while playing back DVD-VR/
MP3/WMA, the selected item
starts playback automatically.
Track Information
0
-
Title
Rain
Artist
5
Album
Winter sky.mp3
1 Current group number/total group number
2 Current group
To start playback
3 Group list
4 Current track
5 Track information (ID3 Tag Version 1.0: only for
MP3/WMA)
6 Repeat Play setting
For DVD-VR/MP3/WMA:
Playback starts with the selected
chapter/track.
ENTER
• Pressing DVD/CD 3 also starts
playback.
7 Elapsed playing time of the current track
(only for MP3/WMA)
For JPEG:
8 Operation mode icon
9 Current track number/total number of tracks in the
The selected track (still picture) is
displayed until you change it.
ENTER
current group (total number of tracks on the loaded
disc)
0 Highlight bar
- Track list
• If both types of files (MP3/WMA files and JPEG files)
are recorded on a disc, select the file type to play (see
page 36).
Slide-show playback starts.
DVD/CD
Each track (still picture) is shown on
the screen for a few seconds, then
changes one after another.
• Once you start playing back a JPEG track, the control
screen goes off.
• To cancel slide-show, and display the current still picture,
press 8.
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To stop playback
To zoom in the still picture (for JPEG)
1 During being paused...
ZOOM
ZOOM 1
ZOOM 2
ZOOM OFF
To repeat title/play list for DVD-VR
While playing or before starting playback...
For Original Program
As the number increases, magnification also increases.
2 Move the zoomed-in position.
REPEAT 1
CHAP)
REPEAT
PG)
REPEAT 1 DISC
DISC)
REPEAT
(
(
(
Canceled
REPEAT ALL DISC
(
OFF)
(
ALL)
For Play List
REPEAT 1
CHAP)
REPEAT
REPEAT
(
PL)
(
Canceled
REPEAT ALL DISC
To cancel Zoom, press ZOOM repeatedly until “ZOOM
OFF” appears on the TV screen.
(
OFF)
(
ALL)
REPEAT 1* Repeats the current chapter.
REPEAT* Repeats the current title/play list.
REPEAT 1 Repeats all titles on the current disc.
DISC*
REPEAT
Repeats all loaded discs.
ALL DISC
*Not available before starting playback.
To repeat slide-show for JPEG
While playing or before starting playback...
REPEAT
GROUP)
REPEAT 1 DISC
DISC)
REPEAT
(
(
Canceled
REPEAT ALL DISC
ALL)
(
OFF)
(
REPEAT
Repeats the current group.
REPEAT 1
DISC
Repeats all files on the current disc.
REPEAT ALL Repeats all loaded discs.
DISC
• For Repeat Play of MP3/WMA, see pages 21 and 24.
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording Operations
IMPORTANT
It may be unlawful to record or play back copyrighted
Main unit
material without the consent of the copyright owner.
Recording on a Tape
INFO
Main Unit
ONLY
You can use type I tapes for recording.
• To play a tape, see page 11.
FM/AM
DVD/CD
TAPE-A /
TAPE-B
DISC 1–5 3
DISC REC
START
1 Insert a recordable cassette in deck B.
REVERSE
MODE
Push
Insert
Close
REC
START/STOP
DUBBING
Deck A
Deck B
2 Check the tape running direction and Reverse Mode
settings on the display.
Tape direction
indicator
Reverse Mode indicator
Current source
To change the direction
3 (forward
2 (reverse
)
)
Change the Reverse Mode if necessary
To record on both sides.
• When using Reverse Mode, start
(
)
recording in the forward (3) direction.
To record on only one side.
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Start playing the source—“FM,” “AM,” “DVD/CD,”
“TAPE-A” or “AUX.”
Synchronized Disc Recording
INFO
Main Unit
ONLY
• When recording a disc, you can also use “Synchronized
Disc Recording” (see the right column).
• When recording from deck A, you can also use
“Dubbing” (see below).
You can start and stop both disc play and tape recording at
the same time.
1 Load a disc and insert a recordable cassette.
4 Start recording.
2 Check the tape running direction and Reverse Mode
settings on the display.
• See step 2 of “Recording on a Tape” on page 29.
3 Select the disc number you want to start recording
from.
To stop recording
or
For recording desired tracks on discs:
You can program tracks to record in your preferred order.
• Select Program Play (and make a program; see page 19)
without starting playback.
Dubbing Tapes
Main Unit
ONLY
4 Start recording.
1 Change the source to TAPE.
The disc playback and recording start
from the first track.
• The System automatically creates 4-
second blanks between the tunes
recorded on the tapes.
• When either disc play or recording ends, both disc player
and the cassette deck stop at the same time.
2 Insert the source cassette in deck A, and a recordable
cassette in deck B.
3 Check the tape running direction and Reverse Mode
settings on the display.
To record only your favorite track—One Track
Recording
You can specify tracks to be recorded on the tape while
listening to a disc (except for DVD Video).
While the track you want to record on the tape is
playing...
See step 2 of “Recording on a Tape” on page 29.
4 Start dubbing.
• When either tape playback or recording ends, both cassette
deck stop at the same time.
The disc player returns to the
beginning of that track and the track is
recorded on the tape. After recording,
the disc player and cassette deck
automatically stop.
To stop dubbing
To cancel while recording
or
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enjoying Karaoke
The functions described in this section are not available for
DVD Audio/DVD-VR.
Remote control
IMPORTANT
• Always set MIC LEVEL to MIN when connecting or
disconnecting the microphone.
• MIC LEVEL adjustment is valid for both microphones
connected to the MIC 1 and MIC 2 jacks.
KARAOKE
SCORING
AUDIO
TV
Source
buttons
DO NOT keep the microphones connected
while they are not in use.
AUDIO VOL +/–
Singing Along (Karaoke)
You can enjoy singing along (Karaoke) by using two
microphones.
• By pressing REC START/STOP, you can record your
singing-along.
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
10 keys
7
9
10
+10
1 Turn MIC LEVEL to MIN.
V.MASKING
ECHO
/
KEY
RESERVE
MIC MIX
+ / –
2 Connect the microphone(s) (not supplied) to the
SET
CANCEL
SETTING
MIC 1 and/or MIC 2 jack.
3 Activate the Mic Mixing Mode.
Main unit
MIC MIX
MIC MIX
MIC OFF
4 Start playing the source—“FM,” “AM,” “DVD/CD,”
“TAPE,” or “AUX.”
• For Karaoke SVCD/VCD: Select a desired audio
channel. See “Selecting the Sound Track” on page 16.
Source
buttons
5 Sing into the microphone.
VOLUME +/–
6 Adjust the MIC LEVEL and VOLUME.
KARAOKE
SCORING
To cancel from the Mic Mixing Mode, select “MIC OFF”
in step 3.
MIC 1
MIC 2
MIC LEVEL
To use only microphones, select “DVD/CD” in step 4, but
do not start playback.
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
To apply an echo to your voice
Scoring Your Karaoke Skill
INFO
While the Mic Mixing Mode is activated...
This System can score your Karaoke skill by comparing your
singing along with the vocal on the playback disc.
• This function is for disc playback only.
• It is recommended to select the sound track as follows (see
page 16):
ECHO
ECHO 1
ECHO 0
(Canceled)
ECHO 2
ECHO 3
ECHO 4
For DVD Video: Select the sound track with vocal.
For SVCD/VCD: Select “ST,” “ST1,” or “ST2.”
• It is recommended to sing for more than one and a half
minutes to make the scoring function work properly.
• As the number increases, echo level also increases.
Remote
ONLY
To adjust the Key (disc playback only)
While playing back...
KEY
KEY
#
1 Select “DVD/CD” as the source.
To raise the key (up to +6).
DVD/CD
To lower the key (up to –6).
To cancel the Key Control
2 Activate the scoring function.
KEY
KEY
#
KARAOKE
SCORING
KARAOKE SCORE BOARD
–6
0
+6
SINGING
On the TV screen
KEYCON
Playback of the first track starts and the Mic Mixing
Mode is automatically activated (with the last adjustment
for echo).
0
On the display
On the TV screen
3 Sing into the microphone.
See steps 1, 2, and 6 on page 31.
• Adjust echo level and key if you want (see the left
column).
• Key Control is also canceled when you deactivate the Mic
Mixing Mode, or select another track or disc.
Remote
ONLY
Reducing the Lead Vocal
INFO
After the song ends, playback stops and the score board
appears on the TV screen with fanfare.
—Vocal Masking
If you want to reduce the lead vocal (of any source except
DVD Audio/DVD-VR), you can use the Vocal Masking
Mode.
Ex.:
Your score
KARAOKE SCORE BOARD
V. MASKING
85
POINTS
V.MASK1
OFF
V.MASK2
Very good!!
1
2
3
ST
93
85
73
POINTS
ND
RD
POINTS
POINTS
V.MASK1
V.MASK2
Cancels vocal on stereo sources.
Cancels the right audio channel.
The latest top 3
To sing into microphone(s), activate the Mic Mixing Mode
(follow steps 1 to 3 and 6 on page 31).
To stop the playback in the middle of the song, press 7.
The scoring function is not canceled and your singing along
is scored if the playback time is more than one minute.
To cancel from the Vocal Masking Mode, select “OFF.”
To cancel the scoring function, press KARAOKE
SCORING. The screen on the TV disappears. (The Mic
Mixing Mode remains activated.)
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
4 Activate the Mic Mixing Mode.
To turn on/off the fanfare
MIC MIX
1 Enter the fanfare setting mode.
MIC MIX
MIC OFF
SET
SETTING
LR BALANCE
FANFARE
5 Start playback.
To start Karaoke
Program Play:
To start Karaoke
Program Play with the
scoring function:
2 Select the fanfare setting.
L
BALANCE
R
ON
KARAOKE
SCORING
DVD/CD
OFF
Playback starts in the order you have programmed.
• For the Karaoke Program Play with the scoring
function: Each time the song ends, playback stops and
the score board appears. Press KARAOKE SCORING
twice to start playback of the next track.
Remote
ONLY
Reserving Karaoke Songs
—Karaoke Program Play
INFO
You can determine the playback order of the titles or tracks
on the disc player. You can program up to 12 steps.
To check the programmed contents
1 Change the source to “DVD/CD.”
RESERVE
DVD/CD
The Karaoke reserve screen appears.
• You cannot display the Karaoke reserve screen while the
scoring function is in use.
2 Activate Karaoke Program Play.
RESERVE
No Disc Gr/Tt Tr/Chap
1
2
3
4
5
To modify the program
While the Karaoke reserve screen is shown on the TV...
To erase the unwanted step:
On the TV screen
CANCEL
• PROGRAM indicator flashes during this mode.
3 Select songs you want for Karaoke Program Play.
Press the number buttons to select a song in the following
order.
To erase the entire program, repeat the procedure.
To add steps in the program:
Repeat step 3.
1 Select a disc.
2 Select a title/group.
3 Select a chapter/track.
Examples:
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
To select number 5, press 5.
To select number 15, press
+10, then 5.
To select number 30, press
+10, +10, then 10.
7
9
10
+10
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Timer Operations
Remote
ONLY
Setting the Timer
INFO
Remote control
Using Daily Timer, you can wake up with your favorite
song. On the other hand, with Recording Timer, you can
make a tape of a radio broadcast automatically.
• You cannot activate Daily Timer and Recording Timer at a
time. (Activating either timer deactivates the other timer.)
• To correct a misentry during the process, press CANCEL.
You can return to the previous step.
AUDIO
AUDIO
TV
1 Select one of the timer setting modes—ON for Daily
Timer or Recording Timer.
Recording Timer
Daily Timer
CLOCK/
TIMER
ON
REC TIMER
DAILYTIMER
Canceled
Clock setting
ON
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
7
9
10
+10
2 Make the timer setting as you want.
L
BALANCE
R
SET
CANCEL
SET
CLOCK/
TIMER
Repeat the procedure until you finish setting in the
following order:
1
2
3
Set the hour then minute for on-time.
Set the hour then minute for off-time.
For Recording Timer: Select the playback
source—“TUNER-FM” or “TUNER-AM.”
For Daily Timer: Select the playback source—
“TUNER-FM,” “TUNER-AM,” “DISC,”
“TAPE-A,” “TAPE-B” or “AUX IN.”
EX.: When “TUNER-FM” is selected.
4
5
Select a preset station for “TUNER-FM” and
“TUNER-AM,” or select a disc, group, and then
track number for “DISC.”
Select the volume level.
• You can select the volume level (“VOLUME 0” –
“VOLUME 30” and “VOLUME --”). If you select
“VOLUME --,” the volume is set to the last level
when the System has been turned off.
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To turn off the Timer after the setting is done
You can turn off the timer after it has been set.
3 Turn off the System (on standby) if you have set the
timer with the System turned on.
• Since Daily Timer is activated at the same time everyday,
you may need to cancel it on some particular days.
AUDIO
1 Select the timer you want to cancel (REC TIMER or
DAILYTIMER) you want to cancel.
Recording Timer
Daily Timer
CLOCK/
TIMER
How Daily Timer actually works
ON
REC TIMER
DAILYTIMER
Once the Daily Timer has been set, the timer (
)
Canceled
ON
Clock setting
indicator and DAILY indicator are lit on the display.
Daily Timer is activated at the same time everyday until
the timer is turned off manually (see the next column).
• Daily Timer starts working only when the System is
turned off (on standby).
2 Turn off the selected timer.
CANCEL
When the on-time comes
The System turns on, tunes in to the specified station or
starts playing the specified source, and sets the volume
level to the preset level.
• The timer (
) indicator goes off.
When the off-time comes
To turn on the timer again, repeat the step 1 and press SET
in step 2.
The System stops playback, and turns off (standby).
• The timer setting remains in memory until you change
it.
Timer Priority
If the settings for Sleep Timer and Recording Timer/Daily
Timer overlap, the timers work as described below.
• Sleep Timer (see page 15) has priority over the Recording
Timer and Daily Timer.
How Recording Timer actually works
When Recording Timer has been set, Timer (
)
indicator and the REC indicator are lit on the display.
Recording Timer works only once.
• Recording Timer starts working only when the System
is turned off (on standby).
Canceled
6:00
6:30
7:00
7:30
When the on-time comes
The System turns on, tunes in to the specified station, sets
the volume level to the preset level, and starts recording.
Recording Timer/
Daily Timer
When the off-time comes
Sleep Timer
The System stops recording, and turns off (standby).
• The timer setting remains in memory until you change
it.
The System turns off.
• In this case, Recording Timer/Daily Timer does not work.
Recording/Playback
Canceled
6:00
6:30
7:00
7:30
Recording Timer/
Daily Timer
Sleep Timer
The System turns off.
• In this case, Recording Timer/Daily Timer is canceled. (If
Sleep Timer shuts off the System earlier than the off time
you have set for Recording Timer, recording stops when
Sleep Timer shuts off the System.)
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup Menu Operations
Initial settings
INFO
Remote Control
Some items in the menus cannot be changed during
playback.
1 Press SET UP.
AUDIO
TV
LANGUAGE
MENU LANGUAGE
AUDIO LANGUAGE
SUBTITLE
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE
2 Press 2 (or 3) to select the menu.
3 Press 5 (or ∞) to move to select the item.
4 Press ENTER.
/ / / /
ENTER
SET UP
5 Press 5 (or ∞) to select the options, then press
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
ENTER.
7
9
To erase a preference display
10
+10
Press SET UP.
LANGUAGE menu
Item
Contents
MENU LANGUAGE
You can select the initial menu language of DVD Video (see page 43).
You can select the initial audio language of DVD Video (see page 43).
You can select the initial subtitle language of DVD Video (see page 43).
You can select “ENGLISH,” “CHINESE,” or “SPANISH” as the on-screen language.
AUDIO LANGUAGE
SUBTITLE
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE
PICTURE menu
Item
Contents
MONITOR TYPE
You can select the monitor type to match your TV when you play back DVD Video discs recorded for
wide-screen televisions.
16:9/16:9 MULTI (Wide television screen): For a wide-screen (16:9) TV.
4:3 LB/4:3 MULTI LB (Letter box conversion): For a conventional (4:3) TV. Displays a wide-
screen picture to fit the width of the TV screen keeping the aspect ratio.
16:9
4:3 LB
4:3 PS/4:3 MULTI PS (Pan Scan conversion): For a conventional (4:3) TV. The picture is zoomed
up for filling the screen vertically and the left and right sides of the picture are cut off.
• By selecting “MULTI” mode, the color system of the System changes automatically to match the
color system of the loaded disc. For the color system setting, see page 14.
4:3 PS
PICTURE SOURCE
You can obtain optimal picture quality by selecting the source type of the disc contents.
AUTO: Normally, select this option. The System recognizes the picture type (film or video source) of
the current disc according to the disc information.
FILM: For a film source disc.
VIDEO: For a video source disc.
SCREEN SAVER
FILE TYPE
You can set the screen saver function to ON or OFF.
ON: The on-screen display becomes dark when no operation is done for about 5 minutes.
OFF: To cancel the screen saver.
You can select a file type to play.
AUDIO: To play MP3/WMA files.
STILL PICTURE: To play JPEG files.
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUDIO menu
Item
Contents
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT
Set this item correctly when using the OPTICAL DIGITAL OUTPUT terminal on the rear.
PCM ONLY: When connecting to audio equipment which can decode only linear PCM signals.
DOLBY DIGITAL/PCM: When connecting to a Dolby Digital decoder or an amplifier with a built-
in Dolby Digital decoder.
STREAM/PCM: When connecting to a DTS decoder or an amplifier with a built-in DTS decoder.
DOWN MIX
Set this item properly according to your digital audio connection to play sound of the surround
multichannel audio on a DVD Video.
• This setting is effective for digital audio output if “DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT” is set to “PCM
ONLY.”
DOLBY SURROUND: Select this when connecting to a surround decoder.
STEREO: Select this when connecting to a stereo receiver, MD player, TV, etc.
D.RANGE COMPRESSION
Set this item to listen to DVD Video recorded in Dolby Digital format at low or middle volume.
AUTO: You can enjoy powerful playback sound.
ON: Select this if the sound level of DVD Video is lower than the one of TV program to make the
sound at a lower volume clear.
OTHERS menu
Item
Contents
RESUME
You can select Resume.
ON: The System resumes playback from the position where playback has been stopped if the disc is
still in the disc tray.
OFF: Resume is deactivated.
ON SCREEN GUIDE
Activate or deactivate the on-screen guide.
ON: Activate the on-screen guide.
OFF: Deactivate the on-screen guide.
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating the TV
Operating TV
Remote control
You can operate the JVC’s or other manufacturers’ TV using
this remote control.
1 Slide the AUDIO/TV selector to “TV.”
TV
AUDIO
TV/VIDEO
AUDIO
TV
TV
TV VOL +/–
CHANNEL +/–
2 Press and hold until the following steps are complete.
TV
ENTER
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
3
10 keys
7
9
ENTER
10
+10
4 Enter the 2-digit manufacture’s code number.
1
2
5
8
0
3
4
6
7
9
10
+10
Manufacture’s code
Manufacture Code number
5 Release
TV.
JVC
01
To operate the TV
To turn on or To select the input
Hitachi
Magnavox
Mitsubishi
Panasonic
Philips
RCA
10
To adjust TV
volume:
02
off the TV:
mode (either TV or
VIDEO):
03
04,11
15
TV
TV/VIDEO
TV VOL
05
Samsung
Sanyo
12
13, 14
06
To select the TV channel:
Sharp
Sony
07
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
CHANNEL
Toshiba
Zenith
08
or
09
7
9
10
+10
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Information
Daily Operations—Sound&Other Adjustments
(see pages 12 to 15)
Learning More about This System
Introduction (see pages 1 to 2)
Playable Disc Types:
• About audio format
Creating Your Own Sound Modes—User Mode:
• When you unplug the AC power cord or if a power failure
occurs, the User Mode settings will be erased in a few days.
If this happens, set the User Modes again.
Creating 3-dimensional Sound Field—3D Phonic:
• While you use the headphones, 3D Phonic is canceled
temporary.
• 3D Phonic is also applied to the optical digital output
signals through the OPTICAL DIGITAL OUTPUT
terminal.
Changing the Color System and Scanning Mode:
• If you play back an NTSC disc with the color system set to
“PAL (PROG),” the disc will be reproduced using “PAL
60” format, however, if the TV does not support this
format, the screen may rolls over upward and downward
rapidly.
• If you play back a PAL disc with the color system set to
“NTSC (PROG),” you can watch the playback pictures, but
the following symptoms may occur:
– The items on the disc menu will be blurred, and be shown
slightly shifted when highlighted.
– The aspect ratio of the picture may differ from the
original aspect ratio.
– The picture movement is not smooth.
• You cannot change the scanning mode to progressive in the
following cases:
– When your TV does not support the progressive video
input.
– When you have not connected your TV to the unit using
a component video cord.
• When you play back an NTSC disc in progressive scanning
mode, the System outputs the NTSC signal regardless of
the color system settings.
–
Linear PCM: Uncompressed digital audio, the same
format used for CDs and most studio masters.
–
Dolby Digital: Compressed digital audio, developed by
Dolby Laboratories, which enables multi-channel
encode to create the realistic surround sound.
–
DTS (Digital Theater Systems): Compressed digital
audio, developed by Digital Theater Systems, Inc., which
enables multi-channel like Dolby Digital. As the
compression ratio is lower than for Dolby Digital, it
provides wider dynamic range and better separation.
• If you use a DVD-RAM with a cartridge, take the disc out
of the cartridge before inserting.
Daily Operations—Playback (see pages 7 to 11)
Listening to the Radio:
• If you store a new station into an occupied preset number,
the previously stored station in that number will be erased.
• When you unplug the AC power cord or if a power failure
occurs, the preset stations will be erased in a few days. If
this happens, preset the stations again.
Playing Back a Disc:
• On some DVD, SVCD, or VCD discs, the actual operations
may be different from what is explained in this manual, due
to the programming and disc structure; such differences are
not a malfunction of this System.
• Some DVD Audios prohibit downmix. When you play
back such a disc, “LR ONLY” appears on the display and
the System plays back the left front and right front signals.
• When playing back a DVD Audio disc recorded in MLP
(Meridian Lossless Packing; a lossless audio compression
system that can completely recreate the PCM signal), the
signals are recognized as the linear PCM signals, however,
no indicator lights up on the display.
Setting the Clock:
• “0:00” will flash on the display until you set the clock.
• The clock may gain or lose 1 to 2 minutes per month. If this
happens, reset the clock.
• For MP3/WMA playback...
– MP3/WMA discs require a longer readout time than
regular CDs. (It depends on the complexity of the group/
file configuration.)
– Some MP3/WMA files cannot be played back and will
be skipped. This results from their recording processes
and conditions.
– When making MP3/WMA discs, use ISO 9660 Level 1
or Level 2 for the disc format.
– This System can play back MP3/WMA files with the
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of the
letter case—upper/lower).
Unique DVD/VCD Operations (see pages 16 to 18)
Selecting the Sound Track:
• On some DVD Videos, you cannot change audio languages
while playing back.
Playing Back Bonus Group:
• You cannot select a track in the bonus group for Program
Play.
– It is recommended that you make each MP3/WMA file at
a sampling rate of 44.1 kHz and at bit rate of 128 kbps.
This System cannot play back files made at bit rate of less
than 64 kbps.
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Special Picture Playback:
• During slow-motion playback, no sound will be
reproduced.
• This System can play back JPEG files with the extension
code <.jpg> or <.jpeg> (regardless of the letter case—
upper/lower).
• You cannot use frame-by-frame playback for DVD-VR.
• While zoomed in, the picture may look coarse.
• This System may not play back JPEG files properly if they
are recorded on the devices other than digital still camera.
• During slide-show playback, zoom cannot be operated.
Advanced Disc Operations (see pages 19 to 21)
Programming the Playing Order—Program Play:
• While programming steps...
Recording Operations (see pages 29 to 30)
General:
– Your entry will be ignored if you have tried to program
an item number that does not exist on the disc (for
example, selecting track 14 on a disc that only has 12
tracks).
– For SVCD/VCD/CD loaded on the other tray than the
current one, the System may prompt for the group
number entry as well, however, these entries will be
ignored during playback.
• You cannot use Program Play and Random Play for DVD-
VR/JPEG discs.
• The programmed contents will remain until you erase it.
• While the PROGRAM indicator is on, you cannot change
the disc to play. (DISC 1 – 5 on the remote control and 3
on the main unit do not work.)
• You cannot change the source during recording.
• There is leader tape which cannot be recorded onto at the
start and the end of cassette tapes. Thus, when recording
discs or radio broadcasts, wind the leader tape first to
ensure that the recording will be made without any music
part lost.
• If no cassette is inserted or a protected tape has been
inserted, “NO REC” appears on the display.
• If you select the Surround Mode (DANCE, HALL,
STADIUM—see page 13), you can also record the
surround elements. (Other sound adjustments do not affect
the recording level.)
Recording on a Tape:
• When using Reverse Mode for recording, start recording in
the forward (3) direction first; otherwise, recording will
stop when only one side (reverse) of the tape is recorded.
Synchronized Disc Recording:
On-Screen Disc Operations (see pages 22 to 28)
Operations Using the On-screen Bar:
• A-B Repeat:
• Recording starts from the first track even if you have
selected a track by using ¢/4. To specify track(s) to
record, program them (or use One Track Recording).
• While recording, you cannot use disc operation buttons
(except for 7) and sound setting buttons (except for
volume control).
• Everything on the disc goes onto the tape in the order on
the disc, or according to the order you have made for
Program Play.
• You cannot use Repeat Play while synchronized recording
(Repeat Play will be canceled).
• DISC REC START button does not work:
– While playback is paused.
– A-B Repeat cannot be used on some DVDs.
– A-B Repeat is possible only within the same title or
within the same track.
Operations on the Control Screen:
• For DVD-VR playback...
–
Original Program: The System can play back the
original picture in the recorded order.
–
Play List: The System can play back the play list edited
by the recording equipment. The control screen for the
play list appears only when the disc has the play list.
– Resume is not available.
– For details about DVD-VR format and play list, refer to
the manual of the recording equipment.
• For JPEG files playback...
– It is recommended that you record a file at 640 x 480
resolution. (If a file has been recorded at a resolution of
more than 640 x 480, it will take a long time to be
shown.)
– This System can play only baseline JPEG files*.
Progressive JPEG files* or lossless JPEG files* cannot
be played.
– When Random Play is activated.
– While playing back or being paused with Program Play.
• When the tape reaches its end in the forward direction (3)
during recording, the last song will be re-recorded at the
beginning of the reverse side (2).
• When the tape reaches its end in the reverse side (2)
during recording, recording stops even though the disc is
not entirely recorded.
* Baseline JPEG format: Used for digital cameras,
web, etc.
Progressive JPEG format:Used for web.
Lossless JPEG format: An old type and rarely used
now.
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enjoying Karaoke (see pages 31 to 33)
Setup Menu Operations (see pages 36 to 37)
General:
• If the upper and lower parts of the menu are cut off, adjust
the picture size control of the TV.
Reducing the Lead Vocal—Vocal Masking:
• The Vocal Masking Mode setting is not applied to the
optical digital output signals through the OPTICAL
DIGITAL OUTPUT terminal.
LANGUAGE menu:
• When playing a Karaoke disc in the Vocal Masking Mode,
the vocal may not be reduced or the volume may be lower.
• On some music, the Vocal Masking Mode does not provide
the correct effect.
• When the language you have selected for MENU
LANGUAGE, AUDIO LANGUAGE, or SUBTITLE is
not recorded on a disc, the original language is used as the
initial language.
Scoring Your Karaoke Skill:
PICTURE menu—MONITOR TYPE:
• Even if “4:3 PS (MULTI)” is selected, the screen size may
become 4:3 letter box with some DVD Videos. This
depends on how the discs are recorded.
• Before the scoring function is activated, you can select the
track by pressing ¢/4 (except for DVD Video and
SVCD/VCD with PBC).
• If you press ¢/4 while scoring, playback stops and
scoring is canceled (but the track is not skipped).
• If you activate the scoring function while playback is
stopped with Resume function, playback starts from the
position you have stopped.
• When you select “16:9 (MULTI)” for a picture whose
aspect ratio is 4:3, the picture slightly changes due to the
process for converting the picture width.
AUDIO menu—DOWN MIX:
• This setting is not effective when DTS software is played
• You can also activate the scoring function while playing
back. In this case, the scoring starts from that point.
• While the scoring function is in use, you cannot use the
following buttons: V.MASKING, MIC MIX, RESERVE,
and disc operation buttons (except for ¢/4/7).
• Activating the scoring function cancels Repeat Play.
• You cannot use the scoring function during Program Play,
Random Play, or recording.
back.
OTHERS menu—ON SCREEN GUIDE:
• The setup menu and on-screen bar will be displayed (and
recorded) even though this function is set to “OFF.”
Subtitles and the information for zoom-in always appear on
the display regardless of this setting.
• The ranking (top 3) is cleared when you turn off the
System. (If the number of songs scored is less than 3, “0
POINT” appears.)
Reserving Karaoke Songs—Karaoke Program Play:
• If you have selected a disc tray on which DVD Audio or
DVD-VR is loaded, that disc number is skipped.
• If DVD Audio or DVD-VR is loaded on the current tray,
you cannot use Karaoke Program Play.
• When the track starts playback, that track number will be
erased from the Karaoke reserve screen (the programmed
contents will remain until you erase it).
• While the PROGRAM indicator is flashing, you cannot
change the disc to play. (DISC 1 – 5 on the remote control
and 3 on the main unit do not work.)
Maintenance
To get the best performance of the System, keep your discs,
tapes, and mechanism clean.
Handling discs
• Remove the disc from its case by holding it at the edge
while pressing the center hole lightly.
• Do not touch the shiny surface of the disc, or bend the disc.
• Put the disc back in its case after use to prevent warping.
• Be careful not to scratch the surface of the disc when
placing it back in its case.
• Avoid exposure to direct sunlight, temperature extremes,
and moisture.
To clean the disc:
Timer Operations (see pages 34 to 35)
Wipe the disc with a soft cloth in a straight line from center
Setting the Timer:
to edge.
• If you do not specify the preset station or track number
correctly while setting a timer, the currently selected
station or the first track will be played when timer is
activated.
• When you unplug the AC power cord or if a power failure
occurs, the timer will be canceled. You need to set the
clock first, then the timer again.
• Without stopping the recording, you cannot change the
source after Recording Timer starts recording.
• If you set DVD Video as the source, Daily Timer will not
work correctly.
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Handling cassette tapes
Troubleshooting
If you are having a problem with your System, check this list
for a possible solution before calling for service.
• If the tape is loose in its cassette, take up the slack by
inserting a pencil in one of the reels and rotate it.
– If the tape is loose, it may get stretched, cut, or caught in
the cassette.
General:
• Be careful not to touch the tape surface.
• Avoid the following places to store the tape—in dusty
places, in direct sunlight or heat, in moist areas, on a TV or
speaker, or near a magnet.
To keep the best recording and playback sound quality
• Use a cotton swab moistened with alcohol to clean the
heads, capstans, and pinch rollers.
• Use a head demagnetizer (available at electronics and
audio shops) to demagnetize the heads (when the System
turned off).
Adjustments or settings are suddenly canceled before
you finish.
] There is a time limit. Repeat procedure again.
Operations are disabled.
] The built-in microprocessor may malfunction due to
external electrical interference. Unplug the AC power
cord and then plug it back in.
Unable to operate the System from the remote control.
] The path between the remote control and the remote
sensor on the System is blocked.
To protect your recording
] The batteries are exhausted.
No sound is heard.
Cassettes have two small tabs on the back
to protect from unexpected erasure or re-
recording.
To protect your recording, remove these
tabs.
] Speaker connections are incorrect or loose.
] Headphones are connected.
No picture appears on the screen.
] The video cord connections are incorrect or loose.
No picture is displayed on the TV screen, the picture is
blurred, or the picture is divided into two parts.
] The System is connected to a TV which does not support
progressive video input.
To re-record on a protected tape, cover
the holes with adhesive tape.
] Incorrect color system is selected (see page 14).
The left and right edges of the picture are missing on the
screen.
Cleaning the System
• Stains should be wiped off with a soft cloth. If the System
is heavily stained, wipe it with a cloth soaked in water-
diluted neutral detergent and wrung well, then wipe clean
with a dry cloth.
] Select “4:3 LB (MULTI)” for “MONITOR TYPE” (see
page 36).
• Since the System may deteriorate in quality, become
damaged or get its paint peeled off, be careful about the
following:
– DO NOT wipe it with a hard cloth.
– DO NOT wipe it strong.
– DO NOT wipe it with thinner or benzine.
– DO NOT apply any volatile substance such as
insecticides to it.
– DO NOT allow any rubber or plastic to remain in contact
for a long time.
Radio Operations:
Hard to listen to broadcasts because of noise.
] Antennas connections are incorrect or loose.
] The AM loop antenna is too close to the System.
] The FM antenna is not properly extended and positioned.
Disc Operations:
The disc does not play.
] You have inserted a disc whose Region Code is not “3.”
(“REGION ERR” appears on the display.)
] The disc is placed upside down. Place the disc with the
label side up.
ID3 Tag on an MP3 disc cannot be shown.
]
There are two types of ID3 Tag—Version 1 and Version 2.
This System can only show ID3 Tag Version 1.
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MP3 groups and tracks are not played back as you
expect.
Tape Operations:
The cassette holder cannot be opened.
] The playing order is determined when the disc was
] Power supply from the AC power cord has been cut off
recorded. It depends on the writing application.
while the tape was running. Turn on the System.
MP3/WMA or JPEG files are not played back.
] The inserted disc may include both type of tracks (MP3/
WMA files and JPEG files). In this case, you can only
play back the files selected by the “FILE TYPE” setting
(see page 36).
Recording Operations:
Impossible to record.
] Small tabs on the back of the cassette are removed.
Cover the holes with adhesive tape.
] You have changed the “FILE TYPE” setting after you
] The Karaoke scoring function is in use. Cancel the
scoring function (see page 32).
inserted a disc. In this case, reload the disc.
The disc sound is discontinuous.
] The disc is scratched or dirty.
The disc playback sounds strange.
Karaoke Operations:
Cannot activate the scoring function.
] Cancel Key Control (see page 32).
No subtitle appears on the display though you have
selected the initial subtitle language.
] Some DVDs are programmed to always display no
subtitle initially. If this happens, press SUB TITLE after
starting play (see page 17).
Audio language is different from the one you have
selected as the initial audio language.
] Some DVDs are programmed to always use the original
language initially. If this happens, press AUDIO after
starting play (see page 16).
The disc tray does not open or close.
] The AC power cord is not plugged in.
] Child Lock is in use. “LOCKED” appears in the display
window (see page 21).
] The Program Play is in use. Cancel the Program Play
(see page 20).
] DVD Audio or DVD-VR is playing.
] You cannot use the scoring function while recording, or
while the disc menu for DVD Video/SVCD/VCD is
shown on the TV screen.
Scoring result seems wrong (or “– –” appears).
] The playback time with the scoring function is too short.
It is recommended to sing for more than one and a half
minutes. (If playback time is less than one minute, the
scoring is canceled.)
] No input from the microphone or the input level (MIC
LEVEL) is too low.
] You have sung in too low voice.
Timer Operations:
Daily Timer or Recording Timer does not work.
] The System has been turned on when the on-time comes.
Timer starts working only when the System is turned off.
Language Code List
AA
AB
AF
Afar
FA
FI
Persian
Finnish
Fiji
KM
KN
KO
KS
Cambodian
Kannada
Korean (KOR)
Kashmiri
Kurdish
OM (Afan) Oromo
SU Sundanese
SV Swedish
SW Swahili
TA Tamil
TE Telugu
TG Tajik
Abkhazian
Afrikaans
OR
PA
PL
PS
Oriya
FJ
Panjabi
Polish
AM Ameharic
FO
FY
Faroese
Frisian
AR
AS
AY
AZ
BA
BE
BG
BH
BI
BN
BO
BR
CA
Arabic
Assamese
Aymara
Azerbaijani
Bashkir
KU
KY
LA
LN
LO
LT
Pashto, Pushto
Portuguese
Quechua
GA Irish
Kirghiz
PT
QU
GD Scots Gaelic
Latin
Lingala
Laothian
Lithuanian
Latvian, Lettish
Malagasy
Maori
Macedonian
Malayalam
Mongolian
Moldavian
Marathi
Malay (MAY)
Maltese
Burmese
Nauru
Nepali
Dutch
Norwegian
Occitan
TH Thai
GL
Galician
RM Rhaeto-Romance
TI
Tigrinya
GN Guarani
GU Gujarati
HA Hausa
RN
RO
RU
Kirundi
Rumanian
Russian
TK Turkmen
TL Tagalog
TN Setswana
TO Tonga
TR Turkish
TS Tsonga
TT Tatar
Byelorussian
Bulgarian
Bihari
LV
MG
MI
HI
Hindi
RW Kinyarwanda
Bislama
HR Croatian
HU Hungarian
HY Armenian
SA
SD
SG
SH
SI
Sanskrit
Sindhi
Bengali, Bangla
Tibetan
MK
ML
MN
MO
MR
MS
MT
MY
NA
NE
NL
NO
OC
Sangho
Breton
Catalan
IA
IE
IK
IN
IS
IW
JI
Interlingua
Interlingue
Inupiak
Serbo-Croatian
Singhalese
Slovak
TW Twi
UK Ukrainian
UR Urdu
CO Corsican
SK
SL
SM
SN
SO
SQ
SR
SS
CS
CY
DA
DZ
EL
EO
ET
EU
Czech
Indonesian
Icelandic
Hebrew
Slovenian
Samoan
Shona
UZ Uzbek
Welsh
VI
Vietnamese
Danish
Bhutani
Greek
VO Volapuk
WO Wolof
XH Xhosa
YO Yoruba
ZU Zulu
Yiddish
Somali
JW Javanese
KA Georgian
KK Kazakh
Albanian
Serbian
Esperanto
Estonian
Basque
Siswati
Sesotho
KL
Greenlandic
ST
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Amplifier section
Output Power:
Supplied Accessories
See page 3.
MAIN SPEAKERS: 150 W per channel, min. RMS, driven into
4 Ω at 1 kHz with no more than 10% total harmonic
distortion.
Speakers
Main Speakers
Digital output:
OPTICAL DIGITAL OUTPUT:
–21 dBm to –15 dBm (660 nm 30 nm)
Audio input sensitivity/Impedance
(Measured at 1 kHz, with tape recording signal 300 mV)
Type:
3-Way 3-Speaker Bass Reflex
(Magnetically-Shielded Type)
Speaker systems:
Woofer:
Mid:
Tweeter:
18 cm cone x 1
5 cm cone x 1
2 cm dome x 1
AUX:
MIC 1/2:
300 mV/47 kΩ
3.0 mV/50 kΩ
Power handling capacity:
Impedance:
Frequency range:
Sound pressure level:
150 W
4 Ω
37 Hz – 31 000 Hz
85 dB/W•m
VIDEO OUT:
Color system:
NTSC/PAL selectable
Dimensions (W/H/D) (approx.): 204 mm x 460 mm x 271 mm
VIDEO (composite):
S-VIDEO:
C (chrominance, burst)
COMPONENT (Interlace/Progressive):
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
Mass (approx.):
4.6 kg each
Y (luminance)
0.286 V(p-p)/75 Ω
Surround Speakers
Speaker systems:
Power handling capacity:
Impedance:
8 cm cone x 1
40 W
16 Ω
(Y)
(PB/PR)
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
0.7 V(p-p)/75 Ω
Dimensions (W/H/D) (approx.): 105 mm x 230 mm x 125 mm
Speaker Terminals: 4 Ω − 16 Ω (Main speakers)
16 Ω − 32 Ω (Surround speakers)
Mass (approx.):
0.7 kg each
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.
Tuner section
FM tuning range:
87.50 MHz – 108.00 MHz
531 kHz – 1 710 kHz (at 9 kHz)
530 kHz – 1 710 kHz (at 10 kHz)
• Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “MLP Lossless”, and the double-D
symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
AM (MW) tuning range:
• “DTS” and “DTS 2.0+DIGITAL OUT” are trademarks of
Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
Disc player section
Playable disc: DVD Video/DVD Audio/CD/VCD/SVCD
CD-R/CD-RW (recorded in Audio CD/Video CD/
Super Video CD formats and MP3/WMA/JPEG
files)
• This product incorporates copyright protection technology
that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property
rights. Use of this copyright protection technology must be
authorized by Macrovision, and is intended for home and
other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized
by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is
prohibited.
• “CONSUMERS SHOULD NOTE THAT NOT ALL HIGH
DEFINITION TELEVISION SETS ARE FULLY
COMPATIBLE WITH THIS PRODUCT AND MAY
CAUSE ARTIFACTS TO BE DISPLAYED IN THE
PICTURE. IN CASE OF 525 OR 625 PROGRESSIVE SCAN
PICTURE PROBLEMS, IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT
THE USER SWITCH THE CONNECTION TO THE
‘STANDARD DEFINITION’ OUTPUT. IF THERE ARE
QUESTIONS REGARDING OUR TV SET
DVD-R (recorded in DVD Video format)
DVD-RW (recorded in DVD Video format or DVD-
VR format)
DVD-RAM (recorded in DVD-VR format)
Dynamic range:
Horizontal resolution:
Wow and flutter:
80 dB
500 lines
Immeasurable
Cassette deck section
Frequency response
Normal (type I):
Wow and flutter:
50 Hz – 14 000 Hz
0.15% (WRMS)
General
Power requirement:
COMPATIBILITY WITH THIS MODEL 525p AND 625p
DVD PLAYER, PLEASE CONTACT OUR CUSTOMER
SERVICE CENTER.”
AC 110 V / AC 127 V / AC 220 V / AC
230 V – AC 240 V
, (adjustable with
the voltage selector), 50 Hz / 60 Hz
195 W (at operation)
Power consumption:
20 W (on standby)
Dimensions (W/H/D) (approx.): 185 mm x 460 mm x 361 mm
Mass (approx.):
10.9 kg
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPTICAL DIGITAL OUTPUT Signals
DIGITAL AUDIO
OUTPUT
Output Signals
Playback disc
DVD Video
STREAM/PCM
DOLBY DIGITAL/PCM
PCM ONLY
with 48 kHz, 16/20/24 bit Linear
PCM
1
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM*
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
with 96 kHz, Linear PCM
with Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital bitstream
DTS bitstream
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
with DTS
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
2
DVD Audio*
with 48/96/192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit
Linear PCM
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
44.1 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
with 44.1/88.2/176.4 kHz, 16/20/
24 bit Linear PCM
with Dolby Digital
with DTS
Dolby Digital bitstream
DTS bitstream
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
DVD-RW/RAM in DVD-VR format
with 48 kHz, 16/20/24 bit Linear
PCM
1
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM*
Dolby Digital bitstream
with Dolby Digital
SVCD, VCD, CD
CD with DTS
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
1
1
44.1 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM* /48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM*
DTS bitstream
44.1 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
32/44.1/48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
MP3/WMA disc
*1 While playing some DVDs, digital signals may be emitted at 20 bits or 24 bits (at their original bit rate) through the OPTICAL DIGITAL
OUTPUT terminal if the discs are not copy-protected.
*2 There is no output for DVD Audio with content protection set.
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parts Index
Remote control
Button
Page
Button
Page
0
PUSH-OPEN
# ^ 11, 29
SOUND MODE
TAPE-A
(
4
3
%
~
13
Button
Page
Button
Page
REC START/
STOP
™
¢
$
30
7, 11, 30
7, 11, 29, 30
8
AUDIO
z
x
8
7
KARAOKE
SCORING
1
32
TAPE-B
TV
38
REVERSE
MODE
11, 29
12
TUNING
7
9 – 11, 20
KEY #
KEY
:
A
F
32
32
12
VOLUME +/–
7, 12, 31
¡
¢
8
1
4
/
9 Q 8, 10, 11, 18
7 . 9, 10
RHYTHM AX
/
L / R
BALANCE
P
E
9, 18
Remote control
5
∞
3
2
/
/
/
/
10, 15, 17, 18, MIC MIX
d
W
R
i
O
;
g
f
Y
I
31, 33
10, 26
23 – 26
17
ENTER
23 – 28, 36, 38
MENU/PL
z
1
+ / –
F
T
D
h
13 – 15, 33, 34 ON SCREEN
9, 10, 19, 25, 38 PAGE
x
10 keys
2
3
4
5
6
c
3D PHONIC
14
12
PLAY MODE
REPEAT
19, 20
21, 28
12
ACTIVE
BASS EX
v
n
b
m
.
Q
RHYTHM AX
RESERVE
RETURN
ANGLE
AUDIO
y
r
m
17
33
7
16
10
,
P
W
8
AUDIO/TV
selector
7, 38
REVERSE
MODE
11
9
p
q
AUDIO VOL
+ / –
,
7, 12
SCAN MODE
SET
U
j
14
8, 12, 13, 15, 33,
34, 35
E
R
w
AUX
v
l
5
k
7
CANCEL
20, 33, 35
38
SET UP
w
G
/
S
t
3
n
q
36
e
r
t
y
u
i
CHANNEL +/–
SETTING
SLEEP
12, 33
15
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
T
U
CLOCK/
TIMER
15, 34, 35
7
9
SOUND MODE
SUB TITLE
13
Y
I
10
+10
DIMMER
DISC 1–5
H
2
o
4
s
P
b
p
15
9
17
2 3
2 3
TAPE-A
TAPE-B
7, 11
7, 11
10, 26
o
;
s
f
h
k
/
O
A
:
S
a
d
g
j
DVD LEVEL
14
7, 9
32
8
3
DVD/CD
ECHO
TOP MENU/
PG
D
G
F
H
FM MODE
FM/AM
TV VOL + / –
TV/VIDEO
V.MASKING
VFP
6
c
a
U
u
38
l
7, 8
17
38
GLANCE
BACK
32
Main unit
14
GROUP/
TITLE
e
9
ZOOM
18, 28
1
8
2
3
4
5
9
0
Main unit
Remote
sensor
-
=
Button
Page
Button
Page
2
8
!
%
=
-
6
7
DISC REC
START
¡
30
~
6
Display
6
!
@
7
8 – 11, 20, 21
DUBBING
DVD/CD
£
0
)
9
@
30
¡
¢
8
1
4
/
8, 10, 11, 18
7, 9
14
#
$
%
( ) _ +
¡ ™ £ ¢
/
9
DVD LEVEL
FM/AM
9, 18
12
7, 8
32
ACTIVE
BASS EX. +/–
KARAOKE
SCORING
^
AUX
+
_
1
5
7
MIC 1 / MIC 2
MIC LEVEL
PHONES
&
*
7
=
31
31
7
DEMO
Disc trays
7
9
&
*
7
0
3
DISC 1–5
/
9, 21, 30
PRESET +/–
9
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mains (AC) Line Instruction (not applicable for Europe, U.S.A.,
Canada, and U.K.)
CAUTION for mains (AC) line
BEFORE PLUGGING IN, do check that your mains
(AC) line voltage corresponds with the position of
the voltage selector switch provided on the
outside of this equipment and, if different, reset
the voltage selector switch, to prevent from a
damage or risk of fire/electric shock.
EN, CS
0205AIMMDWJEM
© 2005 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
COMPACT COMPONENT SYSTEM
DX-T5
—Consists of CA-DXT5, SP-XT5, and SP-XST5
CA-DXT5
SP-XT5
SP-XST5 SP-XT5
SP-XST5
CA-DXT5
INSTRUCTIONS
GVT0146-002A
[UG, UX]
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Warnings, Cautions and Others
Caution––
button!
CAUTION
Disconnect the mains plug to shut the power off completely.
The button in any position does not
• Do not block the ventilation openings or holes.
(If the ventilation openings or holes are blocked by a
newspaper or cloth, etc., the heat may not be able to get
out.)
disconnect the mains line. The power can be remote
controlled.
• Do not place any naked flame sources, such as lighted
candles, on the apparatus.
• When discarding batteries, environmental problems must
be considered and local rules or laws governing the
disposal of these batteries must be followed strictly.
• Do not expose this apparatus to rain, moisture, dripping or
splashing and that no objects filled with liquids, such as
vases, shall be placed on the apparatus.
CAUTION
To reduce the risk of electrical shocks, fire, etc.:
1. Do not remove screws, covers or cabinet.
2. Do not expose this appliance to rain or moisture.
28 kg / 62 lbs.
CAUTION!
To avoid personal injury or accidentally dropping
theunit,havetwopersonsunpack,carry, and install the
unit.
G-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Caution: Proper Ventilation
To avoid risk of electric shock and fire, and to prevent damage, locate the apparatus as follows:
1. Front:
No obstructions and open spacing.
2. Sides/Top/Back: No obstructions should be placed in the areas shown by the dimensions below.
3. Bottom:
Place on the level surface. Maintain an adequate air path for ventilation by placing
on a stand with a height of 10 cm or more.
Front view
Side view
15 cm
15 cm
1 cm
1 cm
15 cm
CA-DXT5
CA-DXT5
10 cm
G-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMPORTANT FOR LASER PRODUCTS
1. CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
2. CAUTION: Do not open the top cover. There are no user serviceable parts
inside the unit; leave all servicing to qualified service personnel.
3. CAUTION: Visible and invisible laser radiation when open and interlock
failed or defeated. Avoid direct exposure to beam.
4. REPRODUCTION OF LABEL: CAUTION LABEL, PLACED INSIDE UNIT.
G-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Precautions
Contents
Connections........................................................................ 3
Installation
Display Indication ............................................................. 6
Daily Operations—Playback............................................ 7
Canceling the Demonstration.......................................... 7
Listening to the Radio ..................................................... 8
Playing Back a Disc ........................................................ 9
Playing Back a Tape...................................................... 11
Daily Operations—Sound&Other Adjustments............. 12
Adjusting the Volume ................................................... 12
Reinforcing the Bass Sound.......................................... 12
Adjusting the Output Balance ....................................... 12
Selecting the Sound Modes........................................... 13
Creating Your Own Sound Modes—User Mode .......... 13
Creating 3-dimensional Sound Field—3D Phonic........ 14
Presetting Automatic DVD Video Sound
• Install the System in a location with adequate ventilation to
prevent internal heat buildup in the System.
DO NOT install the System in a location near
heat sources, or in a place subject to direct
sunlight, excessive dust or vibration.
• Install in a place which is level, dry and neither too hot nor
too cold—between 5°C and 35°C.
• Leave sufficient distance between the System and the TV.
• Keep the speakers away from the TV to avoid interference
with TV.
Power sources
• When unplugging the System from the wall outlet, always
pull on the plug, not the AC power cord.
Increase Level............................................................ 14
Changing the Color System and Scanning Mode.......... 14
Changing the Picture Tone............................................ 14
Changing the Display Brightness.................................. 15
Setting the Clock........................................................... 15
Turning Off the Power Automatically .......................... 15
Unique DVD/VCD Operations....................................... 16
Selecting the Sound Track............................................. 16
Selecting the Subtitle Language.................................... 17
Selecting the View Angle.............................................. 17
Reviewing the Playback Quickly .................................. 17
Selecting Browsable Still Pictures ................................ 17
Playing Back Bonus Group........................................... 18
Special Picture Playback ............................................... 18
Advanced Disc Operations ............................................. 19
Programming the Playing Order—Program Play.......... 19
Playing at Random—Random Play............................... 20
Playing Repeatedly—Repeat Play ................................ 21
Prohibiting Disc Ejection—Child Lock........................ 21
On-Screen Disc Operations............................................ 22
On-screen Bar Information............................................ 22
Operations Using the On-screen Bar............................. 23
Operations on the Control Screen ................................. 26
Recording Operations..................................................... 29
Enjoying Karaoke ........................................................... 31
Singing Along (Karaoke) .............................................. 31
Reducing the Lead Vocal—Vocal Masking.................. 32
Scoring Your Karaoke Skill .......................................... 32
Reserving Karaoke Songs—Karaoke Program Play..... 33
Timer Operations............................................................ 34
Setup Menu Operations.................................................. 36
Operating the TV ............................................................ 38
Additional Information................................................... 39
Troubleshooting ............................................................ 42
Specifications ................................................................ 44
Parts Index ...................................................................... 46
DO NOT handle the AC power cord with wet
hands.
Moisture condensation
Moisture may condense on the lenses inside the System in
the following cases:
• After starting to heat the room
• In a damp room
• If the System is brought directly from a cold to a warm
place.
Should this occur, the System may malfunction. In this case,
leave the System turned on for a few hours until the moisture
evaporates, unplug the AC power cord, then plug it in again.
Internal heat
• Make sure there is good ventilation around the unit. Poor
ventilation could overheat and damage the unit.
–A cooling fan is inside the unit to prevent heat buildup.
DO NOT block the ventilation openings or
holes. If they are blocked by a newspaper or
cloth, etc., the heat may not be able to get out.
Others
• Should any metallic object or liquid fall into the System,
unplug the AC power cord and consult your dealer before
operating any further.
DO NOT disassemble the System since there
are no user serviceable parts inside.
• If you are not going to operate the System for an extended
period of time, unplug the AC power cord from the wall
outlet.
If anything goes wrong, unplug the AC power cord and
consult your dealer.
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When playing a multi-channel encoded DVDs, the System
properly converts these multi-channel signals into 2
channels, and emits the downmixed sound from the main
speakers and matrix surround speakers.
Playable Disc Types
INFO
•
To enjoy the powerful sound of these multi-channel
encoded DVDs, connect a proper decoder or an amplifier
with a proper built-in decoder to the OPTICAL DIGITAL
OUTPUT terminal on the rear.
DIGITAL VIDEO
DVD Logo is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing
Corporation.
IMPORTANT: Before playing a disc, make sure of
the following...
• Turn on the TV and select an appropriate input mode on
the TV to view the pictures or on-screen displays.
• For disc playback, you can change the initial setting to
your preference. See “Setup Menu Operations” on
page 36.
• CD-R/-RW: Recorded in the Audio CD/Video CD/
SVCD formats and MP3/WMA/JPEG files.
• DVD-R: Recorded in the DVD Video format.
• DVD-RW: Recorded in the DVD Video format or the
Video Recording (DVD-VR) format.
If “
” appears on the TV screen when you press a
• DVD-RAM: Recorded in the Video Recording (DVD-
VR) format.
button, the disc cannot accept the operation you have
tried to do.
In addition to the above discs, this system can play back
audio data recorded on CD Text, CD-G (CD Graphics), and
CD-Extra.
How to Read This Manual
• The following discs cannot be played back:
DVD+R, DVD+RW, CD-I (CD-I Ready), Photo CD, etc.
Playing back these discs will generate noise and damage
the speakers.
• In this manual, “file” and “track” are interchangeably used
for MP3/WMA/JPEG operations.
• Button and control operations are explained as listed in the
table below.
•
Some related tips and notes are explained later in the
sections “Learning More about This System” and
“Troubleshooting,” but not in the same section
explaining the operations (
indicates that the
INFO
content has some information).
Caution for DualDisc playback:
The Non-DVD side of a “DualDisc” does not comply
with the “Compact Disc Digital Audio” standard.
Therefore, the use of Non-DVD side of a DualDisc on
this product may not be recommended.
Indicates that you press the button briefly.
Indicates that you press the button briefly and
repeatedly until an option you want is
selected.
About color system
Indicates that you press one of the buttons.
This System accommodates both NTSC and PAL system
and can play back discs recorded with either system.
To change the color system, see page 14.
Indicates that you press and hold the button
for a specified period.
The number inside the arrow indicates the
period of press (in the example, 2 seconds).
2sec.
Note on Region Code
This System can play back only DVD Videos whose Region
Code numbers include “2.”
EX.:
Indicates that you turn the control toward the
specified direction(s).
Indicates that this operation is only
possible using the remote control.
Remote
ONLY
Audio formats
The System can play back the following digital audio
formats.
Indicates that this operation is only
possible using the main unit.
Main Unit
ONLY
•
LPCM (Linear PCM),
DIGITAL (Dolby Digital),
DTS (Digital Theater Systems), MLP (Meridian Lossless
Packing)
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connections
Do not connect the AC power cord until all other
connections have been made.
Supplied accessories
• FM antenna (x1)
• AM loop antenna (x1)
• Composite video cord (x1)
• Remote control (x1)
• Batteries (x2)
• Connect VIDEO OUT directly to the video input of your
TV. Connecting VIDEO OUT to a TV via a VCR may
interfere with your viewing when playing back a copy-
protected disc. Your viewing may be interfered when
connecting VIDEO OUT to an integrated TV/VCR system.
If any item is missing, consult your dealer immediately.
~ From the video input of TV/monitor
See page 4.
Ÿ From the digital input of digital audio
component such as CD recorder
See page 4.
! From the analog audio output of auxiliary
equipment (VCR, etc.)
See page 4.
⁄ From AM/FM antenna
See page 4.
@ From the main front/matrix surround
speakers
See page 5.
¤ From the powered subwoofer
See page 5.
# Voltage selector
Before plugging in, confirm the position the
voltage selector points at. See page 5.
‹ To a wall outlet
Plug the AC power cord only after all
connections are complete.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
~ TV/monitor
⁄ AM/FM antenna
To assemble the AM loop antenna
Composite video
cord (supplied)
S video cord
(not supplied)
Green
Component video cord (not supplied)
Red
To connect AM/FM antenna
Blue
AM loop antenna (supplied)
Turn it until the best reception is
obtained.
• To select progressive scanning mode (see page 14), use
COMPONENT jacks.
• Connect the VIDEO jack, S-VIDEO jack, or
COMPONENT jacks whichever you want to use.
Ÿ Digital audio component
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
FM antenna (supplied)
Extend it so that you can obtain the best
reception.
Protective cap
For better AM/FM reception
AM loop antenna (supplied)
Keep it connected.
• Set “DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT” in the “AUDIO” menu
correctly according to the connected digital audio
equipment (see page 37). If setting is incorrect, loud noise
may be generated causing damage to the speakers.
Vinyl-covered wire (not supplied)
Extend it horizontally.
! Auxiliary equipment
Red
FM outdoor antenna
(not supplied)
Stereo audio cord
(not supplied)
White
• Disconnect the supplied FM antenna, and connect to an
outdoor FM antenna using a 75 Ω wire with coaxial type
connector (IEC or DIN45325).
• Make sure the antenna conductors do not touch any other
terminals, connecting cords and power cord. Also, keep the
antennas away from metallic parts of the System,
connecting cords, and the AC power cord. This could cause
poor reception.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
@ Front main speakers and matrix surround
To remove the speaker grilles of the main speakers
speakers
Holes
Projection
• When connecting the speaker cords, match their polarity
with that of the speaker terminals: red/white to (+) and black
to (–).
1
2
Speaker grille
3
4
¤ Powered subwoofer
From right front main
speaker
From the powered subwoofer
(not supplied)
From left front
main speaker
# To adjust the voltage selector
Use a screwdriver to rotate the
voltage selector so that the voltage
mark is pointing at the same voltage
as where you are plugging in the unit.
(See also the back cover page.)
From left matrix
surround speaker
From right matrix
surround speaker
Voltage mark
• Use only speakers with the same speaker impedance as
indicated by the speaker terminals on the rear of the System.
• The front main speakers are magnetically shielded to avoid
color distortions on TVs. However, if not installed properly,
it may cause color distortions. So, pay attention to the
following when installing the speakers.
DO NOT plug in before setting the voltage
selector and all connection procedures are
complete.
– When placing the speakers near a TV set, turn off the
TV’s main power switch or unplug it before installing the
speakers.
Then wait at least 30 minutes before turning on the TV’s
main power switch again.
Some TVs may still be affected even though you have
followed the above instruction. If this happens, move the
speakers away from the TV.
Preparing the remote control
When using the remote
control, point the top of the
remote control toward the
remote sensor as directly as
possible. If you operate it
from a diagonal position,
theoperatingrange(approx.
• DO NOT connect more than one speaker to
each terminal.
• DO NOT push or pull the speakers as this
will damage the foot spacers at the bottom
of the speakers.
5 m) may be shorter.
R6(SUM-3)/AA(15F)
• Dispose of batteries in the proper manner, according to
federal, state, and local regulations.
DO NOT recharge, short, disassemble or
heat the battery or dispose of it in a fire.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Display Indication
The indications on the display teach you a lot of things while
9 Tape operation indicators
you are operating the System,
• TAPE: lights when a tape is loaded in either deck A or B.
Before operating the System, be familiar with when and how
the indicator illuminates on the display.
•
(Reverse Mode): lights to indicate the current
Reverse Mode (see page 11).
• A: lights when a tape is in the deck A.
• B: lights when a tape is in the deck B.
1
2
3456 7
8
9
•
2 3 (tape direction):
– Lights to indicate the current tape running direction.
– Flashes slowly during playback and recording.
– Flashes quickly while rewinding a tape.
• REC: lights while recording.
p Disc operation indicators
• PROGRAM: lights when Program Play is activated.
• RANDOM: lights when Random Play is activated.
• REPEAT: lights when Repeat Play is activated.
• ALL DISC: lights when All Disc Repeat is activated.
• 1 DISC: lights when One Disc Repeat is activated.
• 1: lights when One Track/Chapter/Step Repeat is
activated.
p
q w e
r
t
y
u
i
o
; a
1 PROGRESSIVE indicator
• Lights when the progressive scanning mode is selected.
2 Karaoke operation indicators (see pages 31 to 33)
•
: lights when the Mic Mixing Mode is activated;
flashes when scoring function is in use.
/
q Main display
w TITLE indicator
• Lights to indicate the title number for DVD Video.
e Audio signal indicators
• Lights to indicate the incoming audio channel signals.
r GROUP indicator
• MIC: lights when the Mic Mixing Mode is activated;
flashes when scoring function is in use.
• ECHO: lights when the echo effect is activated.
• V.MASKING: lights when the Vocal Masking Mode is
activated.
3 Source signal indicators
• Lights to indicate the group number.
t CHAP. indicator
• Lights to indicate the chapter number.
y TRACK indicator
• Lights to indicate the track number.
u FILE indicator
• Lights to indicate the file number.
i Disc indicators
• DTS: lights when a source signal is DTS.
•
DIGITAL: lights when a source signal is Dolby
Digital.
• DVD: lights when DVD Video is detected.
• DVD AUDIO: lights when DVD Audio is detected.
• PCM: lights when a source signal is linear PCM.
4 BONUS indicator
• Lights when DVD Audio with bonus group is detected
(see page 18).
• 1 – 5: lights to indicate the current disc tray.
•
: lights when a disc is detected on the disc tray; rotates
during playback or paused.
5 B.S.P. indicator
• Lights when browsable still pictures on DVD Audio are
available (see page 17).
o Sound Mode indicators (see page 13)
• S.MODE: lights when one of the Sound Modes
(Surround/SEA/User Modes) is activated (for Surround
6 RESUME indicator
• Lights when Resume is activated (see page 37).
7 Timer indicators
mode,
also lights).
• DSP MODE: lights when one of the Surround Modes is
activated.
•
: lights when Daily Timer or Recording Timer stands
by or is working or being set.
; FM reception indicators
• SLEEP: lights when the Sleep Timer is activated.
• DAILY: lights when the Daily Timer stands by; flashes
while working or being set.
• REC: lights when the Recording Timer stands by; flashes
while working or being set.
• ST (stereo): lights while an FM stereo station with
sufficient signal strength is tuned in.
• MONO: lights while receiving an FM stereo station in
monaural.
a 3D PHONIC indicator
8 DVD LEVEL 1/2/3 indicators
• Lights when 3D Phonic is activated (see page 14).
• Lights to indicate the DVD Video increase level.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Daily Operations—Playback
¥ Turn on the power.
In this manual, the operation using the remote control
The STANDBY lamp on the main unit goes off.
is mainly explained; however, you can use the buttons
and controls on the main unit if they have the same (or
similar) name and marks.
• Without pressing
AUDIO, the System also turns
on by pressing one of the source select buttons in the
next step.
ø Select the source.
Playback automatically starts if the selected source is
ready to start playback.
• If you press AUX, start playback source on the external
component.
1
AUDIO
DISC 1 –
DISC 5
TV
π Adjust the volume.
2
[ Operate the target source as explained
3
FM MODE /
later.
MENU
TOP MENU
/ / / /
ENTER
To turn off (stand by) the system
The STANDBY lamp on the main unit
lights in red.
• A small amount of power is always
consumed even while on standby.
AUDIO
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
GROUP/TITLE
10 keys
7
9
10
+10
RETURN
REVERSE
MODE
For private listening
Connect a pair of headphones to the PHONES jack on the
main unit. The sound will no longer come out of the
speakers. Be sure to turn down the volume before
connecting or putting the headphones.
• Disconnecting the headphones will activate the
speakers again.
SET
AUDIO
1
2
DO NOT turn off (stand by) the System with
the volume set to an extremely high level;
Otherwise, the sudden blast of sound can
damage your hearing, speakers and/or
headphones when you turn on the System or
start playback.
AUX
DVD/CD
TAPE-A
TAPE-B
FM/AM
Canceling the Demonstration
Main Unit
ONLY
2
sec.
DEMO OFF
AUDIO VOL
3
DEMO START
To start the demonstration, select DEMO START.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
Listening to the Radio
INFO
If the received FM station is hard to listen
To select the AM tuner interval spacing
The MONO indicator lights on the
display. Reception will improve though
stereo effect is lost—monaural reception
mode.
Main Unit
ONLY
FM MODE
Some countries space AM stations 9 kHz apart, and other
countries use 10 kHz spacing.
To restore the stereo effect, press the
button again (the MONO indicator goes
off).
1 Select “AM,” then turn off (stand by) the System.
FM
AM
Remote
ONLY
To preset stations
You can preset 30 FM and 15 AM stations.
• To cancel the operation during process, press CANCEL.
2 Select the AM tuner interval spacing.
To select 9 kHz:
1 Tune in to a station you want to preset.
• You can also store the monaural reception mode for FM
preset stations if selected.
2 Start presetting.
SET
(holding then...)
To select 10 kHz:
3 Select a preset number.
Examples:
1
2
5
8
0
3
To select preset number 5, press 5.
To select preset number 15, press +10,
then 5.
To select preset number 30, press +10,
+10, then 10.
4
6
7
9
(holding then...)
10
+10
• You can also use +/– buttons.
To select the band (FM/AM)
FM/AM
FM
AM
4 Store the station.
To tune in to a station
While FM or AM is selected...
SET
1
sec.
Increases the frequencies.
Decreases the frequencies.
To tune in to a preset station
1 Select the band (FM or AM).
FM/AM
FM
AM
Frequency starts changing on the display.
When a station (frequency) with sufficient signal strength is
tuned in, the frequency search stops.
• When you repeatedly press the button, the frequency
changes step by step.
To stop searching manually, press either button.
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Select a preset number.
On-screen guide icons
• During disc playback, the following icons may appear for
a while on the TV screen:
Examples:
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
To select preset number 5, press 5.
To select preset number 15, press
+10, then 5.
To select preset number 30, press
+10, +10, then 10.
Appears at the beginning of a scene containing
multi-angle views.
7
9
10
+10
Appears at the beginning of a scene containing
multi-audio languages.
• You can also use 4/¢
buttons on the remote control or
PRESET +/– buttons on the main
unit.
Appears at the beginning of a scene containing
multi-subtitle languages.
• The following icons will be also shown on the TV screen
to indicate your current operation.
,
,
,
,
,
Playing Back a Disc
Before operating a disc, be familiar how a disc is recorded.
INFO
• To deactivate the on-screen guide icons, see “ON
SCREEN GUIDE” on page 37.
• DVD Video comprises of “Titles” which includes
“
“
“
Chapters,” DVD Audio/MP3/WMA comprise of
Groups” which includes “Tracks,” JPEG comprises of
Groups” which includes “Files,” and CD/SVCD/VCD
To select a disc
DISC 1
DISC 2
DISC 3
comprise of only “Tracks.”
• For JPEG playback, see page 27.
DISC 4
DISC 5
To insert discs
Main Unit
ONLY
Playback starts.
Remote
ONLY
To select a title/group
While playing a disc...
1
2
3
6
GROUP/TITLE
4
5
8
0
• When using an 8 cm disc, place it on the inner circle of the
disc tray.
7
9
To close the disc tray, press the same 0 again.
• If you press 3 for the same tray, the disc tray closes
automatically and playback starts.
10
+10
To start:
To pause:
To stop:
To select a chapter/track
While playing a disc...
DVD/CD
FM MODE
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
or
Playback of the
To release it, press
7
9
current disc starts. DVD/CD 3.
• First time you press
4, you can go back
to the beginning of the
current chapter/track.
10
+10
While playing DVD/SVCD/VCD/MP3: This System can
store the stop point, and when you start playback again by
pressing DVD/CD 3, it starts from the position where you
have stopped—Resume Play. (RESUME indicator lights up
when you stop playback.)
To stop completely while Resume is activated, press 7
twice. (To cancel Resume, see “RESUME” on page 37.)
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7 For SVCD/VCD with PBC
While playing a disc with PBC, “PBC” appears on the
display instead of the playing time.
To locate a particular portion
While playing a disc except MP3/WMA...
When disc menu appears on the TV screen, select an item on
the menu. Playback of the selected item starts.
Examples:
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
To select number 5, press 5.
To select number 15, press +10,
then 5.
To select number 30, press +10,
+10, then 10.
• No sound comes out while searching on DVD Video/
SVCD/VCD.
To return to normal playback, press DVD/CD 3.
7
9
10
+10
Remote
ONLY
T
o select an item directly
You can select a title/chapter/track directly and start
playback.
• For DVD Video, you can select a title before starting
playback, while you can select a chapter after starting
To move to the next or
previous page of the
current menu:
To return to the previous
menu:
playback
.
RETURN
Examples:
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
To select number 5, press 5.
To select number 15, press +10,
then 5.
To select number 30, press +10,
+10, then 10.
7
9
To cancel PBC
10
+10
Remote
ONLY
To play back by using the disc menu
You can operate the disc play using the disc menu.
You can also cancel PBC by pressing the 10 keys to start
playback when disc menu is not shown on the TV screen.
To reactivate PBC, press 7, then press 4.
7 For DVD Video/DVD Audio
1 Show the disc menu.
TOP MENU/PG
MENU/PL
or
2 Select an item on the disc menu.
ENTER
• On some discs, you can also select items by entering the
number using the 10 keys.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change the tape running direction
Playing Back a Tape
TAPE-A
TAPE-B
3 (forward
2 (reverse
)
)
To insert a tape
You can play back type I tapes.
• The use of C-120 or longer tape is not recommended.
Push
To reverse the tape automatically
REVERSE
MODE
Tape is reversed, and playback repeats until
you stop it.
Insert
Tape is not reversed. When the current side of
the tape reaches its end, playback stops.
Tape is reversed once.
To playback the both decks A and B continuously
—Relay Play
When the cassettes are set in the both decks...
Close
REVERSE
MODE
TAPE-A
TAPE-B
To start:
To stop:
TAPE-A
TAPE-B
You can start playback of either deck A or B.
To rewind tape:
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Daily Operations—Sound&Other Adjustments
Adjusting the Volume
Remote Control
The volume level can be adjusted in 32 steps (VOLUME
MIN, VOLUME 1 – VOLUME 30, and VOLUME MAX).
Remote control:
Main unit:
AUDIO
AUDIO VOL
TV
AUDIO VOL +/–
/ / / /
ENTER
Reinforcing the Bass Sound
To adjust the bass level gradually—ACTIVE
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
BASS EX.
You can select the bass level from level 0 (minimum) to
level 2 (maximum).
7
9
VFP /
SCAN MODE
10
+10
DVD LEVEL
Remote control:
Main unit:
ACTIVE
SOUND MODE
BASS EX.
3D PHONIC
+/–
L/R BALANCE
RHYTHM AX
ACTIVE
BASS EX
SET
CLOCK/TIMER
SLEEP
SETTING
DIMMER
Main unit
To emphasize rhythmical feeling—RHYTHM AX
This function emphasizes bass attack feeling.
RHYTHM AX
ON
OFF
ACTIVE BASS
EX.
VOLUME
Remote
ONLY
Adjusting the Output Balance
You can adjust the speaker output balance.
RHYTHM AX
SOUND MODE
DVD LEVEL
1 Enter the balance setting mode.
SET
SETTING
LR BALANCE
FANFARE
2 Adjust the balance.
L
BALANCE
R
R –6
0
L –6
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
Selecting the Sound Modes
You can select one of the preset Sound Modes.
Creating Your Own Sound
Modes—User Mode
INFO
SEA Modes
You can adjust the preset Sound Modes to create your own
Sound Modes which suit your taste. The changed settings can
be stored as the USER1, USER2 and USER3 Modes.
• If you want to add surround elements into your Sound
Mode, select one of the Surround Modes to adjust.
SOUND
MODE
ROCK POP CLASSIC
STADIUM HALL
OFF
DANCE MULTI
Surround Modes*
SEA (Sound Effect Amplifier) Modes
While the Sound Mode name is shown on the display...
ROCK
Boosts low and high frequency. Good for
acoustic music (initial setting).
1 Enter the SEA Control Mode.
SET
POP
Good for vocal music.
CLASSIC
User Modes
USER1/2/3
Good for classical music.
2
Your individual mode stored in memory.
See the next column “Creating Your Own
Sound Modes—User Mode.”
SET
Multi Mode
3 Adjust the SEA pattern.
1 Adjust BASS.
MULTI
Outputs the same sound from the
surround speakers as the sound output
from the main speakers.
2 Adjust TREBLE.
L
BALANCE
R
SET
Surround Modes*
DANCE
HALL
Increases resonance and bass.
Adds depth and brilliance to the sound.
STADIUM
Adds clarity and spreads the sound, as in
an outdoor stadium.
• You can adjust the bass and treble level from –5 to
+5.
*Surround elements are added to the SEA elements to create
being-there feeling in your room.
4 Select one of the User Modes.
L
BALANCE
R
To cancel the Sound Mode, select “OFF.”
USER1
USER2
USER3
5 Store the setting.
SET
• The Sound Mode changes to the one you have stored.
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Creating 3-dimensional Sound
Changing the Color System and
Remote
Remote
ONLY
ONLY
Field—3D Phonic
INFO
Scanning Mode
INFO
While playing a disc...
You can select the video output to match it to the color
system of your TV (NTSC or PAL).
3D PHONIC
• If you connect a progressive TV through the
COMPONENT jacks, you can enjoy a high quality picture
from the built-in DVD player by selecting progressive
scanning mode.
• You can change the setting only while the disc playback is
stopped.
ACTION
OFF
DRAMA
3D PHONIC
3D PHONIC
3D PHONIC
3D PHONIC
THEATER
On the TV screen
1 Enter the color system setting mode.
3D ACTION
3D DRAMA
Suitable for action movies and sports
programs.
4
sec.
SCAN MODE
VFP
Creates natural and warm sound. Enjoy
movies in a relaxed mood.
3D THEATER Enjoy sound effects like in a major
theater.
2 Select the color system and scanning mode.
L
BALANCE
R
NTSC
PAL
PAL PROG
NTSC PROG
Presetting Automatic DVD Video Sound
Increase Level
NTSC / PAL NTSC or PAL Interlaced scanning. For
a conventional PAL or NTSC TV.
The DVD Video sound is sometimes recorded at a lower
level than for other discs and sources. You can set the
increase level for the currently loaded DVD Video, so you
do not have to adjust the volume when you change the
source.
NTSC / PAL NTSC or PAL Progressive scanning.
PROG
For a progressive NTSC or PAL TV.
3 Store the setting.
SET
DVD LEVEL
DVD LEVEL1
DVD LEVEL2
DVD LEVEL3
As the number increases, sound level also increases.
• The initial setting is “DVD LEVEL3.”
Remote
ONLY
Changing the Picture Tone
While viewing a playback pictures on the TV, you can select
the preset picture tone, or adjust it and store your own
preference.
To select a preset picture tone
1 While playing, display VFP setting screen.
NORMAL
SCAN MODE
GAMMA
0
0
0
0
0
0
VFP
BRIGHTNESS
CONTRAST
SATURATION
TINT
SHARPNESS
On the TV screen
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Select a preset picture tone.
NORMAL
Remote
ONLY
Changing the Display Brightness
CINEMA
USER1
DIMMER
DIMMER 1 DIMMER 2
USER2
DIMMER OFF
(Canceled)
DIMMER 1
DIMMER 2
Dims the display and the illumination
on the main unit*.
NORMAL
CINEMA
Normally select this.
Suitable for a movie source.
Dims the display (same as DIMMER 1)
and turns off the illumination on the
main unit*.
USER1/USER2 You can adjust parameters and can
store the settings (see below).
*Except for the RHYTHM AX and KARAOKE SCORING
lamps.
To adjust the picture tone
1 Select “USER1” or “USER2.”
Remote
• Follow steps 1 and 2 explained on the previous page.
ONLY
Setting the Clock
INFO
2 Select a parameter you want to adjust.
Without setting the build-in clock, you cannot use any
timers.
• To exit from the clock setting, press CLOCK/TIMER as
required.
ENTER
• To correct a misentry during the process, press CANCEL.
You can return to the previous step.
1 Activate clock setting mode.
GAMMA
Adjust if the neutral color is bright
or dark. The brightness of dark and
bright portions is maintained
(–3 to +3).
CLOCK/
TIMER
BRIGHTNESS Adjust if the picture is bright or
• If you have already adjusted the clock before, press the
button repeatedly until the clock time starts flashing.
dark as a whole (–8 to +8).
CONTRAST
Adjust if the far and near position
is unnatural (–7 to +7).
2 Adjust the hour, then minute.
L
BALANCE
R
SET
SATURATION Adjust if the picture is whitish or
blackish (–7 to +7).
TINT
Adjust if the human skin color is
unnatural (–7 to +7).
Now the built-in clock starts working.
SHARPNESS
Adjust if the picture is indistinct
(–8 to +8).
Remote
ONLY
Turning Off the Power Automatically
3 Adjust the parameter.
With Sleep Timer, you can fall asleep while listening to
music.
1 Specify the time (in minutes).
ENTER
SLEEP
10
20
30
60
150
90
Canceled
120
4 Repeat steps 2 to 3 to adjust other parameters.
To erase the VFP screen, press VFP again.
2 Wait until the set time goes off.
To check the time remaining until the shut-off time
SLEEP
• If you press the button repeatedly, you can
change the shut-off time.
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unique DVD/VCD Operations
Remote
ONLY
Selecting the Sound Track
INFO
Remote Control
For DVD Video: While playing back a chapter containing
audio languages, you can select the language to listen to.
For DVD Audio: While playing back a track containing
audio channels, you can select the audio channel to listen to.
For DVD-VR/Karaoke SVCD/VCD: When playing back a
track, you can select the audio channel to play.
• You can also select the audio track using the on-screen bar
(see page 23).
AUDIO
TV
DVD/CD 3
While playing DVD Video...
AUDIO
GLANCE
BACK
/ / / /
ENTER
Ex.:
1/3
2/3
3/3
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
10 keys
ENGLISH
FRENCH
JAPANESE
AUDIO
SUB TITLE
ANGLE
7
9
10
+10
1/3
2/3
FRENCH
3/3
JAPANESE
ENGLISH
ZOOM
PAGE
While playing a DVD-VR, SVCD, or VCD...
SVCD
ST1
ST2
L2
L1
AUDIO
R2
R1
DVD-VR/VCD
ST
L
R
ST1/ST2/ST To listen to normal stereo (2 channel)
playback.
L1/L2/L
R1/R2/R
To listen to the left audio channel.
To listen to the right audio channel.
• SVCD can have 4 audio channels. Karaoke SVCD usually
uses these 4 channels to record two 2-channel recordings
(ST1/ST2).
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
Remote
ONLY
Selecting the Subtitle Language
Selecting the View Angle
For DVD Video: While playing back a chapter containing
subtitles in different languages, you can select the subtitle
language to display on the TV screen.
For DVD Video only: While playing back a chapter
containing multi-view angles, you can view the same scene
from different angles.
For DVD-VR: While playing, you can turn on or off the
subtitle.
• You can also select the view angle using the on-screen bar
(see page 23).
For SVCD: While playing, you can select the subtitles even
if no subtitles are recorded on the disc.
While playing back...
• You can also select the subtitle language using the on-
screen bar (see page 23).
ANGLE
While playing a DVD Video...
Ex.:
1 Display the subtitle selection window.
1/3
2/3
3/3
SUB TITLE
1
2
3
1/3
2/3
3/3
1
2
3
2 Select the subtitle language.
Ex.:
Remote
ONLY
Reviewing the Playback Quickly
1/3
2/3
3/3
For DVD Video/DVD-VR only: You can move the
playback position to 10 seconds before the current position
(only within the same title)—Glance Back.
ENGLISH
FRENCH
JAPANESE
1/3
ENGLISH
2/3
FRENCH
3/3
JAPANESE
While playing back...
GLANCE BACK
While playing a DVD-VR...
SUB TITLE
Remote
ONLY
Selecting Browsable Still Pictures
For DVD Audio only: While playing back a track linked to
browsable still pictures (B.S.P.), you can select the still
picture (turn the page) to be shown on the TV screen.
• If a track is linked to browsable still pictures (B.S.P.), they
are usually shown in turn automatically during playback.
• You can also select the page using the on-screen bar (see
page 23).
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
While playing an SVCD...
SUB TITLE
Each time you press the button, the still
picture changes one after another (if
available).
PAGE
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
Slow-motion playback
Playing Back Bonus Group
INFO
For DVD Audio only: Some DVD Audios have a special
group called “bonus group” whose contents are not open to
the public.
1 While playing...
FM MODE
• To play back a bonus group, you have to enter the specific
“key number” (a kind of password) for the bonus group.
The way of getting the key number depends on the disc.
Still picture playback starts.
2 Select slow motion speed.
1 Select the bonus group.
• The bonus group is usually recorded as the last group
(for example, if a disc contains 4 groups including a
bonus group, “group 4” is the bonus group).
• For how to select the group, see “To select a title/group”
on page 9.
1/32
1/32
1/16
1/16
1/8
1/8
1/4
1/4
1/2
1/2
2 Enter the key number.
1
2
5
8
0
3
4
6
* Not available for DVD-VR/SVCD/VCD.
ENTER
7
9
To resume normal playback, press DVD/CD 3.
10
+10
Remote
ONLY
Zoom
3 Follow the interactive instruction shown on the TV
1 While playing...
screen.
ZOOM 1
ZOOM 2
ZOOM 3
ZOOM 4
ZOOM 5
ZOOM
To cancel the key number entry, press 7.
ZOOM OFF
ZOOM 6
Special Picture Playback
INFO
As the number increases, magnification also increases.
• For JPEG, see page 28.
Still picture playback
While playing...
2 Move the zoomed-in position.
FM MODE
Still picture playback starts.
To resume normal playback, press DVD/CD 3.
Frame-by-frame playback
1 While playing...
FM MODE
To resume normal playback, press ZOOM repeatedly until
“ZOOM OFF” appears on the TV screen.
Still picture playback starts.
2 Advance the still picture frame by frame.
FM MODE
To resume normal playback, press DVD/CD 3.
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced Disc Operations
Remote
ONLY
Programming the Playing Order
—Program Play
Remote Control
INFO
You can arrange the playing order of the tracks (up to 99)
before you start playback.
AUDIO
TV
1 Before starting playback, activate Program Play.
PLAY MODE
DVD/CD 3
PROGRAM RANDOM
Canceled
/
/
/
On the display
/
PROGRAM
No Disc
1
Group/Title
Track/Chapter
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
10 keys
7
9
10
+10
USE NUMERIC KEYS TO PROGRAM TRACKS.
USE CANCEL TO DELETE THE PROGRAM.
PLAY MODE
REPEAT
CANCEL
On the TV screen
2 Select chapters or tracks you want for Program Play.
1 Select a disc number.
2 Select a title or group number.
3 Select a chapter or track number.
Main unit
To enter the numbers:
Examples:
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
To enter number 5, press 5.
To enter number 15, press +10,
then 5.
To enter number 30, press +10,
+10, then 10.
7
9
10
+10
DVD/CD
DISC 1 0
3 Repeat the above step 2 until you finish what you want
to program.
4 Start playback.
Playback starts in the order you
have programmed.
DVD/CD
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
To skip a track:
To pause:
To stop*:
Playing at Random—Random Play
FM MODE
You can play the contents of all the loaded discs at random.
• Random Play cannot be used for some DVDs.
1 Before starting playback, activate Random Play.
Torelease, press
DVD/CD 3.
PLAY MODE
PROGRAM RANDOM
Canceled
*Resume does not work for Program Play.
Remote
ONLY
To check the programmed contents
Before or after playback...
2 Start playback.
in the reverse order
Playback of the current disc
DVD/CD
starts in a random order. When
all chapters/tracks on the current
disc are played, playback of the
next disc starts. Random Play
ends when all loaded discs are
played.
in the programmed order
To modify the program
Before or after playback...
To erase the last step:
To erase the entire
program:
To skip:
To pause:
To stop:
FM MODE
CANCEL
To go to the
beginning of the
current track,
press 4.
To release, press
DVD/CD 3.
To add steps in the program:
Repeat step 2 on page 19.
To exit from Program Play
Before or after playback...
To exit from Random Play
Before or after playback...
PLAY MODE
PROGRAM RANDOM
Canceled
PLAY MODE
PROGRAM RANDOM
Canceled
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
Playing Repeatedly—Repeat Play
REPEAT 1
REPEAT
Repeats the current chapter/track.
Repeats the current title/group.
Repeats the current disc.
You can repeat playback.
• You can also select the repeat mode using the on-screen bar
(see page 23).
• The indicator(s) lights on the display as follows to indicate
the current repeat mode.
REPEAT 1
DISC*
REPEAT ALL Repeats all discs.
DISC*
•
For DVD Video:
While playing...
REPEAT ALL Repeats all programmed tracks.
REPEAT
REPEAT 1
REPEAT
*These modes may not work correctly for DVD Video.
Canceled
REPEAT ALL DISC
Prohibiting Disc Ejection
Main Unit
ONLY
•
For DVD Audio:
—Child Lock
While playing or before playback...
REPEAT
You can lock the disc trays so that no one can eject the
loaded discs.
• This operation is possible only when the source is the disc
player.
REPEAT 1
REPEAT
Canceled
REPEAT ALL DISC
While in standby mode...
•
For MP3/WMA:
While playing or before playback...
REPEAT
REPEAT 1
Canceled
REPEAT
REPEAT 1 DISC
REPEAT ALL DISC
(holding then...)
•
For CD/SVCD/VCD:
While playing or before playback (without PBC for SVCD/
VCD)...
To cancel the prohibition, repeat the same procedure.
“UNLOCKED” appears on the display.
REPEAT
REPEAT 1
REPEAT 1 DISC
Canceled
REPEAT ALL DISC
•
For Random Play:
While playing or before playback...
REPEAT
REPEAT 1
REPEAT 1 DISC
Canceled
REPEAT ALL DISC
•
For Program Play:
While playing or before playback...
REPEAT
REPEAT 1
REPEAT ALL
Canceled
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
On-Screen Disc Operations
On-screen Bar Information
Remote control
You can check the information on disc (except for MP3/
WMA/JPEG disc) and use some functions through the on-
screen bar.
AUDIO
TV
On-screen bars
DVD Video
DVD/CD 3
1
2
3
Dolby D
3/2.1ch
DISC 1 TITLE
CHAP.
2
CHAP
3
TOTAL 1:01:58
1/1
DVD-VIDEO
TIME
OFF
1/3
1/3
PG
PL
4
/ / / /
ENTER
DVD Audio
ON SCREEN
1
2
3
PPCM
DISC
2
GROUP 14 TRACK 23 TIME 0:15:58
PAGE
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
DVD-AUDIO
3/2.1ch
10 keys
OFF
TRACK
1/3
1/3
TIME
7
9
10
+10
4
ZOOM
DVD-VR
REPEAT
1
2
3
Dolby D
2/0.0ch
DISC
1
PG
2
CHAP
3
TOTAL 0:01:58
DVD-VR
TIME
OFF
CHAP.
ST
ON
4
SVCD
1
2
3
3
3
TRACK
3
TIME
0:04:58
DISC
3
SVCD
TIME
OFF
ST1
-/
4
4
VCD
1
2
DISC
4
TRACK
3
TIME
0:04:58
VCD
TIME
OFF
ST
4
CD
1
2
TRACK
3
TIME 0:04:58
DISC 5
CD
TIME
OFF
4
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
1 Disc type
O
perations Using the
2 Playback information
Indication Meanings
On-screen Bar
INFO
Basic operation procedure through the on-screen bar is as
follows:
Ex.: Selecting a subtitle (French) for DVD Video:
Dolby D/
PPCM
Audio format
3/2.1 ch/
2.0/0 ch
Channel number
While a disc is selected as the source...
DISC
TITLE
CHAP
1
Current disc
1 Display the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.
2
Current title
ON
Current chapter
Current group
Current track
Current title
3
SCREEN
Dolby D
DISC
1
1
TITLE
TITLE
2
CHAP
CHAP
3
TOTAL 1:01:58
DVD-VIDEO
3/2.1ch
GROUP
1
TRACK 14
Dolby D
3/2.1ch
DISC
2
3
TOTAL 1:01:58
1/1
DVD-VIDEO
TIME
OFF
CHAP.
1/3
1/3
PG
PL
2
2
Current play list
Time indications
Goes off
TOTAL1:25:58
3 Playback conditions
Indication Meanings
Playback
2 Select (highlight) the item you want.
/
/
Forward/Reverse search
Forward/Reverse slow-motion
Pause
Stop
Dolby D
DISC 1 TITLE
CHAP.
2
CHAP
3
TOTAL 1:01:58
1/1
DVD-VIDEO
3/2.1ch
TIME
OFF
1/3
1/3
4 Operation icons (on the pull-down menu)
3 Display the pop-up window.
Indication Meanings
TIME
Select to change the time indication
(see also page 24).
1
TITLE
2
CHAP
3
TOTAL 1:01:58
ENTER
1/3
1/3 1/1
Select to repeat playback (see also
pages 21, 24 and 25).
ENGLISH
Select for time search (see also
page 25).
4 Select the desired option in the pop-up window.
CHAP.
Select for chapter search (see also
page 26).
1
TITLE
2
CHAP
3
TOTAL 1:01:58
1/1
1/3
2/3
TRACK
Select for track search (see also
page 26).
FRENCH
Select to change the audio language or
channel (see also page 16).
1/3
5 Finish the setting.
Pop-up window goes off.
Select to change subtitle language (see
also page 17).
1/3
1/3
ENTER
Select to change view angle (see also
page 17).
Select to change the page (see also
page 17).
PAGE 1/15
To erase the on-screen bar
ON
SCREEN
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change the time information
You can change the time information in the on-screen bar
and the display window on the main unit.
Repeat Play
• See also page 21.
1 While playing a disc (without PBC for SVCD/VCD),
display the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.
• Except for DVD Video: Repeat Play can be selected
before starting playback.
1 Display the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.
Dolby D
3/2.1ch
DISC 1
T
I
TL
E
2
CHAP
TOTAL 1:01:58
3
DVD-VIDEO
TIME
O
F
F
CHAP.
1
/3/1
1
/
3
1
2 Select
.
3 Display the pop-up window.
2 Make sure TIME is selected (highlighted).
3 Change the time indication.
Dolby D
T
I
TL
E
2
CHAP
TOTAL 1:01:58
3
DISC 1
DVD-VIDEO
3/2.1ch
TIME
O
F
F
CHAP.
1
/3/1
1
/
3
1
ENTER
OFF
4 Select the repeat mode you want.
ALL
Repeats all discs or all programmed
tracks.
TOTAL
T.REM
TIME*
Elapsed disc time.
Remaining disc time.
A-B
Repeats a desired portion (see the next
page).
Elapsed playing time of the current
chapter/track.
TITLE
Repeats the current title.
REM*
Remaining time of the current chapter/
track.
GROUP
DISC
Repeats the current group.
Repeats the disc (except for DVD).
Repeats the current chapter.
Repeats the current track.
*Not available for DVD-VR.
CHAPTER
TRACK*
PG
To erase the on-screen bar
Repeats the current title (for DVD-VR
only). See also page 28.
ON
SCREEN
PL
Repeats the current play list (for DVD-
VR only). See also page 28.
OFF
Cancels Repeat Play.
*During Program Play or Random Play, “STEP”
appears.
5 Finish the setting.
Pop-up window goes off.
ENTER
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A-B Repeat
Time Search
You can move to a particular point by specifying the elapsed
playing time from the beginning.
1 While playing, display the on-screen bar with the pull-
down menu.
1 While playing (without PBC for SVCD/VCD), display
the on-screen bar with the pull-down menu.
• Except for DVD: Time Search can be used before
starting playback.
2 Select
3 Display the pop-up window.
.
Dolby D
3/2.1ch
DISC 1
T
I
TL
E
2
CHAP
TOTAL 1:01:58
3
DVD-VIDEO
TIME
O
F
F
CHAP.
1
/3/1
1
/
3
1
2 Select
.
OFF
3 Display the pop-up window.
Dolby D
CHAP
TOTAL 1:01:58
3
DISC 1
T
I
TL
E
2
DVD-VIDEO
4 Select “A-B”.
3/2.1ch
TIME
O
F
F
CHAP.
TIME _ : _ _ : _ _
1
/3/1
1
/
3
1
Dolby D
DISC 1
T
I
TL
E
2
CHAP
TOTAL 1:01:58
3
DVD-VIDEO
3/2.1ch
TIME
O
F
F
CHAP.
1
/3/1
1
/
3
1
4 Enter the time.
A–B
You can specify the time in hours/minutes/seconds.
Examples:
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
5 Select the start point (A).
To move to a point of 1 (hours):
02 (minutes): 00 (seconds), press
1, 0, 2, 0, then 0.
Dolby D
3/2.1ch
T
I
TL
E
2
H
C
DISC 1
DVD-VIDEO
ENTER
7
9
TIME
A
-
CHAP.
1
/3
To move to a point of 54
(minutes): 00 (seconds), press 0,
5, 4, 0, then 0.
10
+10
• After selecting the starting point (A), you can search for
the end point using ¡.
6 Select the end point (B).
• It is always required to enter the hour digit (even “0”
hour), but it is not required to enter trailing zeros (the
last two digits in the examples above).
• To correct a misentry, press cursor 2 to erase the last
entry.
A-B Repeat starts. The selected
ENTER
portion plays repeatedly.
5 Finish the setting.
The System starts playing from the
specified time.
To cancel A-B Repeat, repeat steps 1 to 3, and select “OFF”
in step 4.
ENTER
To erase the on-screen bar
ON
To erase the on-screen bar
SCREEN
ON
SCREEN
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter/Track Search
You can search for the number of the item to play.
For DVD Video/DVD-VR: Chapter
For DVD Audio: Track
Remote
ONLY
Operations on the Control
Screen
INFO
For DVD-VR/MP3/WMA/JPEG: You can search for and
play the desired items through the control screen.
1 While playing, display the on-screen bar with the pull-
down menu.
CHAP.
TRACK
2 Select
or
.
Control screen for DVD-RW/RAM in DVD-VR
format
The control screen is superimposed on the TV screen when
you call up Original Program (PG) or Play List (PL).
To select playback type
3 Display the pop-up window.
Dolby D
3/2.1ch
T
I
TL
E
2
CHAP
TOTAL 1:01:58
3
DISC 1
DVD-VIDEO
TIME
OFF
CHAP.
CHAPTER
1/3/1
1/
3
1
_
To select the Original
Program:
To select the Play List:
4 Enter the desired chapter/track number.
Examples:
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
TOP MENU/PG
MENU/PL
To select chapter/track 5, press 5.
To select chapter/track 15, press
1, then 5.
7
9
To select chapter/track 30, press
3, then 0.
10
+10
When Original Program is selected.
ORIGINAL PROGRAM
No Date
Ch
Time
Title
1 25/04/04 4ch 19:00
2 17/05/04 8ch 10:30
3 22/05/04 8ch 17:00
4 26/05/04 L-1 13:19
5 20/06/04 4ch 22:00
JVC DVD World 2004
• To correct a misentry, press the 10 keys until the
desired number is shown in the pop-up window.
Music Festival
children 001
5 Finish the setting.
6 25/06/04 L-1
8:23
children 002
The System starts playing the
searched chapter or track.
ENTER
1 2
3
4
5
6
When Play List is selected.
PLAY LIST
To erase the on-screen bar
No Date
Chap Length
Title
My JVC World
1 25/05/04 001 1:03:16
2 17/06/04 005 1:35:25
3 20/06/04 003 0:10:23
4 25/06/04 001 0:07:19
ON
Favorite music
children001-002
SCREEN
1 7
8
9
5
6
1 Title/Play list number
2 Recording date
3 Recording source (TV station, the input terminal of the
recording equipment, etc.)
4 Start time of recording
5 Title of the program/play list*
6 Highlight bar (current selection)
7 Creating date of play lists
8 Number of chapters
9 Playback time
*The title of the original program or play list may not be
displayed depending on the recording equipment.
To erase the control screen for DVD-VR, press ENTER.
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To move the highlight (green) bar between group list and
track list (for MP3/WMA/JPEG):
Control screen for MP3/WMA/JPEG disc
The control screen automatically appears on the TV screen
when you load an MP3, WMA, or JPEG disc.
Moves the bar to the track list.
Moves the bar to the group list.
Ex.: When the MP3 disc is loaded.
6
7
8
REPEAT TRACK Time : 00:00:14
1
Group : 2 / 3
Track : 5 / 14 (Total 41)
9
Blue
Red
Green
Cloudy.mp3
Fair.mp3
Fog.mp3
2
To select an item in the list:
Hail.mp3
Indian summer.mp3
Rain.mp3
Shower.mp3
Snow.mp3
Thunder.mp3
Typhoon.mp3
Wind.mp3
3
4
Move the highlight bar to a
desired item.
• If you move the highlight bar
while playing back DVD-VR/
MP3/WMA, the selected item
starts playback automatically.
Track Information
0
-
Title
Rain
Artist
5
Album
Winter sky.mp3
1 Current group number/total group number
2 Current group
To start playback
3 Group list
4 Current track
5 Track information (ID3 Tag Version 1.0: only for
MP3/WMA)
6 Repeat Play setting
For DVD-VR/MP3/WMA:
Playback starts with the selected
chapter/track.
ENTER
• Pressing DVD/CD 3 also starts
playback.
7 Elapsed playing time of the current track
(only for MP3/WMA)
For JPEG:
8 Operation mode icon
9 Current track number/total number of tracks in the
The selected track (still picture) is
displayed until you change it.
ENTER
current group (total number of tracks on the loaded
disc)
0 Highlight bar
- Track list
• If both types of files (MP3/WMA files and JPEG files)
are recorded on a disc, select the file type to play (see
page 36).
Slide-show playback starts.
DVD/CD
Each track (still picture) is shown on
the screen for a few seconds, then
changes one after another.
• Once you start playing back a JPEG track, the control
screen goes off.
• To cancel slide-show, and display the current still picture,
press 8.
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To stop playback
To zoom in the still picture (for JPEG)
1 During being paused...
ZOOM
ZOOM 1
ZOOM 2
ZOOM OFF
To repeat title/play list for DVD-VR
While playing or before starting playback...
For Original Program
As the number increases, magnification also increases.
2 Move the zoomed-in position.
REPEAT 1
CHAP)
REPEAT
PG)
REPEAT 1 DISC
DISC)
REPEAT
(
(
(
Canceled
REPEAT ALL DISC
(
OFF)
(
ALL)
For Play List
REPEAT 1
CHAP)
REPEAT
REPEAT
(
PL)
(
Canceled
REPEAT ALL DISC
To cancel Zoom, press ZOOM repeatedly until “ZOOM
OFF” appears on the TV screen.
(
OFF)
(
ALL)
REPEAT 1* Repeats the current chapter.
REPEAT* Repeats the current title/play list.
REPEAT 1 Repeats all titles on the current disc.
DISC*
REPEAT
Repeats all loaded discs.
ALL DISC
*Not available before starting playback.
To repeat slide-show for JPEG
While playing or before starting playback...
REPEAT
GROUP)
REPEAT 1 DISC
DISC)
REPEAT
(
(
Canceled
REPEAT ALL DISC
ALL)
(
OFF)
(
REPEAT
Repeats the current group.
REPEAT 1
DISC
Repeats all files on the current disc.
REPEAT ALL Repeats all loaded discs.
DISC
• For Repeat Play of MP3/WMA, see pages 21 and 24.
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording Operations
IMPORTANT
It may be unlawful to record or play back copyrighted
Main unit
material without the consent of the copyright owner.
Recording on a Tape
INFO
Main Unit
ONLY
You can use type I tapes for recording.
• To play a tape, see page 11.
FM/AM
DVD/CD
TAPE-A /
TAPE-B
DISC 1–5 3
DISC REC
START
1 Insert a recordable cassette in deck B.
REVERSE
MODE
Push
Insert
Close
REC
START/STOP
DUBBING
Deck A
Deck B
2 Check the tape running direction and Reverse Mode
settings on the display.
Tape direction
indicator
Reverse Mode indicator
Current source
To change the direction
3 (forward
2 (reverse
)
)
Change the Reverse Mode if necessary
To record on both sides.
• When using Reverse Mode, start
(
)
recording in the forward (3) direction.
To record on only one side.
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Start playing the source—“FM,” “AM,” “DVD/CD,”
“TAPE-A” or “AUX.”
Synchronized Disc Recording
INFO
Main Unit
ONLY
• When recording a disc, you can also use “Synchronized
Disc Recording” (see the right column).
• When recording from deck A, you can also use
“Dubbing” (see below).
You can start and stop both disc play and tape recording at
the same time.
1 Load a disc and insert a recordable cassette.
4 Start recording.
2 Check the tape running direction and Reverse Mode
settings on the display.
• See step 2 of “Recording on a Tape” on page 29.
3 Select the disc number you want to start recording
from.
To stop recording
or
For recording desired tracks on discs:
You can program tracks to record in your preferred order.
• Select Program Play (and make a program; see page 19)
without starting playback.
Dubbing Tapes
Main Unit
ONLY
4 Start recording.
1 Change the source to TAPE.
The disc playback and recording start
from the first track.
• The System automatically creates 4-
second blanks between the tunes
recorded on the tapes.
• When either disc play or recording ends, both disc player
and the cassette deck stop at the same time.
2 Insert the source cassette in deck A, and a recordable
cassette in deck B.
3 Check the tape running direction and Reverse Mode
settings on the display.
To record only your favorite track—One Track
Recording
You can specify tracks to be recorded on the tape while
listening to a disc (except for DVD Video).
While the track you want to record on the tape is
playing...
See step 2 of “Recording on a Tape” on page 29.
4 Start dubbing.
• When either tape playback or recording ends, both cassette
deck stop at the same time.
The disc player returns to the
beginning of that track and the track is
recorded on the tape. After recording,
the disc player and cassette deck
automatically stop.
To stop dubbing
To cancel while recording
or
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enjoying Karaoke
The functions described in this section are not available for
DVD Audio/DVD-VR.
Remote control
IMPORTANT
• Always set MIC LEVEL to MIN when connecting or
disconnecting the microphone.
• MIC LEVEL adjustment is valid for both microphones
connected to the MIC 1 and MIC 2 jacks.
KARAOKE
SCORING
AUDIO
TV
Source
buttons
DO NOT keep the microphones connected
while they are not in use.
AUDIO VOL +/–
Singing Along (Karaoke)
You can enjoy singing along (Karaoke) by using two
microphones.
• By pressing REC START/STOP, you can record your
singing-along.
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
10 keys
7
9
10
+10
1 Turn MIC LEVEL to MIN.
V.MASKING
ECHO
/
KEY
RESERVE
MIC MIX
+ / –
2 Connect the microphone(s) (not supplied) to the
SET
CANCEL
SETTING
MIC 1 and/or MIC 2 jack.
3 Activate the Mic Mixing Mode.
Main unit
MIC MIX
MIC MIX
MIC OFF
4 Start playing the source—“FM,” “AM,” “DVD/CD,”
“TAPE,” or “AUX.”
• For Karaoke SVCD/VCD: Select a desired audio
channel. See “Selecting the Sound Track” on page 16.
Source
buttons
5 Sing into the microphone.
VOLUME +/–
6 Adjust the MIC LEVEL and VOLUME.
KARAOKE
SCORING
To cancel from the Mic Mixing Mode, select “MIC OFF”
in step 3.
MIC 1
MIC 2
MIC LEVEL
To use only microphones, select “DVD/CD” in step 4, but
do not start playback.
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
To apply an echo to your voice
Scoring Your Karaoke Skill
INFO
While the Mic Mixing Mode is activated...
This System can score your Karaoke skill by comparing your
singing along with the vocal on the playback disc.
• This function is for disc playback only.
• It is recommended to select the sound track as follows (see
page 16):
ECHO
ECHO 1
ECHO 0
(Canceled)
ECHO 2
ECHO 3
ECHO 4
For DVD Video: Select the sound track with vocal.
For SVCD/VCD: Select “ST,” “ST1,” or “ST2.”
• It is recommended to sing for more than one and a half
minutes to make the scoring function work properly.
• As the number increases, echo level also increases.
Remote
ONLY
To adjust the Key (disc playback only)
While playing back...
KEY
KEY
#
1 Select “DVD/CD” as the source.
To raise the key (up to +6).
DVD/CD
To lower the key (up to –6).
To cancel the Key Control
2 Activate the scoring function.
KEY
KEY
#
KARAOKE
SCORING
KARAOKE SCORE BOARD
–6
0
+6
SINGING
On the TV screen
KEYCON
Playback of the first track starts and the Mic Mixing
Mode is automatically activated (with the last adjustment
for echo).
0
On the display
On the TV screen
3 Sing into the microphone.
See steps 1, 2, and 6 on page 31.
• Adjust echo level and key if you want (see the left
column).
• Key Control is also canceled when you deactivate the Mic
Mixing Mode, or select another track or disc.
Remote
ONLY
Reducing the Lead Vocal
INFO
After the song ends, playback stops and the score board
appears on the TV screen with fanfare.
—Vocal Masking
If you want to reduce the lead vocal (of any source except
DVD Audio/DVD-VR), you can use the Vocal Masking
Mode.
Ex.:
Your score
KARAOKE SCORE BOARD
85
POINTS
V. MASKING
V.MASK1
OFF
V.MASK2
Very good!!
1
2
3
ST
93
85
73
POINTS
ND
RD
POINTS
POINTS
V.MASK1
V.MASK2
Cancels vocal on stereo sources.
Cancels the right audio channel.
The latest top 3
To sing into microphone(s), activate the Mic Mixing Mode
(follow steps 1 to 3 and 6 on page 31).
To stop the playback in the middle of the song, press 7.
The scoring function is not canceled and your singing along
is scored if the playback time is more than one minute.
To cancel from the Vocal Masking Mode, select “OFF.”
To cancel the scoring function, press KARAOKE
SCORING. The screen on the TV disappears. (The Mic
Mixing Mode remains activated.)
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote
ONLY
4 Activate the Mic Mixing Mode.
To turn on/off the fanfare
MIC MIX
1 Enter the fanfare setting mode.
MIC MIX
MIC OFF
SET
SETTING
LR BALANCE
FANFARE
5 Start playback.
To start Karaoke
Program Play:
To start Karaoke
Program Play with the
scoring function:
2 Select the fanfare setting.
L
BALANCE
R
ON
KARAOKE
SCORING
DVD/CD
OFF
Playback starts in the order you have programmed.
• For the Karaoke Program Play with the scoring
function: Each time the song ends, playback stops and
the score board appears. Press KARAOKE SCORING
twice to start playback of the next track.
Remote
ONLY
Reserving Karaoke Songs
—Karaoke Program Play
INFO
You can determine the playback order of the titles or tracks
on the disc player. You can program up to 12 steps.
To check the programmed contents
1 Change the source to “DVD/CD.”
RESERVE
DVD/CD
The Karaoke reserve screen appears.
• You cannot display the Karaoke reserve screen while the
scoring function is in use.
2 Activate Karaoke Program Play.
RESERVE
No Disc Gr/Tt Tr/Chap
1
2
3
4
5
To modify the program
While the Karaoke reserve screen is shown on the TV...
To erase the unwanted step:
On the TV screen
CANCEL
• PROGRAM indicator flashes during this mode.
3 Select songs you want for Karaoke Program Play.
Press the number buttons to select a song in the following
order.
To erase the entire program, repeat the procedure.
To add steps in the program:
Repeat step 3.
1 Select a disc.
2 Select a title/group.
3 Select a chapter/track.
Examples:
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
To select number 5, press 5.
To select number 15, press
+10, then 5.
To select number 30, press
+10, +10, then 10.
7
9
10
+10
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Timer Operations
Remote
ONLY
Setting the Timer
INFO
Remote control
Using Daily Timer, you can wake up with your favorite
song. On the other hand, with Recording Timer, you can
make a tape of a radio broadcast automatically.
• You cannot activate Daily Timer and Recording Timer at a
time. (Activating either timer deactivates the other timer.)
• To correct a misentry during the process, press CANCEL.
You can return to the previous step.
AUDIO
AUDIO
TV
1 Select one of the timer setting modes—ON for Daily
Timer or Recording Timer.
Recording Timer
Daily Timer
CLOCK/
TIMER
ON
REC TIMER
DAILYTIMER
Canceled
Clock setting
ON
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
7
9
10
+10
2 Make the timer setting as you want.
L
BALANCE
R
SET
CANCEL
SET
CLOCK/
TIMER
Repeat the procedure until you finish setting in the
following order:
1
2
3
Set the hour then minute for on-time.
Set the hour then minute for off-time.
For Recording Timer: Select the playback
source—“TUNER-FM” or “TUNER-AM.”
For Daily Timer: Select the playback source—
“TUNER-FM,” “TUNER-AM,” “DISC,”
“TAPE-A,” “TAPE-B” or “AUX IN.”
EX.: When “TUNER-FM” is selected.
4
5
Select a preset station for “TUNER-FM” and
“TUNER-AM,” or select a disc, group, and then
track number for “DISC.”
Select the volume level.
• You can select the volume level (“VOLUME 0” –
“VOLUME 30” and “VOLUME --”). If you select
“VOLUME --,” the volume is set to the last level
when the System has been turned off.
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To turn off the Timer after the setting is done
You can turn off the timer after it has been set.
3 Turn off the System (on standby) if you have set the
timer with the System turned on.
• Since Daily Timer is activated at the same time everyday,
you may need to cancel it on some particular days.
AUDIO
1 Select the timer you want to cancel (REC TIMER or
DAILYTIMER) you want to cancel.
Recording Timer
Daily Timer
CLOCK/
TIMER
How Daily Timer actually works
ON
REC TIMER
DAILYTIMER
Once the Daily Timer has been set, the timer (
)
Canceled
ON
Clock setting
indicator and DAILY indicator are lit on the display.
Daily Timer is activated at the same time everyday until
the timer is turned off manually (see the next column).
• Daily Timer starts working only when the System is
turned off (on standby).
2 Turn off the selected timer.
CANCEL
When the on-time comes
The System turns on, tunes in to the specified station or
starts playing the specified source, and sets the volume
level to the preset level.
• The timer (
) indicator goes off.
When the off-time comes
To turn on the timer again, repeat the step 1 and press SET
in step 2.
The System stops playback, and turns off (standby).
• The timer setting remains in memory until you change
it.
Timer Priority
If the settings for Sleep Timer and Recording Timer/Daily
Timer overlap, the timers work as described below.
• Sleep Timer (see page 15) has priority over the Recording
Timer and Daily Timer.
How Recording Timer actually works
When Recording Timer has been set, Timer (
)
indicator and the REC indicator are lit on the display.
Recording Timer works only once.
• Recording Timer starts working only when the System
is turned off (on standby).
Canceled
6:00
6:30
7:00
7:30
When the on-time comes
The System turns on, tunes in to the specified station, sets
the volume level to the preset level, and starts recording.
Recording Timer/
Daily Timer
When the off-time comes
Sleep Timer
The System stops recording, and turns off (standby).
• The timer setting remains in memory until you change
it.
The System turns off.
• In this case, Recording Timer/Daily Timer does not work.
Recording/Playback
Canceled
6:00
6:30
7:00
7:30
Recording Timer/
Daily Timer
Sleep Timer
The System turns off.
• In this case, Recording Timer/Daily Timer is canceled. (If
Sleep Timer shuts off the System earlier than the off time
you have set for Recording Timer, recording stops when
Sleep Timer shuts off the System.)
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setup Menu Operations
Initial settings
INFO
Remote Control
Some items in the menus cannot be changed during
playback.
1 Press SET UP.
AUDIO
TV
LANGUAGE
MENU LANGUAGE
AUDIO LANGUAGE
SUBTITLE
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ENGLISH
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE
2 Press 2 (or 3) to select the menu.
3 Press 5 (or ∞) to move to select the item.
4 Press ENTER.
/ / / /
ENTER
SET UP
5 Press 5 (or ∞) to select the options, then press
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
ENTER.
7
9
To erase a preference display
10
+10
Press SET UP.
LANGUAGE menu
Item
Contents
MENU LANGUAGE
You can select the initial menu language of DVD Video (see page 43).
You can select the initial audio language of DVD Video (see page 43).
You can select the initial subtitle language of DVD Video (see page 43).
You can select “ENGLISH,” “CHINESE,” or “SPANISH” as the on-screen language.
AUDIO LANGUAGE
SUBTITLE
ON SCREEN LANGUAGE
PICTURE menu
Item
Contents
MONITOR TYPE
You can select the monitor type to match your TV when you play back DVD Video discs recorded for
wide-screen televisions.
16:9/16:9 MULTI (Wide television screen): For a wide-screen (16:9) TV.
4:3 LB/4:3 MULTI LB (Letter box conversion): For a conventional (4:3) TV. Displays a wide-
screen picture to fit the width of the TV screen keeping the aspect ratio.
16:9
4:3 LB
4:3 PS/4:3 MULTI PS (Pan Scan conversion): For a conventional (4:3) TV. The picture is zoomed
up for filling the screen vertically and the left and right sides of the picture are cut off.
• By selecting “MULTI” mode, the color system of the System changes automatically to match the
color system of the loaded disc. For the color system setting, see page 14.
4:3 PS
PICTURE SOURCE
You can obtain optimal picture quality by selecting the source type of the disc contents.
AUTO: Normally, select this option. The System recognizes the picture type (film or video source) of
the current disc according to the disc information.
FILM: For a film source disc.
VIDEO: For a video source disc.
SCREEN SAVER
FILE TYPE
You can set the screen saver function to ON or OFF.
ON: The on-screen display becomes dark when no operation is done for about 5 minutes.
OFF: To cancel the screen saver.
You can select a file type to play.
AUDIO: To play MP3/WMA files.
STILL PICTURE: To play JPEG files.
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUDIO menu
Item
Contents
DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT
Set this item correctly when using the OPTICAL DIGITAL OUTPUT terminal on the rear.
PCM ONLY: When connecting to audio equipment which can decode only linear PCM signals.
DOLBY DIGITAL/PCM: When connecting to a Dolby Digital decoder or an amplifier with a built-
in Dolby Digital decoder.
STREAM/PCM: When connecting to a DTS decoder or an amplifier with a built-in DTS decoder.
DOWN MIX
Set this item properly according to your digital audio connection to play sound of the surround
multichannel audio on a DVD Video.
• This setting is effective for digital audio output if “DIGITAL AUDIO OUTPUT” is set to “PCM
ONLY.”
DOLBY SURROUND: Select this when connecting to a surround decoder.
STEREO: Select this when connecting to a stereo receiver, MD player, TV, etc.
D.RANGE COMPRESSION
Set this item to listen to DVD Video recorded in Dolby Digital format at low or middle volume.
AUTO: You can enjoy powerful playback sound.
ON: Select this if the sound level of DVD Video is lower than the one of TV program to make the
sound at a lower volume clear.
OTHERS menu
Item
Contents
RESUME
You can select Resume.
ON: The System resumes playback from the position where playback has been stopped if the disc is
still in the disc tray.
OFF: Resume is deactivated.
ON SCREEN GUIDE
Activate or deactivate the on-screen guide.
ON: Activate the on-screen guide.
OFF: Deactivate the on-screen guide.
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating the TV
Operating TV
Remote control
You can operate the JVC’s or other manufacturers’ TV using
this remote control.
1 Slide the AUDIO/TV selector to “TV.”
TV
AUDIO
TV/VIDEO
AUDIO
TV
TV
TV VOL +/–
CHANNEL +/–
2 Press and hold until the following steps are complete.
TV
ENTER
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
3
10 keys
7
9
ENTER
10
+10
4 Enter the 2-digit manufacture’s code number.
1
2
5
8
0
3
4
6
7
9
10
+10
Manufacture’s code
Manufacture Code number
5 Release
TV.
JVC
01
To operate the TV
To turn on or To select the input
Hitachi
Magnavox
Mitsubishi
Panasonic
Philips
RCA
10
To adjust TV
volume:
02
off the TV:
mode (either TV or
VIDEO):
03
04,11
15
TV
TV VOL
TV/VIDEO
05
Samsung
Sanyo
12
13, 14
06
To select the TV channel:
Sharp
Sony
07
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
CHANNEL
Toshiba
Zenith
08
or
09
7
9
10
+10
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Information
Daily Operations—Sound&Other Adjustments
(see pages 12 to 15)
Learning More about This System
Introduction (see pages 1 to 2)
Playable Disc Types:
• About audio format
Creating Your Own Sound Modes—User Mode:
• When you unplug the AC power cord or if a power failure
occurs, the User Mode settings will be erased in a few days.
If this happens, set the User Modes again.
Creating 3-dimensional Sound Field—3D Phonic:
• While you use the headphones, 3D Phonic is canceled
temporary.
• 3D Phonic is also applied to the optical digital output
signals through the OPTICAL DIGITAL OUTPUT
terminal.
Changing the Color System and Scanning Mode:
• If you play back an NTSC disc with the color system set to
“PAL (PROG),” the disc will be reproduced using “PAL
60” format, however, if the TV does not support this
format, the screen may rolls over upward and downward
rapidly.
• If you play back a PAL disc with the color system set to
“NTSC (PROG),” you can watch the playback pictures, but
the following symptoms may occur:
– The items on the disc menu will be blurred, and be shown
slightly shifted when highlighted.
– The aspect ratio of the picture may differ from the
original aspect ratio.
– The picture movement is not smooth.
• You cannot change the scanning mode to progressive in the
following cases:
– When your TV does not support the progressive video
input.
– When you have not connected your TV to the unit using
a component video cord.
• When you play back an NTSC disc in progressive scanning
mode, the System outputs the NTSC signal regardless of
the color system settings.
–
Linear PCM: Uncompressed digital audio, the same
format used for CDs and most studio masters.
–
Dolby Digital: Compressed digital audio, developed by
Dolby Laboratories, which enables multi-channel
encode to create the realistic surround sound.
–
DTS (Digital Theater Systems): Compressed digital
audio, developed by Digital Theater Systems, Inc., which
enables multi-channel like Dolby Digital. As the
compression ratio is lower than for Dolby Digital, it
provides wider dynamic range and better separation.
• If you use a DVD-RAM with a cartridge, take the disc out
of the cartridge before inserting.
Daily Operations—Playback (see pages 7 to 11)
Listening to the Radio:
• If you store a new station into an occupied preset number,
the previously stored station in that number will be erased.
• When you unplug the AC power cord or if a power failure
occurs, the preset stations will be erased in a few days. If
this happens, preset the stations again.
Playing Back a Disc:
• On some DVD, SVCD, or VCD discs, the actual operations
may be different from what is explained in this manual, due
to the programming and disc structure; such differences are
not a malfunction of this System.
• Some DVD Audios prohibit downmix. When you play
back such a disc, “LR ONLY” appears on the display and
the System plays back the left front and right front signals.
• When playing back a DVD Audio disc recorded in MLP
(Meridian Lossless Packing; a lossless audio compression
system that can completely recreate the PCM signal), the
signals are recognized as the linear PCM signals, however,
no indicator lights up on the display.
Setting the Clock:
• “0:00” will flash on the display until you set the clock.
• The clock may gain or lose 1 to 2 minutes per month. If this
happens, reset the clock.
• For MP3/WMA playback...
– MP3/WMA discs require a longer readout time than
regular CDs. (It depends on the complexity of the group/
file configuration.)
– Some MP3/WMA files cannot be played back and will
be skipped. This results from their recording processes
and conditions.
– When making MP3/WMA discs, use ISO 9660 Level 1
or Level 2 for the disc format.
– This System can play back MP3/WMA files with the
extension code <.mp3> or <.wma> (regardless of the
letter case—upper/lower).
Unique DVD/VCD Operations (see pages 16 to 18)
Selecting the Sound Track:
• On some DVD Videos, you cannot change audio languages
while playing back.
Playing Back Bonus Group:
• You cannot select a track in the bonus group for Program
Play.
– It is recommended that you make each MP3/WMA file at
a sampling rate of 44.1 kHz and at bit rate of 128 kbps.
This System cannot play back files made at bit rate of less
than 64 kbps.
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Special Picture Playback:
• During slow-motion playback, no sound will be
reproduced.
• This System can play back JPEG files with the extension
code <.jpg> or <.jpeg> (regardless of the letter case—
upper/lower).
• You cannot use frame-by-frame playback for DVD-VR.
• While zoomed in, the picture may look coarse.
• This System may not play back JPEG files properly if they
are recorded on the devices other than digital still camera.
• During slide-show playback, zoom cannot be operated.
Advanced Disc Operations (see pages 19 to 21)
Programming the Playing Order—Program Play:
• While programming steps...
Recording Operations (see pages 29 to 30)
General:
– Your entry will be ignored if you have tried to program
an item number that does not exist on the disc (for
example, selecting track 14 on a disc that only has 12
tracks).
– For SVCD/VCD/CD loaded on the other tray than the
current one, the System may prompt for the group
number entry as well, however, these entries will be
ignored during playback.
• You cannot use Program Play and Random Play for DVD-
VR/JPEG discs.
• The programmed contents will remain until you erase it.
• While the PROGRAM indicator is on, you cannot change
the disc to play. (DISC 1 – 5 on the remote control and 3
on the main unit do not work.)
• You cannot change the source during recording.
• There is leader tape which cannot be recorded onto at the
start and the end of cassette tapes. Thus, when recording
discs or radio broadcasts, wind the leader tape first to
ensure that the recording will be made without any music
part lost.
• If no cassette is inserted or a protected tape has been
inserted, “NO REC” appears on the display.
• If you select the Surround Mode (DANCE, HALL,
STADIUM—see page 13), you can also record the
surround elements. (Other sound adjustments do not affect
the recording level.)
Recording on a Tape:
• When using Reverse Mode for recording, start recording in
the forward (3) direction first; otherwise, recording will
stop when only one side (reverse) of the tape is recorded.
Synchronized Disc Recording:
On-Screen Disc Operations (see pages 22 to 28)
Operations Using the On-screen Bar:
• A-B Repeat:
• Recording starts from the first track even if you have
selected a track by using ¢/4. To specify track(s) to
record, program them (or use One Track Recording).
• While recording, you cannot use disc operation buttons
(except for 7) and sound setting buttons (except for
volume control).
• Everything on the disc goes onto the tape in the order on
the disc, or according to the order you have made for
Program Play.
• You cannot use Repeat Play while synchronized recording
(Repeat Play will be canceled).
• DISC REC START button does not work:
– While playback is paused.
– A-B Repeat cannot be used on some DVDs.
– A-B Repeat is possible only within the same title or
within the same track.
Operations on the Control Screen:
• For DVD-VR playback...
–
Original Program: The System can play back the
original picture in the recorded order.
–
Play List: The System can play back the play list edited
by the recording equipment. The control screen for the
play list appears only when the disc has the play list.
– Resume is not available.
– For details about DVD-VR format and play list, refer to
the manual of the recording equipment.
• For JPEG files playback...
– It is recommended that you record a file at 640 x 480
resolution. (If a file has been recorded at a resolution of
more than 640 x 480, it will take a long time to be
shown.)
– This System can play only baseline JPEG files*.
Progressive JPEG files* or lossless JPEG files* cannot
be played.
– When Random Play is activated.
– While playing back or being paused with Program Play.
• When the tape reaches its end in the forward direction (3)
during recording, the last song will be re-recorded at the
beginning of the reverse side (2).
• When the tape reaches its end in the reverse side (2)
during recording, recording stops even though the disc is
not entirely recorded.
* Baseline JPEG format: Used for digital cameras,
web, etc.
Progressive JPEG format:Used for web.
Lossless JPEG format: An old type and rarely used
now.
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enjoying Karaoke (see pages 31 to 33)
Setup Menu Operations (see pages 36 to 37)
General:
• If the upper and lower parts of the menu are cut off, adjust
the picture size control of the TV.
Reducing the Lead Vocal—Vocal Masking:
• The Vocal Masking Mode setting is not applied to the
optical digital output signals through the OPTICAL
DIGITAL OUTPUT terminal.
LANGUAGE menu:
• When playing a Karaoke disc in the Vocal Masking Mode,
the vocal may not be reduced or the volume may be lower.
• On some music, the Vocal Masking Mode does not provide
the correct effect.
• When the language you have selected for MENU
LANGUAGE, AUDIO LANGUAGE, or SUBTITLE is
not recorded on a disc, the original language is used as the
initial language.
Scoring Your Karaoke Skill:
PICTURE menu—MONITOR TYPE:
• Even if “4:3 PS (MULTI)” is selected, the screen size may
become 4:3 letter box with some DVD Videos. This
depends on how the discs are recorded.
• Before the scoring function is activated, you can select the
track by pressing ¢/4 (except for DVD Video and
SVCD/VCD with PBC).
• If you press ¢/4 while scoring, playback stops and
scoring is canceled (but the track is not skipped).
• If you activate the scoring function while playback is
stopped with Resume function, playback starts from the
position you have stopped.
• When you select “16:9 (MULTI)” for a picture whose
aspect ratio is 4:3, the picture slightly changes due to the
process for converting the picture width.
AUDIO menu—DOWN MIX:
• This setting is not effective when DTS software is played
• You can also activate the scoring function while playing
back. In this case, the scoring starts from that point.
• While the scoring function is in use, you cannot use the
following buttons: V.MASKING, MIC MIX, RESERVE,
and disc operation buttons (except for ¢/4/7).
• Activating the scoring function cancels Repeat Play.
• You cannot use the scoring function during Program Play,
Random Play, or recording.
back.
OTHERS menu—ON SCREEN GUIDE:
• The setup menu and on-screen bar will be displayed (and
recorded) even though this function is set to “OFF.”
Subtitles and the information for zoom-in always appear on
the display regardless of this setting.
• The ranking (top 3) is cleared when you turn off the
System. (If the number of songs scored is less than 3, “0
POINT” appears.)
Reserving Karaoke Songs—Karaoke Program Play:
• If you have selected a disc tray on which DVD Audio or
DVD-VR is loaded, that disc number is skipped.
• If DVD Audio or DVD-VR is loaded on the current tray,
you cannot use Karaoke Program Play.
• When the track starts playback, that track number will be
erased from the Karaoke reserve screen (the programmed
contents will remain until you erase it).
• While the PROGRAM indicator is flashing, you cannot
change the disc to play. (DISC 1 – 5 on the remote control
and 3 on the main unit do not work.)
Maintenance
To get the best performance of the System, keep your discs,
tapes, and mechanism clean.
Handling discs
• Remove the disc from its case by holding it at the edge
while pressing the center hole lightly.
• Do not touch the shiny surface of the disc, or bend the disc.
• Put the disc back in its case after use to prevent warping.
• Be careful not to scratch the surface of the disc when
placing it back in its case.
• Avoid exposure to direct sunlight, temperature extremes,
and moisture.
To clean the disc:
Timer Operations (see pages 34 to 35)
Wipe the disc with a soft cloth in a straight line from center
Setting the Timer:
to edge.
• If you do not specify the preset station or track number
correctly while setting a timer, the currently selected
station or the first track will be played when timer is
activated.
• When you unplug the AC power cord or if a power failure
occurs, the timer will be canceled. You need to set the
clock first, then the timer again.
• Without stopping the recording, you cannot change the
source after Recording Timer starts recording.
• If you set DVD Video as the source, Daily Timer will not
work correctly.
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Handling cassette tapes
Troubleshooting
If you are having a problem with your System, check this list
for a possible solution before calling for service.
• If the tape is loose in its cassette, take up the slack by
inserting a pencil in one of the reels and rotate it.
– If the tape is loose, it may get stretched, cut, or caught in
the cassette.
General:
• Be careful not to touch the tape surface.
• Avoid the following places to store the tape—in dusty
places, in direct sunlight or heat, in moist areas, on a TV or
speaker, or near a magnet.
To keep the best recording and playback sound quality
• Use a cotton swab moistened with alcohol to clean the
heads, capstans, and pinch rollers.
• Use a head demagnetizer (available at electronics and
audio shops) to demagnetize the heads (when the System
turned off).
Adjustments or settings are suddenly canceled before
you finish.
] There is a time limit. Repeat procedure again.
Operations are disabled.
] The built-in microprocessor may malfunction due to
external electrical interference. Unplug the AC power
cord and then plug it back in.
Unable to operate the System from the remote control.
] The path between the remote control and the remote
sensor on the System is blocked.
To protect your recording
] The batteries are exhausted.
No sound is heard.
Cassettes have two small tabs on the back
to protect from unexpected erasure or re-
recording.
To protect your recording, remove these
tabs.
] Speaker connections are incorrect or loose.
] Headphones are connected.
No picture appears on the screen.
] The video cord connections are incorrect or loose.
No picture is displayed on the TV screen, the picture is
blurred, or the picture is divided into two parts.
] The System is connected to a TV which does not support
progressive video input.
To re-record on a protected tape, cover
the holes with adhesive tape.
] Incorrect color system is selected (see page 14).
The left and right edges of the picture are missing on the
screen.
Cleaning the System
• Stains should be wiped off with a soft cloth. If the System
is heavily stained, wipe it with a cloth soaked in water-
diluted neutral detergent and wrung well, then wipe clean
with a dry cloth.
] Select “4:3 LB (MULTI)” for “MONITOR TYPE” (see
page 36).
• Since the System may deteriorate in quality, become
damaged or get its paint peeled off, be careful about the
following:
– DO NOT wipe it with a hard cloth.
– DO NOT wipe it strong.
– DO NOT wipe it with thinner or benzine.
– DO NOT apply any volatile substance such as
insecticides to it.
– DO NOT allow any rubber or plastic to remain in contact
for a long time.
Radio Operations:
Hard to listen to broadcasts because of noise.
] Antennas connections are incorrect or loose.
] The AM loop antenna is too close to the System.
] The FM antenna is not properly extended and positioned.
Disc Operations:
The disc does not play.
] You have inserted a disc whose Region Code is not “2.”
(“REGION ERR” appears on the display.)
] The disc is placed upside down. Place the disc with the
label side up.
ID3 Tag on an MP3 disc cannot be shown.
]
There are two types of ID3 Tag—Version 1 and Version 2.
This System can only show ID3 Tag Version 1.
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MP3 groups and tracks are not played back as you
expect.
Tape Operations:
The cassette holder cannot be opened.
] The playing order is determined when the disc was
] Power supply from the AC power cord has been cut off
recorded. It depends on the writing application.
while the tape was running. Turn on the System.
MP3/WMA or JPEG files are not played back.
] The inserted disc may include both type of tracks (MP3/
WMA files and JPEG files). In this case, you can only
play back the files selected by the “FILE TYPE” setting
(see page 36).
Recording Operations:
Impossible to record.
] Small tabs on the back of the cassette are removed.
Cover the holes with adhesive tape.
] You have changed the “FILE TYPE” setting after you
] The Karaoke scoring function is in use. Cancel the
scoring function (see page 32).
inserted a disc. In this case, reload the disc.
The disc sound is discontinuous.
] The disc is scratched or dirty.
The disc playback sounds strange.
Karaoke Operations:
Cannot activate the scoring function.
] Cancel Key Control (see page 32).
No subtitle appears on the display though you have
selected the initial subtitle language.
] Some DVDs are programmed to always display no
subtitle initially. If this happens, press SUB TITLE after
starting play (see page 17).
Audio language is different from the one you have
selected as the initial audio language.
] Some DVDs are programmed to always use the original
language initially. If this happens, press AUDIO after
starting play (see page 16).
The disc tray does not open or close.
] The AC power cord is not plugged in.
] Child Lock is in use. “LOCKED” appears in the display
window (see page 21).
] The Program Play is in use. Cancel the Program Play
(see page 20).
] DVD Audio or DVD-VR is playing.
] You cannot use the scoring function while recording, or
while the disc menu for DVD Video/SVCD/VCD is
shown on the TV screen.
Scoring result seems wrong (or “– –” appears).
] The playback time with the scoring function is too short.
It is recommended to sing for more than one and a half
minutes. (If playback time is less than one minute, the
scoring is canceled.)
] No input from the microphone or the input level (MIC
LEVEL) is too low.
] You have sung in too low voice.
Timer Operations:
Daily Timer or Recording Timer does not work.
] The System has been turned on when the on-time comes.
Timer starts working only when the System is turned off.
Language Code List
AA
AB
AF
Afar
FA
FI
Persian
Finnish
Fiji
KM
KN
KO
KS
Cambodian
Kannada
Korean (KOR)
Kashmiri
Kurdish
OM (Afan) Oromo
SU Sundanese
SV Swedish
SW Swahili
TA Tamil
TE Telugu
TG Tajik
Abkhazian
Afrikaans
OR
PA
PL
PS
Oriya
FJ
Panjabi
Polish
AM Ameharic
FO
FY
Faroese
Frisian
AR
AS
AY
AZ
BA
BE
BG
BH
BI
BN
BO
BR
CA
Arabic
Assamese
Aymara
Azerbaijani
Bashkir
KU
KY
LA
LN
LO
LT
Pashto, Pushto
Portuguese
Quechua
GA Irish
Kirghiz
PT
QU
GD Scots Gaelic
Latin
Lingala
Laothian
Lithuanian
Latvian, Lettish
Malagasy
Maori
Macedonian
Malayalam
Mongolian
Moldavian
Marathi
Malay (MAY)
Maltese
Burmese
Nauru
Nepali
Dutch
Norwegian
Occitan
TH Thai
GL
Galician
RM Rhaeto-Romance
TI
Tigrinya
GN Guarani
GU Gujarati
HA Hausa
RN
RO
RU
Kirundi
Rumanian
Russian
TK Turkmen
TL Tagalog
TN Setswana
TO Tonga
TR Turkish
TS Tsonga
TT Tatar
Byelorussian
Bulgarian
Bihari
LV
MG
MI
HI
Hindi
RW Kinyarwanda
Bislama
HR Croatian
HU Hungarian
HY Armenian
SA
SD
SG
SH
SI
Sanskrit
Sindhi
Bengali, Bangla
Tibetan
MK
ML
MN
MO
MR
MS
MT
MY
NA
NE
NL
NO
OC
Sangho
Breton
Catalan
IA
IE
IK
IN
IS
IW
JI
Interlingua
Interlingue
Inupiak
Serbo-Croatian
Singhalese
Slovak
TW Twi
UK Ukrainian
UR Urdu
CO Corsican
SK
SL
SM
SN
SO
SQ
SR
SS
CS
CY
DA
DZ
EL
EO
ET
EU
Czech
Indonesian
Icelandic
Hebrew
Slovenian
Samoan
Shona
UZ Uzbek
Welsh
VI
Vietnamese
Danish
Bhutani
Greek
VO Volapuk
WO Wolof
XH Xhosa
YO Yoruba
ZU Zulu
Yiddish
Somali
JW Javanese
KA Georgian
KK Kazakh
Albanian
Serbian
Esperanto
Estonian
Basque
Siswati
Sesotho
KL
Greenlandic
ST
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Amplifier section
Output Power:
Supplied Accessories
See page 3.
MAIN SPEAKERS: 150 W per channel, min. RMS, driven into
4 Ω at 1 kHz with no more than 10% total harmonic
distortion.
Speakers
Main Speakers
Digital output:
OPTICAL DIGITAL OUTPUT:
–21 dBm to –15 dBm (660 nm 30 nm)
Audio input sensitivity/Impedance
(Measured at 1 kHz, with tape recording signal 300 mV)
Type:
3-Way 3-Speaker Bass Reflex
(Magnetically-Shielded Type)
Speaker systems:
Woofer:
Mid:
Tweeter:
18 cm cone x 1
5 cm cone x 1
2 cm dome x 1
AUX:
MIC 1/2:
300 mV/47 kΩ
3.0 mV/50 kΩ
Power handling capacity:
Impedance:
Frequency range:
Sound pressure level:
150 W
4 Ω
37 Hz – 31 000 Hz
85 dB/W•m
VIDEO OUT:
Color system:
NTSC/PAL selectable
Dimensions (W/H/D) (approx.): 204 mm x 460 mm x 271 mm
VIDEO (composite):
S-VIDEO:
C (chrominance, burst)
COMPONENT (Interlace/Progressive):
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
Mass (approx.):
4.6 kg each
Y (luminance)
0.286 V(p-p)/75 Ω
Surround Speakers
Speaker systems:
Power handling capacity:
Impedance:
8 cm cone x 1
40 W
16 Ω
(Y)
(PB/PR)
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
0.7 V(p-p)/75 Ω
Dimensions (W/H/D) (approx.): 105 mm x 230 mm x 125 mm
Speaker Terminals: 4 Ω − 16 Ω (Main speakers)
16 Ω − 32 Ω (Surround speakers)
Mass (approx.):
0.7 kg each
Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.
Tuner section
FM tuning range:
87.50 MHz – 108.00 MHz
531 kHz – 1 710 kHz (at 9 kHz)
530 kHz – 1 710 kHz (at 10 kHz)
• Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “MLP Lossless”, and the double-D
symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
• “DTS” and “DTS 2.0+DIGITAL OUT” are trademarks of
Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
AM (MW) tuning range:
For Saudi Arabia only 531 kHz – 1 602 kHz (at 9 kHz)
530 kHz – 1 600 kHz (at 10 kHz)
• This product incorporates copyright protection technology
that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property
rights. Use of this copyright protection technology must be
authorized by Macrovision, and is intended for home and
other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized
by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or disassembly is
prohibited.
• “CONSUMERS SHOULD NOTE THAT NOT ALL HIGH
DEFINITION TELEVISION SETS ARE FULLY
COMPATIBLE WITH THIS PRODUCT AND MAY
CAUSE ARTIFACTS TO BE DISPLAYED IN THE
PICTURE. IN CASE OF 525 OR 625 PROGRESSIVE SCAN
PICTURE PROBLEMS, IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT
THE USER SWITCH THE CONNECTION TO THE
‘STANDARD DEFINITION’ OUTPUT. IF THERE ARE
QUESTIONS REGARDING OUR TV SET
Disc player section
Playable disc: DVD Video/DVD Audio/CD/VCD/SVCD
CD-R/CD-RW (recorded in Audio CD/Video CD/
Super Video CD formats and MP3/WMA/JPEG
files)
DVD-R (recorded in DVD Video format)
DVD-RW (recorded in DVD Video format or DVD-
VR format)
DVD-RAM (recorded in DVD-VR format)
Dynamic range:
Horizontal resolution:
Wow and flutter:
80 dB
500 lines
Immeasurable
Cassette deck section
Frequency response
Normal (type I):
Wow and flutter:
50 Hz – 14 000 Hz
0.15% (WRMS)
COMPATIBILITY WITH THIS MODEL 525p AND 625p
DVD PLAYER, PLEASE CONTACT OUR CUSTOMER
SERVICE CENTER.”
General
Power requirement:
AC 110 V / AC 127 V / AC 220 V / AC
230 V – AC 240 V
, (adjustable with
the voltage selector), 50 Hz / 60 Hz
195 W (at operation)
Power consumption:
20 W (on standby)
Dimensions (W/H/D) (approx.): 185 mm x 460 mm x 361 mm
Mass (approx.):
10.9 kg
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OPTICAL DIGITAL OUTPUT Signals
DIGITAL AUDIO
OUTPUT
Output Signals
Playback disc
DVD Video
STREAM/PCM
DOLBY DIGITAL/PCM
PCM ONLY
with 48 kHz, 16/20/24 bit Linear
PCM
1
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM*
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
with 96 kHz, Linear PCM
with Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital bitstream
DTS bitstream
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
with DTS
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
2
DVD Audio*
with 48/96/192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit
Linear PCM
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
44.1 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
with 44.1/88.2/176.4 kHz, 16/20/
24 bit Linear PCM
with Dolby Digital
with DTS
Dolby Digital bitstream
DTS bitstream
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
DVD-RW/RAM in DVD-VR format
with 48 kHz, 16/20/24 bit Linear
PCM
1
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM*
Dolby Digital bitstream
with Dolby Digital
SVCD, VCD, CD
CD with DTS
48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
1
1
44.1 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM* /48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM*
DTS bitstream
44.1 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
32/44.1/48 kHz, 16 bit Linear PCM
MP3/WMA disc
*1 While playing some DVDs, digital signals may be emitted at 20 bits or 24 bits (at their original bit rate) through the OPTICAL DIGITAL
OUTPUT terminal if the discs are not copy-protected.
*2 There is no output for DVD Audio with content protection set.
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parts Index
Remote control
Button
Page
Button
Page
0
PUSH-OPEN
# ^ 11, 29
SOUND MODE
TAPE-A
(
4
3
%
~
13
Button
Page
Button
Page
REC START/
STOP
™
¢
$
30
7, 11, 30
7, 11, 29, 30
8
AUDIO
z
x
8
7
KARAOKE
SCORING
1
32
TAPE-B
TV
38
REVERSE
MODE
11, 29
12
TUNING
7
9 – 11, 20
KEY #
KEY
:
A
F
32
32
12
VOLUME +/–
7, 12, 31
¡
¢
8
1
4
/
9 Q 8, 10, 11, 18
7 . 9, 10
RHYTHM AX
/
L / R
BALANCE
P
E
9, 18
Remote control
5
∞
3
2
/
/
/
/
10, 15, 17, 18, MIC MIX
d
W
R
i
O
;
g
f
Y
I
31, 33
10, 26
23 – 26
17
ENTER
23 – 28, 36, 38
MENU/PL
z
1
+ / –
F
T
D
h
13 – 15, 33, 34 ON SCREEN
9, 10, 19, 25, 38 PAGE
x
10 keys
2
3
4
5
6
c
3D PHONIC
14
12
PLAY MODE
REPEAT
19, 20
21, 28
12
ACTIVE
BASS EX
v
n
b
m
.
Q
RHYTHM AX
RESERVE
RETURN
ANGLE
AUDIO
y
r
m
17
33
7
16
10
,
P
W
8
AUDIO/TV
selector
7, 38
REVERSE
MODE
11
9
p
q
AUDIO VOL
+ / –
,
7, 12
SCAN MODE
SET
U
j
14
8, 12, 13, 15, 33,
34, 35
E
R
w
AUX
v
l
5
k
7
CANCEL
20, 33, 35
38
SET UP
w
G
/
S
t
3
n
q
36
e
r
t
y
u
i
CHANNEL +/–
SETTING
SLEEP
12, 33
15
1
4
2
5
8
0
3
6
T
U
CLOCK/
TIMER
15, 34, 35
7
9
SOUND MODE
SUB TITLE
13
Y
I
10
+10
DIMMER
DISC 1–5
H
2
o
4
s
P
b
p
15
9
17
2 3
2 3
TAPE-A
TAPE-B
7, 11
7, 11
10, 26
o
;
s
f
h
k
/
O
A
:
S
a
d
g
j
DVD LEVEL
14
7, 9
32
8
3
DVD/CD
ECHO
TOP MENU/
PG
D
G
F
H
FM MODE
FM/AM
TV VOL + / –
TV/VIDEO
V.MASKING
VFP
6
c
a
U
u
38
l
7, 8
17
38
GLANCE
BACK
32
Main unit
14
GROUP/
TITLE
e
9
ZOOM
18, 28
1
8
2
3
4
5
9
0
Main unit
Remote
sensor
-
=
Button
Page
Button
Page
2
8
!
%
=
-
6
7
DISC REC
START
¡
30
~
6
Display
6
!
@
7
8 – 11, 20, 21
DUBBING
DVD/CD
£
0
)
9
@
30
¡
¢
8
1
4
/
8, 10, 11, 18
7, 9
14
#
$
%
( ) _ +
¡ ™ £ ¢
/
9
DVD LEVEL
FM/AM
9, 18
12
7, 8
32
ACTIVE
BASS EX. +/–
KARAOKE
SCORING
^
AUX
+
_
1
5
7
MIC 1 / MIC 2
MIC LEVEL
PHONES
&
*
7
=
31
31
7
DEMO
Disc trays
7
9
&
*
7
0
3
DISC 1–5
/
9, 21, 30
PRESET +/–
9
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mains (AC) Line Instruction (not applicable for Europe, U.S.A.,
Canada, and U.K.)
CAUTION for mains (AC) line
BEFORE PLUGGING IN, do check that your mains (AC)
line voltage corresponds with the position of the voltage
selector switch provided on the outside of this equipment
and, if different, reset the voltage selector switch, to
prevent from a damage or risk of fire/electric shock.
EN, AR, PE
0205AIMMDWJEM
© 2005 Victor Company of Japan, Limited
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|